Home

R&S FSW User Manual - rohde

1. TOI measurement ot TYING n E NK 260 447 461 KE UE 260 447 Marker search area Remote control E 861 Marker table Evaluation method nie 398 InfOFfm atiOl 2 2 2 ee bent rrr re sous rode Far eo Exe e rere rens 72 Marker to Trace Mel M 261 448 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Mask monitoring SEM M 165 MAXH trace information sese 71 Maximize MD 83 Maximizing Display e Windows remote e Meas Time channel setting ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 69 Measurement accuracy External generator sss 296 Measurement channel Creating remote ssssssssss 624 626 627 Deleting remote Duplicating remote sse Querying remote cese Renaming remote ES Ge Replacing remote sess Selecting remote E Measurement examples CP AGCLR soies tuie adetin 147 148 149 External Mixer B21 sss 339 Harmonics 473 240 473 163 EE 221 Time Domain Power 226 el 240 Measurement results SEM ae 184 Spurious Emissions sse 204 Measurements All Functions Off eiii eterne 106 APD Carrier to Noise i e 103 154 155 CODE M
2. CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 869 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL CulateDElTamarker mzGGham ERAMe 876 CAL CulateDElTamarker zmz GGham GAbea 876 CAL Culate DEL Tamarker zm GCGbRam 2 MAximumfPDEAkKT 876 CAL Culate DEL Tamarker zm GCGbRam 2 MiNimumt PDEAKT 876 CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe assesses eene nenne 877 CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELOwW 1 sceeeeseee eene 877 CAL CulateDElTamarker mz GGbRamvM AvimumNENT 877 CALOCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK sees 877 CAL CulateDElTamarker mz GGbRamv MiNimum AbBOVe 878 CAL Culate DEL Tamarker mz GGhRam v MiNimum BEL ow eene 878 CAL CulateDElTamarker mz GGbRamv MiNimumNENT 878 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeees 878 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 875 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENERT Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time
3. 69 Compensation After calibration external generator 312 Comp ter nare iicet eit arteriae n tab rin aa i 591 Changing WEE 33 epo m 573 Connector AC power supply eeeen i a 47 AUX PORT i Baseband Inp t in tct ext 44 Display Port rie eee ire rere 48 DVI External mixer 2 rri irre en rore seed cos 46 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 External Mixer B21 sss 336 GPIB interface eere rete te erede res 50 IF VIDEO DEMOD i we 49 LAN 2A esahitolnnteimee A Aiea 48 Noise source contra 40 OCXO 50 PHONES ern teint roter recte ct nat 40 e A0 PROBE 40 REFINPUT 1 echo Heer 51 REINU DOG creer ter petet eret e e teet 46 SYNC TRIGGER m 49 TRIGGER 3 EE 49 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT emmA 45 Viel A0 Connectors AUX control external generator ss 292 External generator Control 292 EXT REP ER 516 GPIB zm IEANMIDECOHDEMOD 2 geterggie oen thuat nta 342 REF OUTPUT niai lere a eina a SYNC TRIGGER e Context sensitive menus c ccccccceceeesceeceeeesseeeeeeseeeeees 38 Continue single sweep SOfIKGy 2 55 ch eee e tede ert eds 245 373 Continuous Sequencer Nil 99 Continuous sweep SOfIKGy iscriverti 245 373 SIOPPING eene eite reet doe tue cetus epen s 427 Conventions SCPl commands s
4. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 914 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 9 3 Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF i e no traces is stored Example MMEM SEL TRAC ON Manual operation See Items on page 496 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL State MMEMory SELect I TEM TRANsducer ALL State This command includes or excludes transducer factors when storing or loading a con figuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL TRAN ALL ON Manual operation See Items on page 496 See Save on page 522 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings See also e INSTrument SELect on page 627 to select the channel MMEMon CUB ai E DEE 915 MMEMoniClR ar STAM Gis T 916 MMEMOV LOAD AU TO i hve ceeded ence eret rere th eo Le ee a ener 916 MMEMON e Eet RE KE 916 MMEMone LOAD TY Pe CHANN eine dct nee regere eet eens 917 MME Mom STORE c p une 917 MMEMOV STOR amp STATe NEX ree ececcccce che bn enne a pip kaa darani kahinin a naiiai aandaa nar iaeiaiai 917 MMEMO STORET YP e TL E 918 SYS Tem PRESON MMC m 918 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute 2 ceseecsereeeccenenecenenereceseenabeaseeeneneeeseanaaeeees 918 MMEMory CLEar ALL This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory You can select the directory with MMEMory CDIRe
5. Subnet Mask de GE el ue Support Information creer Information remote sss 954 Suppressing File name dialog rette rcs 510 Sweep ADONG ih oria Papa 373 427 Behavior Spurious Emissions 202 Configuration Softkey sesessssssss 367 Continuous i 245 COUNT e E SES 971 Count Spectrograms sss 413 Default settings 362 Mode erc eerte e E 366 elle iie tree retentis tri rH E gui ee 245 Points amp 406 Points Spurious Emissions range 202 Settings Spectrogram ssssssssssss 374 Single 245 Titne remote eerie nece t re in 772 WY M R 364 372 Type remote os cece cscs tert nea terrere teen 773 Sweep list Deleting ranges esses 177 203 Detector 202 Fast SEM Gaia innt oreteri ten be tet ro tdi 174 Filter tyDG i i iiri 201 Inserting ranges E 203 Limit absolute een 203 Lirmit Check uini erri 203 Limit relative 176 Preamplifier 202 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Range start stop SEM ssssssssssssss 174 Range start stop Spurious Emissions 201 RBW Reference level A RF attenuation eed ceres RF attenuation mode SEM Num M Spurious Emissions Sek gie Sweep beha
6. T Dm Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Measurement This command determines the ideal span bandwidths and detector for the current power measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurement CPOWer channel power measurement OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement CN Carrier to noise ratio CNO Carrier to noise ration referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth Manual operation See Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 See Adjust Settings on page 157 See Adjust Settings on page 162 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not overload the R amp S FSW or limit the dynamic range by too small a S N ratio To determine the best reference level the R amp S FSW aborts current measurements and performs a series of test sweeps After it has finished the test it continues with the actual measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end This is only possible in single sweep mode
7. ein tenets 962 GPIB remote Control sss 962 inilio 596 RF attenuation Auto SOTIKGy 1 er ntactusirceauians 357 Impact hri Manual softkey sssssssse 357 Mode GEM range ssessssssssssesesesssesrsrrsesserrserrene 175 Mode Spurious Emissions range iss zs NOISE TOOK n SEM rarige s ee ertt erts Lese ete Spurious Emissions range ges ini p dale e Analog Baseband connector eseeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeenee Connector remote Overload protection Overload protection remote sssss 795 aum 795 797 RF Input ConneCGlor o iret eee nhan 46 RF overrange External Mixer B21 eseese eeren 319 328 805 RF OVLD ENOT oreen TP E 74 1009 External generator ccccccccecceeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeenes 301 RF OVLD status display ssesssss 75 1010 RF Power Deng M 386 Trigger level remote ssssssssssss 784 Rising Slope Power sensor sse 289 Rivision string GPIB EG 596 RM trace information eeeeseeseeieeeeeeirrreseserserrrrrnnnen 71 RMS VIE 408 RMS Average prc 252 RMS Average detector Rotary Knob rai eoa paite eei eret 43 RRC filter js RE 179 RUN CONT Ch ET 245 373 RUN S
8. 105 208 Correlating CP AGLR orioneu ds li rte arene Evaluation methods Frequency sweep sssssseeeeeeeneerenennennnn Harmonic Distortion Spurious Emissions SlaliSties m X Time Domain Power TOI Ges E PA Eripe NE Measurementsition time cie 214 Measurement time sssssss 264 Auto settings Power sensor Remote zs dns teh ERR Ed Menus Context sensitive sssesssssssseeeeeeen 38 Messages Commands uc hoe ret rrt dut eee taces 559 Instrument e Instrument responses sssseseeee 560 att 559 MI trace information s sess 71 1042 R amp S FSW Index Microbutton mcn nini MIL Std bandwidth P ll REN MINH trace Information 71 Mini Front Panel Displaying see User Manual ee eeen 83 Hiding restoring A 540 Key combination ni USING ascites di EE Minimum Marker positioning csse 458 pl EE 458 SOfIKOV ET 458 Mixer Type External Mixer B21 ssessessss 328 MKR aC MH eege eebe Ee eege eet 445 MKR gt E 450 457 MKR FUNCT AC mE M 458 MMGMMONICS e 560 Optional E MOD marker functions esse 72 Mode channel setting ssssssseees 69 Modes see Operating
9. 124 133 359 Cancellation remote control ss 776 Cancellation softkey 124 133 359 Correction see Cancellation EN 124 133 359 IR 441 442 Floor RF attenuation eese 354 Marker m Saving settings eene 493 jo 277 343 Noise Figure ll lte Ire EE ER Noise measurement Activating Deactivating esseeesssss 462 Beate gegen eigene EE Ee 462 UE C ME 460 Remote control terrre ine 882 Noise source control CONNECTION mem 40 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1043 R amp S FSW Index NOR External generator usesseessssss 296 301 NOR channel bar 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetees 70 NO REF ue e 74 1009 Normalization Approximate external generator 297 External generator sssesseeseeeessrsrrsrrersreeseee 296 308 NTRariSitioh EE 573 Number of Readings ovde 288 Numerator Frequencies external generator 299 306 Numeric parameters sss esse 76 Numeric values Sp eclal 3 2 tei ct fter em e entes 564 O OBW irpan nnana e deeg 158 OP OW GT saareen gege 161 Power remote control gs 671 E e CN 162 Channel bandwidth esee 162 Channel bandwidth remote c
10. Sub ErrorQueueHandler Dim result As String Dim hasErr As Boolean True Do mbSession Write SYST ERR result mbSession ReadString Dim parts As String result Split If parts 0 0 Then hasErr False Console WriteLine result Else Console WriteLine result End If Loop While hasErr End Sub 11 14 1 7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public SUB Questionablestatus Ques SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer STATus QUEStionable EVENt CALL InstrRead analyzer Ques Debug Print Questionable Status Ques END SUB REM ck ck ck ck ck ckck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck kk kk ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ko kc sk kc kk kc ko kckckckockok REM Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register Public SUB Operationstatus Oper SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer STATus OPERation EVENt CALL InstrRead analyzer Oper Debug Print Operation Status Oper END SUB REM X Xkkckck kk kk kk kk kk Ck kk Sk kk Ck kk ck kckck ck kc kckckckck ck k ck ck kckck ck kc kckckckckckck ck ckckckckck KK Programming Examples REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public Sub Questionablestatus Dim myQSR As String Nothing Try myOSR mbSession Q
11. M 172 MultiView Status display nee doit aatia 73 Tab E TYING OUD itcr noter oerte et ete ede dote tut 58 N Name CP ACLR channels see 129 Limit lines Se Tiransdu cer lines nente t re enn 521 NAN mcn Navigation keys is NCor enhancement label seen 71 n dB down Delta vali cuero rrr rtr EE EEN 465 EI Cg PII 443 464 Kemote control ertt terii 887 Negative peak detector EM m 253 Negative Peak detector sss 406 Network Automatic login eee 607 Changing user passwordS n ieseenrerreerrreee 606 Configuration dialog box 592 COMMQUIING eec ter reris 999 Connecting the instrument s eerrereerrrere 599 Creating users 606 prc M E adi 601 Eeer Operating the instrument is SOllirigs eet aei Settings remote s essen Setting up 598 Sharing directories eire rtt cata 607 Next Minimum Marker positioning esee 458 SOMKOY 5e testet Eeer 458 Next Mode X SOfKOV oce ee EQ Rete ba euet ud 454 Next Mode Y sil 454 Next Peak Marker positioning cese 457 shy M 457 NINF Aa NOI marker functions seseeeenn 72 Noise Cancellation CP ACLR
12. 275 Protective remote oe ee e EE 444 lo le 472 Marker demodulation 467 Audio signals Output remote sssssssssssssse 342 836 Auto adjustment triggered measurement eesseeeeese cenre 794 Auto all SOfIKOV 52 0 Qa tog t eerie 394 Auto frequency e 395 Auto ID External Mixer B21 remote control 800 External Mixer B21 essensen 322 331 Threshold External Mixer B21 331 Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control Auto level IlySteresiS E 395 396 Reference l vel os e nre 357 395 Icy M 357 395 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator 299 306 Automatic login mechanism Activating Deactivating sss 607 Auto Peak detechor ssiircsreniariiaiisieriiatans Auto peak search sd m Auto Rn e EE Auto settings Meastime Auto softkey sss 395 Meastime Manual softkey sussusss 395 AUX control TTL synchronization external generator 292 AUX PORT COMMECION re 49 AV trace information s esse 71 Average count xe i diro e 288 Average detector icc iei ne ener 406 lip 253 Average mode Ur m H 420 Averaging Continuous Sweep
13. 39 Power classes Adding Removing GEM 180 Ranges SEM net rente e tei nes 180 SEM s SEM reSUlIS ett eene nr orte 165 Ilic M Ria 179 Used SEM errat ee e oett c 180 Power mode Band power measurement sss 467 CP ACLR am le Power Save DiISplay qm Mire 537 Power save mode Activating see User Manual s s s eeeeeeeee 83 Power sensors Activating Deactivating sssseseseesss 285 Applications rni tete ennemis tege Average count zs e Configuration softkey ccccseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeees 284 ele ul EE Configuring as trigger zi Configuring see User Manual s a s ereenn 40 Corinectihtg EE 283 Connector m Continuous Value Update siiessieeeeee eneee eenen 286 Duty cycle External power trigger PT B External trigger level A Iii e T e ERE Frequency Coupling e Measurement time s esse Number of readings R amp S Power Viewer e Reference level csiis aaa Reference level offset sess Results x Sreo ao T T one iach or OE ERE H2 S ltlirigs iioi etn Setting up x Migger MOUS EE Unit Scale rte rt te ortis Using Using see User Manual ni so eneee 40 e e EE 286 290 Power supply COMMOCION d M 47 Power Unit al Ee EE 574 Preamplifier SEM TAN GC iii eie rte ri ee Etna 176 Setting Softkey Ms 2 Spurious Emi
14. 5c tinea edicts eee 757 LAYGUEREPLEaOBEWINDON E 758 RAY OWES PUI D 758 LA Y out WINDOWSA ADD EE 760 LAYoutWINDOowsmstIDENIU ioco rere eoe erede eee eee aate dde gae 760 LAYout WINDow xn REMoOwVve cesses nennen nnne en nenne enses ne annis isa sn nasse annes nna 760 LAY out Oe ee E 761 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing window lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left
15. Select EMI measurement CALC MARK FUNC FME STAT ON Configure CISPR filter and RBW BAND TYPE CISP BAND RES 1MHz Define the dwell time CALC MARK FUNC FME DWEL 1ms Configure an auto peak search CALC MARK FUNC FME PEAK AUTO ON Configure a logarithmic frequency scaling DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG Configure marker demodulation for marker 1 CALC MARK FUNC DEM ON Increase the number of sweep points SWE POIN 200000 Set the unit to V Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC UNIT POW V Configuring EMI markers Activate 6 normal EMI markers CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK2 ON CALC MARK3 ON CALC MARK4 ON CALC MARK5 ON CALC MARK6 ON Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC MARK2 TRAC 1 CALC MARK3 TRAC 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 2 CALC MARK5 TRAC 2 CALC MARK6 TRAC 2 Use CISPR average detector for all markers during final test CALC MARK1 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK2 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK3 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK4 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK5 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK6 FUNC FME DET CAV ff esu Configuring a limit check Select EN55011A LIN as limit line 1 CALC LIM1 NAME EN55011A LIN Configure trace 1 to be checked against limit line 1 CALC LIM1 TRAC1 CHEC ON Clear the results of all previous limit checks CALC LIM CLE 2 Performing the Measurement Select single
16. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 787 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS 2 ues ov M nasp g em Setting Basic Measurement Parameters e frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO mode measurements using an IF Power trigger Parameters lt DelayTime gt Range Os to 30s RST 0s Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us Manual operation See Gate Settings on page 390 See Gate Delay on page 390 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt GateLength gt This command defines the gate length Parameters lt GateLength gt Range 125ns to 30s RST 400us Example SWE EGAT LENG 10ms Manual operation See Gate Settings on page 390 See Gate Length on page 391 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command selects the polarity of an external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Slope on page 389 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz For more information see Trigge
17. suus 681 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range LIMit PClass ABSolute S TOP suuuss 681 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt eeeseeeeess 682 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit PClass RELative S TARtABS 682 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit PClass RELative S TARt FUNCtion 683 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit PClass RELative S TOP eese 684 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative S TOP ABSolute 684 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit PClass RELative S TOP FUNCtion 685 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGellMit DClass GTATe eeens eereretoororsrerernrnrrnn nenen ene 685 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel sse nnne 686 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe rangez GMEep TIME 686 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO 2ccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeneees 687 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSsducer sesenta 687 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SRN SSS ae Aun Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed State This command turns high speed mode for SEM measurements on and off For more information including restrictions see chapter 5 5 4 3 Fast SEM Measure ments on page 171 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP HSP ON Manual operation
18. Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM NAME C R_S instr user PRINT1 BMP Selects the file name Usage Event SCPI confirmed ERREUR RA a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 910 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results MMEMory NETWork DlSConnect Drive This command disconnects a network drive Parameters Drive String containing the drive name Usage Event MMEMory NETWork MAP Drive lt HostName gt lt UserName gt lt Password gt lt Reconnect gt This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first Parameters lt Drive gt String containing the drive name or path of the directory you want to map lt HostName gt String containing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive lt host name or IP address share name gt lt UserName gt String containing a user name in the network The user name is optional lt Password gt String containg the password corresponding to the lt UserName gt The password is optional lt Reconnect gt ON OFF ON Reconnects at logon with the same user name OFF Doe not reconnect at logon Usage Event MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives Return values lt DriveName
19. 402 Multiple mode 400 402 Multiple mode remote seeeeese 839 PROMOS sess M 838 Restoring original display ssseesss 402 see User Manual errore rn rn tne 83 Single mode 400 402 Single mode remote ssssessess 838 TYING OUT sieisen 62 Zoom limits Search range trino ritiene nina 401 Using for searches 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeees 453 457 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1056
20. Query parameters lt MessageType gt ALL INFO WARNing ERRor FATal MESSage lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Return values lt Messages gt String containing all messages of the selected type for the speci fied measurement channel Each message is separated by a comma and inserted in parentheses If no messages are available empty parentheses are returned Example SYST ERR EXT ALL Returns all messages for the currently active application e g Message 1 Message 2 ERREUR RA E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 952 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a ORC JJ gg P Configuring the R amp S FSW Example SYST ERR EXT FAT Spectrum2 Queries fatal errors in the Spectrum2 application If none have occurred the result is Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor LIST This command queries the system messages Return values Messages String containing all messages in the System Messages table Example SYST ERR LIST Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0
21. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 719 Configuring and Performing Measurements GSM useful part 4 615 ms Range 2 Use Off Range 2 Start 2ms Range 2 Stop 3 ms Range 3 Use Range 3 Sta Reset the instrument TRIG SOUR EXT Defines the use of an external trigger TRIG HOLD 25us Defines a trigger offset of 25 ys CALC STAT APD ON Activates APD measurement CALC STAT NSAM 1000 Sets the number of samples to be included in the statistical evaluation to 1000 SWE EGAT TRACI COMM GSM useful part Defines a comment for the gate SWE EGAT TRAC1 PER 4 61536ms Sets the gate period to 4 61536ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 15us Sets the start of range 1 to 15 us SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 557 8us Sets the end of range 1 to 15 ps start time 542 77 us useful part 557 8 us SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates the use of range 1 INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished 11 5 9 11 5 9 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC STAT RES1 MEAN Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal CALC STAT CCDF ON Activates CCDF measurement CALC MARK2 Y PERC 95PCT Sets marker 2 to the 95 probability value INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC STAT CCDF X P1 Returns the
22. IM n Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult This command queries the mean time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt MeanPower gt Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on page 224 Measuring the Peak Power CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak AVERage RESult This command queries the average positive peak time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 722 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters lt PeakPower gt Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum positive peak time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt
23. INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet A 795 Jo Toi seien iretur 796 INPut COUPling INPUEEAT Totti pre Fe REIR eee od eee ee QE 777 INPUtEAT TAU TO e M 777 INPUEEATT STATS ette reddere ea One cuir nara P DR es aie PN REOR nies maaan 778 Nutt Terr HPASSESTATE secerni rieri nirede tainn e e aaia iera kean ada koi i e aaa eian 796 L User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1020 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REENERT INPUtFILTECYIGESTA TE E 797 NIT El HK RE 778 INPUEGAIN VAEUS certet tere er erede Ee dnd dbase dbl a Paese o bao eara Pr ap eee ede 778 INPutIMPedane i i nette ieee cide te biel c ep ita ue d Re a poda d Eod e Rad 797 INPUGLISN FIL TERAPASSESTAT C E 740 INPUTLISNIPHAS c Ria 739 INPut LISN TYPE INPUESEL6Gt necis ee oe eed p nible eda pudiendo dd INPut UPORt STATe INPUtUPORITVACUS P En 798 INSTrumerit CREate DUPLICAt6 re oce ene eite een n nne i inten ein 623 INSTrument CREate REPLaco ursi necatta Sendebannetevsacedcuances apin a ada Resp det 624 INSTrument CREate NEW tiui rere ce v tee Dh tre decret etre e dd er e dE Re de E EX RR 624 INS Trument DELETE iien 625 INSTr ment RE 625 INSTrument MODE INSTrument RENaITI ida eie rece ote cr
24. 22 2 0ccceeeee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Error messages external generator Hiding restoring A Status byte te ciere iine teer oe ette deities Status display E 73 Status registers ode n onere ire CA 571 CONDition vee 5798 573 573 572 573 D eer 572 PTRansition es 573 STAT QUES POW 55 5 rien tns 795 STATus OPERation siisii npn siaii vaai STATus QUEStionable eese STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit e 2 STATus QUEStionable EXTended STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO 579 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency STATus QUEStionable LIMit ss STATus QUEStionable L MARgin STATus QUEStionable POWer STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature 582 STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature 513 937 STATus QUEStionable TIMe sssr 582 Status reporting system ceeceeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeenteeeeeees e tere Common commands 5 H RE Step size El CN 449 Markers remote control 0ceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 860 Stop frequency ic M M 349 Storage location Data UE 494 Settings ade ette rre 182 495 498 Storage settings File E 496 Subblocks ele LEE MSR Center frequency esses MSR number of Tx channels a MSR RF bandwidth eese MSR Tx channel definition
25. This command is only available for band category 2 see SENSe ESPectrum MSR BCATegory on page 693 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge on page 181 SENSe ESPectrum MSR LTE CPResent State This command defines whether an LTE FDD 1 4 MHz or 3 MHz carrier is located at the edge of the specified RF bandwidth In this case the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges This command is only available for band category 2 see SENSe ESPectrum MSR BCATegory on page 693 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge on page 181 SENSe ESPectrum MSR RFBWidth Bandwidth This command defines the RF bandwidth of the base station for MSR measurements Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz RST 10 0 MHz Manual operation See Base Station RF Bandwidth on page 181 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 694 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Configuring and Performing Measurements 11 5 6 7 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation Useful commands for SEM measurements described elsewhere MMEMory STORe LIST on page 926 Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO cccceceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeeesaeaeaeeeeees 695 CALCulate lt n gt ESPe
26. BXC BXC Exchange Trace B and C HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E BLANK BLANK TRA TRB TRC Blank Trace HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E C1 C1 A B off HP 8566A available HP 8568A E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 966 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models C2 C2 A B gt A HP 8566A available HP 8568A CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A available HP 8568A CAL CAL ALL Start analyzer self align HP 856xE available CAL ON meni HP 8566B CAL OFF HP 8568B HP 8594E CF CF lt numeric_value gt HZ Center Frequency HP 8566A available KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A CF UP HP 856xE IBN HP 8566B CF HP 8568B HP 8594E CHANPWR CHANPWR TRA TRB Channel Power Mea HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt surement HP 8594E CHPWRBW CHPWRBW Channel Power Band HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HZ width HP 8594E KHZ MHZ GHZ CLRW CLRW TRA TRB TRC Clear Write Trace HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E CLS CLS Clear all status bits HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E CONTS CONTS HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E COUPLE COUPLE AC DC Input coupling HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E CR CR Couple RBW HP 8566A available HP 8568A CS CS Couple Step Size HP 8566A available HP
27. eeeeeeen nm 844 TRACER COPY f E 844 R amp S FSW Remote Commands uM C m Analyzing Measurements Basics DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRI
28. adi 848 CALECulate STATistics RESult E 9 ere reina treten rst cedo ee Ub ura dg Perse esee tete rera 719 CALCulate THReshold GALECulate le el Rue 864 CALCulatesn gt DEL TamarkerAOF Fics caciaeesctceeacderssecctunchacenctedvacteds iiaa aai a aneda TEN dan AEEA Eaa Ea RaR 856 CAL Culatesn DELTamarker MOBDPBE err eae toe teda ete rere etta p Ye cie iai Aoa 857 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker m1z LINK TOMARR erem 857 SSES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1015 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit a SS SS CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE sess 886 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHon BbOWer RE Gun 887 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCion BbOWer SPAN 887 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FEUNGCionBbOwWert GTATel 887 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK esee 879 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFlxedRbOmt 879 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y esses ener enne 879 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFlx edRbOmntvOFtGet 880 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHon PhNOtse AUTO 884 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionPhNOtsehREGut 884 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionPhNOtsetGTATel 884 CALCulate nz DEI Tamarker mz LINK enenatis nennt sten tnts sin rnt sene nnn sni 856 CAL Culate nz DEI TamarkerzmzMAximum LEET 867 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt
29. cesses 725 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult This command queries the average mean time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 722 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt MeanPower gt Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum mean time domain power The query is only pos sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt MeanPower gt Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only ERREUR EE I E A MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 724 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m T
30. sesesss eene 636 MSR ACLR Avs SEM M TE TEE Service request ES Spurious Emissions measurement 709 MICH dq T 719 pee 734 Protection RE WA Put ine ei nete dead 275 RF input remote sssseesseenee 795 Protocol MXI ET 556 PSA89600 UI EL EE 596 PSA emulation core ttti t eoa 991 ag le EE 573 Pulse ADDIICAUOM pes E 93 Pulsed signals EMI d leclor ior ette 253 254 Q QP trace information een 71 Quasipeak detector EM e 253 Queries 559 567 Eu c M 584 Te EE 566 567 Quick Config UC 420 Quotatioriimark ta cerae 566 R R amp S FSP Eimulatirig c rio etti tei ret ero 595 Emulating remote sss 961 R amp S FSQ Em lalirig 2 x a i recien ra ee 595 Emulating remote sss 961 R amp S FSU Em latiriq rro re e er eren 595 Emulating remote sss 961 R amp S FSV Emulatirig EE 595 Emulating remote sss 961 R amp S Power Viewer Plus eee 283 R amp S SMA External generator 0 cccccccsceeceeeteeeesneeeeeeeeeetes 294 R amp S SMU External generator sss 294 R amp S Support SOKEY M Rackmounting
31. DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Shifts the trace display in the diagram up by 10dB CALC UNIT POW V Sets the unit of the y axis to Volt The reference level is now 70 711 mV DISP TRAC1 Y SPAC LOG Uses logarithmic scaling with absolute values V DISP TRAC1 Y 110dB Increases the displayed range of the y axis to 110 dB DISP TRACI Y RPOS SOPCT Shifts the display of the reference level down it is no longer the top line in the diagram The reference level is displayed as a red line TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm TRIG SLOP POS TRIG DTIM 50ms TRIG IFP HYST 5dB TRIG HOLD 10ms Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm with a dropout time of 50 ms a hysteresis of 5 dB and a delay of 10 ms SWE EGAT ON SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Configuring and Performing Measurements SWE EGAT LENG 5ms Defines gating Values are measured for 5 ms after triggering OUTP TRIG2 DIR OUTP OUTP TRIG2 O0TYP UDEF OUTP TRIG2 LEV HIGH OUTP TRIG2 PULS LENG 100us OUTP TRIG2 PULS IMM Configures a high trigger signal with a pulse length of 100 us to be output at the front TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector once DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold SENS DET1 POS SENS DET2 RMS SENS DET3 POS
32. For details on the Sequencer see chapter 4 5 1 The Sequencer Concept on page 96 INITiate SEOuencer ABORL rrt nnn rh rnnt nn rna rh nnne rn rn n nr eara d 628 lg e TEE 628 NiTiate SE Qe nce MODE sis 1 3 2 a recede eeh cea ern eene arde neam e ex Te rade da erro gba eaa 628 e de EE 629 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 628 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 629 Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 98 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INI Tiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 629 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 98 INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuen
33. Manual operation See Number of Samples on page 214 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements The following commands control gated statistical measurements T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 713 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m a es Configuring and Performing Measurements ISENGelGwEentGATe RACeck CGOMMent eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaeaeeneneees 714 SENSe S WEep EGATeTRACS PERIOGd i e Ert a Re RR an ee bodies 714 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STARt range essere 714 IGENGelGwEentGATe RACeck GTATecnmangezl eene 715 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STOP range essere 715 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the gate of a particular trace Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM MyComment Defines a comment for the gate in trace 1 Manual operation See Comment on page 216 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod Length This command defines the length of the gate for all traces The gate length applies to all traces Parameters Length Range 100 ns to 1000s RST 2 ms Example SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Manual operation See Period on page 216 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt Time This command defines the start time for a gate range
34. Open the Experience tab The settings on this tab are used to select and optimize the connection speed In the list select the appropriate connection for example LAN 10 Mbps or higher Depending on your selection and how powerful the connection is the options are activated or deactivated To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show window contents while dragging and Menu and window animation options Open the Local Resources tab to enable printers local drives and serial interfaces If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R amp S FSW e g in order to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R amp S FSW activate the Disk drives option Windows will then map drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the R amp S FSW activate the Printers options Do not change the remaining settings Open the Display tab The options to configure the R amp S FSW screen display are displayed SS P M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 612 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 10 Under Remote desktop size you can set the size of the R amp S FSW window on the desktop of the controller 11 Under Colors do
35. SENSe PMETersp MTIMO aeree etre eA tei pea taeda deeds phate spelen pean denen IEN Ge IpME Ter pz MilMeAvtERaoeCOUNt enne nre rnnt nre enne 830 IEN Ge IpME Ter pz MilMeAvtERaoelGTatel 831 IENGebMETer pzROFtesel STATel 831 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMG averse incre tecti dE 833 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff eese nennen nennen tenentes 833 IEN Ge PME Iernz TRlGoertvGteresie A 834 IEN Ge PMETer lt p gt TRlGoerl EVel EE SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe IEN Ge IpMETer pz RiGoerl STATel 835 SENS PME Ter lt p gt UPDate STAT rioei iira ianiai eai aiae daana aidai ipi 832 SENS PMETersp S TATS6 2 iir tet ed ctp aed NE a Ee ec aee AE 832 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs esses enne nnne nennen nenne rre streets ernst 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel essen enne 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth AL Ternate ch essseeeenemen 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth GAP ganz 659 IEN Ge TPOWer AC Hanne BANDwidthlGuWwlDtbl CHANnel zchz 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel IEN Ge TPOMWer ACHannel EI Ter Al PHa AL Temate cchz nennen 648 IGEN Ge POWer ACHannel Eil TerAl PHaCHAhNnelcchz 649 IEN Ze TPOMWer ACHannel EI Ter Al PHaGAb cgapz nennen nenne nnree neret tenetis 659 IGEN Ge POWer ACHannel Eil TerAl Pia GB ock ebz CHAhNnelcch z 660 IEN Ge JPOWer ACHannel El TerAlPHaALLl 648 SS S
36. Usage Event SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace channel power measurements are performed on For the measurement to work the corresponding trace has to be active Parameters lt TraceNumber gt Range 1 to 6 RST 1 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 642 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 11 5 3 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation See Selected Trace on page 124 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR All remote control commands specific to channel power or ACLR measurements are described here See also chapter 11 5 2 Configuring Power Measurements on page 639 e Managing Measurement Configurations eese ener 643 e Configuring the Chanriels odii teet err sedet dieere 644 e Def Keller 648 e Selecting the Reference Channel leues uen ee ca NENNEN 650 LEE Sce es mE 651 e General ACLR Measurement Settings 2 crece cee stein s kann reso LE 655 e Configuring MSR ACLR Measuremente AA 656 e Performing an ACLR Measurement eeceeiicenens tiii de rta Dd e eR RR RAD eina 664 e Analyzing Measurement Results rediere read estado HERR eet 665 e Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements 666 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARK
37. _L_LL_L LELLL ES a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 644 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a ee Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt ch gt eeeeeeeeeeee eee e eter eee teeeeee tent teeenneeeeenene 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch esee eene 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel sees 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch esee 647 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch esses eene nen 647 IGENGe JPOwWer ACHannel TvCHannel COUIN ANEN NENNEN 648 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command defines the number of pairs of adjacent and alternate channels Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt Range 0 to 12 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Channels Tx ADJ on page 123 See Number of Adjacent Channels ADJ Count on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel The adjacent channel is the first pair of channels next to the transmission channels If you set the channel bandwidth for these channels the R amp S FSW sets the bandwidth of the alternate channels to the same value Steep edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Manual operation See Channel Bandwid
38. e Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive e Transducers MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL Example MMEM SEL ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 496 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault This command selects the current settings as the only item to store to and load from a configuration file Manual operation See Items on page 496 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings State MMEMory SELect I TEM HWSettings State This command includes or excludes hardware settings when storing or loading a config uration file Hardware settings include e general instrument configuration e measurement hardware configuration including markers e limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines This number includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use with MMEMory LOAD STATe e color settings e configuration for the hardcopy output Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example MMEM SEL HWS ON Manual operation See Items on page 496 SSS SS SSS ara User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 913 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EMG CU G E EHMHRBB MB H RUBdMpoddmgm c s put Managing Settings and Results MMEMo
39. s up Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Reference Position on page 309 See Ref Level Position on page 360 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Reference Value on page 309 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference measure ment is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 822 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end ofthe sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Parameters lt MeasType gt THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external ge
40. ssseee 489 Default Coupling WEE 371 Default values cuj c 621 Deleting Limit line values rrr retient i era eC el Ee E Transducer factors Delta markers user ntm tore 261 447 Defining e RD Fixed reference marker FREMOLE contro rrr triente nte Demodulation Activating marker esee 468 Continuous marker eene 468 MAKER de ee geg Marker stop time Modulation type eene Remote control trt ten enne Squelch M Squelch level EE Denominator Frequencies external generator 299 306 Detectors CP ACLR d teaciniseaeteats 115 EMI 252 d 406 Remote Gontrol eer tere trennen 843 Spurious Emissions range 202 I c 261 419 Device icy PP 510 Device Setup Sici 508 Device specific commands 559 ble m HR 600 DHCP server LEAN cotfiguratiOri ou ettet rotor tnnt cente 33 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1035 R amp S FSW Index Diagnostics gie 534 Diagram area Channel Settings siinus nsaisan Status display 2 tent neget Trace information p s Diagram Tote idi idco Edge eser Hiding restoring AA Diagrams Evaluation method sese 398 Dialogs
41. Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt RefLevel gt Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range RST 0 dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command defines the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt SweepTime gt Sweep time The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW Refer to the data sheet for more information Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a spurious emission mea surement range on and off Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt Transducer gt This command selects a transducer factor for a spurious emission measurement range Note that e the transducer must cover at least the span of the range e the x axis has to be linear e theunit has to be dB Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 707 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 7 3 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Transducer gt String co
42. E GC X ENEN Eo o E X axis statistics EE 218 Ranges Definition GEM 168 Deleting SEM if ei Deleting Spurious Emissions Inserting SEM rine etre rere Inserting Spurious Emissions Reference SEM aessssssssssssrrrrsseesrrrrsrsssens Remote control Spurious Emissions 198 Rul s SEM rete x Rules Spurious Emissions sssssss SEM E Symmetrical SEM sss RBW see Resolution Bandwidth ssuss 362 RBW channel setting sssssssseeseess 69 Ready for trigger Status Tegister Fee e accro reidoes 575 Rear panel gu 46 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 309 S lttirigs asinsi pinan er eee eerte 494 498 Settings for preset eesssssseseesssss 500 ic M tides 494 Recommendations Remote control programming ssss 586 REDO cu 44 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1046 R amp S FSW Index Reference Exteirial re a ete pe vet irte eat 515 Fixed 442 449 465 Fixed channel power sess 125 Fixed Delta marker A 471 Frequency es Frequency remote control ssusuus 931
43. How to Assign the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways e If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Con figuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automatically e fthenetwork does not support DHCP or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network admin istrator to obtain a valid IP address Assigning the IP address on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey 3 Select the Network tab 4 In the Network Remote dialog toggle the DHCP On Off setting to the required mode If DHCP is Off you must enterthe IP address manually as described in the following steps LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 600 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation REESEN How
44. If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters Frequency Range 1 MHz to 20 MHz Example ROSC EXT FREQ 13MHZ Sets the frequency to 13 MHz SOUR EXT ROSC EXT FREQ 13MHZ Manual operation See Reference Frequency Input on page 516 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce Source This command selects the reference oscillator If you want to select the external reference it must be connected to the R amp S FSW Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used 10 MHz EXTernal the external reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector is used with a variable frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E10 the external reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector is used with a fixed 10 MHZ frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E100 the external reference from REF INPUT 100 MHZ connector is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar EAUTo the external reference is used as long as it is available then the instrument switches to the internal reference SYNC the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar Example ROSC SOUR EXT Usage SCPI confirmed E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 932 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 10 3 Configuring the
45. In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Next Peak on page 457 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the highest level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 See Peak Search on page 457 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value In the spect
46. M Analyzing Measurements Basics Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 865 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 865 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 865 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum E EFT on page 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum Z EXT on page 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 867 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 867 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL CulateM Ab kermz SGGbam ERAMe 872 CALCulateMAb kerGGbam GAtea 873 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PDEART 873 CALCulate MARKer m SGRam XY MlINimum PEAK esses 873 CAL CulateM Ab ker zmz GGbam v M ANimum AbBOVe 873 CAL CulateM Ab ker zmz SGGbam v M ANimum BEI ow 873 CAL CulateM Ab kerzmz SGGbam v MAVimumNENT 874 CALCulate MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK esee 874 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINiIMUM ABOVE ccccccccessceceeceeseseceeesecnceeceseeeaees 874 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimuUm BEL ow 874 CAL CulateM Ab ker z
47. Manual operation See Insert before after Range on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt ABSolute STARt Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit ABSolute STARt 10 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt ABSolute STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined __L_L_L_LLLLL_ ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 681 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Level gt Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit ABSolute ST
48. Selection SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one specified by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORecn TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 424 MMEMory STORe LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Saving the Evaluation List on page 184 See Saving the Evaluation List on page 205 See Exporting the Peak List on page 470 MMEMory STORe PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file The file format is dat Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event MMEMory STORe SGRam lt FileName gt This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCii file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The data corresponding to
49. The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan guage and for the commands IP KST and RESET ERREUR RA I Se N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 989 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mun c O C n f RH e Emulating Other Instruments Commands Model of Trace Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling Points 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC 8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC 8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC Stop frequency The stop frequency given in the table may be limited to the corresponding frequency range of the R amp S FSW Command LF sets the stop frequency for 8566A B to a maximum value of 2 GHz Test points trace points The number of trace points is switched over only upon transition to the REMOTE state 11 12 2 5 Data Output Formats In the case of the SCPI and IEEE488 2 standards the output formats for numerical data are flexible to a large extent The output format for the HP units by contrast is accurately defined with respect to the number of digits The memory areas for reading instrument data have therefore been adapted accordingly in the remote contro
50. This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 SS User Manual 1173 9411
51. command Parameters Mode INSTrument CHANnel RST INST Example INST SEL SPECTRUM2 Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM2 MMEM STOR TYP CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR PEAK SpectrumPeaks Stores the peak list from channel SPECTRUM2 to the file SpectrumPeaks SYSTem PRESet This command presets the R amp S FSW Example SYST PRES Usage Event SCPI confirmed SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel For details see chapter 8 1 1 Factory Default Configuration on page 490 Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 918 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 9 4 Managing Settings and Results Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 274 Storing or Printing Screenshots Useful commands to configure screenshots described elsewhere MMEMory NAME on page 910 Remote commands exclusive to configure screenshots FIGCOPV AB ORG EP 919 leese LTE 919 HOOBPVOMAPSitem 3HSl EE 920 HCOPy GMAP el E DE 920 HCOPYIDESTination lt device AME 921 HCOPY DEVICE e 921 HOOPy DEVIc e EANGuage device 2 orta iaa a Hine iste 922 H
52. exceeds the larger of the absolute 13 dBm and relative 10 dBc start values the check fails ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STAR 10 ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STAR ABS 13 ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STOP FUNC MAX ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STOP 10 ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STOP ABS 13 Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP RANG LIM2 STAT OR Checks the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 2 and fails if either limit is violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STAR 10 ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STOP 10 Defines an absolute limit of 10 dBm for the entire range 2 for power class 2 ESP RANG2 LIM2 REL STAR 20 ESP RANG2 LIM2 REL STOP 20 Defines a relative limit of 20 dBc for the entire range 2 for power class 2 Configuring List Evaluation CALC ESP PSE AUTO ON Activates list evaluation i e the peak is determined for each range after each sweep CALC ESP PSE MARG 10dB Defines a peak threshold of 10 dB ESP PRES STOR WCDMAN3GPPNULN3GPP UL User xml Saves the current configuration in a new file named 3GPP UL User in the same directory so the standard is not overwritten INIT IMM One sweep CALC LIM FAIL Queries the result of the limit check for all ranges TRAC DATA LIST Returns the peak for each range of the SEM measurement as a list 11 5 7 Measuring Spurio
53. 2 2 oce eoe e n Fo teuren Pea aka osea et uad 913 MMEMon GE Leck CH ANnell TTEMI HWGettngs 913 MMEMon SE Leo TTEMIHuW ettngs eee aeaee eee eeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeaeaaaeeaneeeees 913 MMEMon SEL ect CH ANnell TTEMI LU lNes Alt 914 MMEMobry SEbect TEM LINES ALL rincara Ae 914 MMEMon GE Leck CHANnell TTEMIENONE eee caeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeasaaaeneees 914 MMEMbry SEbectT TEMDIBINONE aer pite hae teca rea abe z bd trees acea ux ER Ecco nie n Rie Eder dnd MEE 914 MMEMory SEEectGCHANnel ITEMESGRAE 2 eria cn eue or tee eL Dur nere aidai 914 MMEMoarnSELect IT EM SGRAM iaria aaa aai aai aaa 914 MMEMon GE Leck CH ANnell TTEMITRACetACThyel 914 MMEMoary SEbect ITEM TRACE ACTIVE eessen 914 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL seeseseseeeeeeee nennen eene 915 MMEMon SEL ect TTEMITRANSducer Al 915 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 912 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mA Oe J HI Managing Settings and Results The items are e Hardware configuration MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings e Limit lines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL e Spectrogram data MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam
54. Configures traces 1 and 3 to use the positive peak detector trace 2 uses the RMS detector TRAC COPY TRACE4 TRACE1 Copies trace 1 to a new trace 4 which will then be averaged SENS AVER STAT4 ON SENS AVER COUN 10 SENS AVER TYPE LIN Configures trace 4 to be averaged linearly over 10 sweeps CALC MATH STAT ON CALC MATH MODE LIN CALC MATH TRACE1 TRACE2 CALC MATH POS 100 Calculates the linear difference between the measured and average values The resulting trace is displayed at the top of the diagram INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 TRAC DATA TRACE4 Returns one power and one frequency value per sweep point for each trace R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Configuring and Performing Measurements 11 5 2 Configuring Power Measurements The following commands work for several power measurements CAL Culate nzM Abker mzFEUNGC on POWerMODE nnne 639 CAL Culate MAbkerFEUNC on POWerREGut reenn rttrrrnrrrnenreer annn 639 CALOCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect sees eene nennen enn 641 CAL Culate nzM AbkercmzFUNGCHonbOMWert SGTATel rene eerororernre nenene 641 SENSe POWer ACHanrnel PRESE aao o eR Rage ud e anie Ren eaae nad 642 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel DREGerRL EVel eene enne 642 SEN Se POW eg EE 642 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MO
55. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TYPE lt WindowType gt This command selects the results displayed in a measurement window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 755 Parameters lt WindowType gt DIAGram Selects a diagram MTABle Selects a marker table PEAKIlist Selects a peak list RSUMmary Selects a result summary SGRam Selects a spectrogram ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 996 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENEN Commands for Compatibility SOURce EXTernal FREQuency SWEep STATe lt State gt Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only It is not required in new remote control programs This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected generator Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SOUR EXT FREQ SWE ON Activates the frequency sweep for the external generator SYSTem COMPatible lt Mode gt This command enables compatibility to other spectrum and signal analyzers by R amp S Compatibility is necessary for example regarding the number of sweep points Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SYST LANG command for new remote control programs see SYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Parameters lt Mode gt DEFault FSU FS
56. FATal 3 ERRor 2 WARNing 1 INFO 0 MESSage dereen The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers SS SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 571 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation BESSERES Remote Control Basics The Event Status Register ESR with the associated mask register standard Event Status Enable ESE The STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument e IST PPE The IST flag Individual STatus like the SRO combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request e Output buffer The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABIe part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analo
57. ONCE Example CALC MARK FUNC MDEP SEAR ONCE Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently available trace Usage Event Manual operation See Search Signals on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth RESult This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt ModulationDepth gt Modulation depth in 96 Usage Query only Manual operation See AM Mod Depth on page 105 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 735 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 12 2 11 5 13 Configuring and Performing Measurements Example Measuring the AM Modulation Depth This example demonstrates how to determine the AM modulation depth in a remote environment Note that without a real input signal this measurement will not return useful results RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 100MHz Set center frequency FREQ SPAN 10KHz Set span CALC MARK FUNC MDEP ON Activate AM modulation depth measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT IMM Perform a single measurement CALC MARK FUNC MDEP SEAR ONCE Initiates a search for signals in the current trace CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES Queries the m
58. OUTPUEUPORESTAT c cm OUTPUutUPORIEVALUS 3er einen tret ede c ette deed Eeer READ PME TESDA eeler 828 SOURce EX Temal FREQUENCY 4 i csicccscsetcsccvtcccessceaesiensenesstedsscivenccnsebdcnsdevecssasetesossexsaeedeateedendossesavessect neczad 815 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe esses rennen rennen 815 SOURce EXTernal F REQuency OFFSet SOURce EXTernal FREQuency SWEep STATe sess neennree neret rne nnne 997 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator essere 816 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator esses 816 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVely enero nnne nrnene nnd nnn iaai aa aaar naaa aiaa 817 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuenoy esses ener neret 932 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce SOURcCe EXToernal S TATO6 acceler eb iir Ro rer ert rer ed ed ae Ee Eta EDAX EHE DEED SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet sess 817 SOURce TEMPerature FRONtend 5 nre tree rient tege eni Ha n re Fen Rea deuda 937 STATusObERaton CONDitlon nennen nemen nennen trennen enne nennen enne 957 SS A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1022 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN STATusObtbRatonENAble seen enenee three rnnn nn rnr re
59. RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency Activate signal tracking to keep the center frequency on the signal peak CALC MARK FUNC STR ON CALC MARK FUNC STR BAND 20MHz CALC MARK FUNC STR THR 90dBm CALC MARK FUNC STR TRAC 1 After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 20 MHz around the center frequency It must have a minimum power of 90dBm BAND AUTO OFF BAND 1MHz BAND TYPE RRC Defines the RBW as 1 MHz using an RRC filter BAND VID AUTO OFF BAND VID 500kHz Decouples the VBW from the RBW and decreases it to smooth the trace LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 636 Configuring and Performing Measurements SENS ONE COON 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement SENS SWE POIN 500 During each sweep 500 trace points will be measured SENS SWE TIME AUTO OFF SENS SWE TIME 50ms Decouples the sweep time from the RBW VBW and span and increases it to make the measurement more precise Only if electronic attenuator is available INP EATT STAT ON Switches on the electronic attenuator INP EATT 30dB Sets the electronic attenuation to 30 dB INP ATT 10dB Sets the mechanical attenuation to 10 dB and couples the reference level to the attenuation instead of vice versa
60. See Resetting the Factory Revision on page 596 SYSTem REVision STRing lt Name gt Sets the response to the REV query to the defined string HP emulation only see SYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Parameters lt Name gt User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 962 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 12 2 Emulating Other Instruments Commands Example Define the system language SYST LANG 8563E Query the revision REV Response 920528 Set the response to NewRevision SYST REV STR NewRevision Query the response SYST REV STR Response NewRevision Manual operation See Revision String on page 596 SYSTem RSW lt State gt Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands for details on the commands refer to chapter 11 12 2 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models on page 963 If the repeated sweep is OFF the marker is set without sweep ing before This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SYSTem RSW ON Manual operation See Sweep Repeat on page 595 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models The R amp S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of HP models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A 8566B 8568A 8568B and 8594E Despite the differences in system architecture and device features the supported com mands have b
61. Suffix range 1 3 gate range Parameters lt Time gt The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod The following rules apply the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate the start time may not be lower than the stop time of the gate range of a lower order The reset values depend on the gate range for gate range 1 the start time is 0 ms for gate range 3 the start time is 2 ms for gate range 5 the start time is 4 ms p e e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLALALLLLLALAAALLLATLUILLSLX User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 714 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 8 4 Configuring and Performing Measurements Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms Manual operation See Range lt x gt Start Stop on page 216 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt State This command includes or excludes a gate range for a particular trace Suffix lt range gt 1 3 gate range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates gate range 1 for trace 1 Manual operation See Gated Trigger on page 215 See Range lt x gt Use on page 216 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt Time This command defines the stop time for a gate range Suffix lt range
62. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 737 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 898 el Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Detector gt OFF no final measurement is performed AVER average detector CAV CISPR Average detector CRMS RMS Average detector POS maximum peak detector QPE quasipeak detector RST OFF Manual operation See Final Test Detector on page 261 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector lt Detector gt This command selects the detector for a specific marker during the final measurement If the marker is not yet active the command also turns the marker on Parameters lt Detector gt OFF no final measurement is performed AVER average detector CAV CISPR Average detector CRMS RMS Average detector POS maximum peak detector QPE quasipeak detector RST OFF Manual operation See Final Test Detector on page 261 11 5 13 3 Configuring the EMI Final Test The commands required to configure the EMI final test are described here Useful commands for configuring EMI final tests described elsewhere SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 ERREUR RI E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 738 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 13 4 11 5 13 5 Configuring and Performing Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe X SPACing on page 762 Remote co
63. ap ices PR 621 Parameters BIOCK Catal 3 rrr horret ren ereptus sor une EE Input signal eno EE Passing between applications 89 95 SCPI Special numeric values sese 564 SUMING Me Text Bp ccm Passwords Changing sorces edsa saa ninie ana eiS 606 Service TUNCHONS perseunen repiten E 534 Peak excursion eere 439 452 456 470 Peak list 440 COMMQUIMIAG Pm 469 precem 469 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1044 R amp S FSW Index Evaluation method sss 398 Ee Il NEE 470 503 Marker numbers Maximum number of peaks n 470 Peak excursiOlnt erret Remote control SOM mode EE kii M T 469 Bie Ee E 61 Peaks Displaying SEM rrt etn Displaying Spurious Emissions T Margin SEM WEE Margin Spurious Emissions ssss Marker positioning dees NeXt TEE per range Spurious Emissions SEM results SOfIKOV 2 1 oae atate etie rerit Spurious Emissions sese Peak search Area spectrograms sss esse Automatic eese 264 440 452 456 Deactivating limits 162 453 457 etr RR 439 oe L NE Limits Bg ES Mode Mode spectrograms E Reference marker
64. lt State gt This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Front Panel on page 539 See Mini Front Panel on page 540 Colors and Themes Useful commands to customize display colors described elsewhere The HCOPY commands define the print colors and thus only take effect on the display colors if the display shows the printing colors HCOPy CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt on page 919 HCOPy CMAP lt item gt HSL on page 920 HCOPy CMAP lt item gt PDEFined on page 920 E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 943 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a i ee ee ee Configuring the R amp S FSW Remote commands exclusive to customize the display colors and themes Reie d lt item gt DEF TTT 944 Re ites TAS RE 944 DISPlay CMAP item PDEFinigd 2 ces aero diee cest ede i ede etd 945 DISPlayv THEMES CATI G a T aa 945 DISP THEME SELEG NE 945 DISPlay CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt This command resets the color scheme for the display Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 lt colors gt 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current scree
65. lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate lt n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command defines the number of peaks included in the peak list After this number of peaks has been found the R amp S FSW stops the peak search and continues the search in the next measurement range Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt Range 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list Manual operation See Peaks per Range on page 205 Performing a Spurious Measurement The following commands are required to perform a Spurious measurement SENS SWE MODE LIST see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 674 INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious meas urements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 e TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory on page 854 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 854 Programming Example Spurious Emissions Measurement In the following example the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defining ranges and parameters to create the following sweep list ERREUR E I E T
66. lt TimeOffset gt lt Meas Time gt lt PulsePeriod gt lt OfPulses gt This command configures power measurements on pulses in the time domain To evaluate the pulse power the R amp S FSW uses the data captured during a previous measurement The data recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value for each pulse according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results is output as a list Measurement Measurement Measurement time time time lt Time offset ch Pulse period dk Pulse period d To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters lt TimeOffset gt Defines a time offset to start the measurement at the first pulse of a trace RST 0 Default unit s lt MeasTime gt Defines the measurement time Default unit s lt PulsePeriod gt Defines the pulse period lt OfPulses gt Defines the number of pulses to measure Example CALC MARK FUNC MSUM 50US 450US 576 9US 8 Evaluates data that contains 8 pulses during a measurement time of 450 us and a pulse period of 576 9 us The evaluation starts with an offset of 50 us User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 751 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe MPOWer FTYPe lt FilterType gt This comm
67. 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 356 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 775 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 3 2 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See X Axis on page 218 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 218 See Reference Level on page 356 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 356 SENSe POWer NCORrection lt State gt This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSW performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only For more information see Noise cancellation on page 124 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON Manual operation See Noise cancellation on page 124 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATTenatlOE 052h022nccccacndsannacnddetsanccdeactavanccadednan AAAA Aa E AE AE EAA E E aE aa 776 d msg AES LHe A U O eege ee eee ne ee eee 777 let qu EE 777 IREOGESGET AUTO ane Ee SE ee A 777 leif WEN RN KEE 778 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF
68. 1MHZ 3MHZ 440us 0 935 4MHZ 0 10 10 CFIL 30KHZ 100KHZ 440us 0 935 6MHZ 0 10 20 CFIL 30KHZ 100KHZ 440us 0 Defines a list with 3 entries initiates the measurement and queries the results Result example 28 3 30 6 38 1 Measuring the Pulse Power All remote control commands specific to measuring the mean or peak pulse power e g bursts in various telecommunications standards are described here This measurement is available via remote control only The Pulse Power measurement is a gated measurement that determines the power over a particular number of pulses The measurement is controlled by an external trigger or the video signal A separate trigger event is required for each burst included in the mea surement In case of an external trigger source the trigger level corresponds to the TTL level In case of a video signal you can define any threshold The figure below shows the relations between the available trigger settings Measurement Measurement Measurement time time time Power Em nigger Offset rigger Offset R Offset Trigger Signal Trigger Signal Trigger Signal The measurement is always on trace 1 either with the peak detector to determine the peak power or the RMS detector to determine the RMS power Overall you can configure the measurement independent of the instrument setup with the commands listed below only which results in faster measurements The Pulse Power measurement is inc
69. 228 E Edge gate Eb 389 Electromagnetic compatibility SOO EMG onore neni e rri 249 Electromagnetic interference Spe EMI 249 Electronic input attenuation ssssusss 357 358 EMC EMI Detectors iie e retineri eh ta Measurement sis Refining results a nocte eet 258 EMI marker evaluation eee 258 EMI measurement Programming example sss 743 s eC 573 Enable registers Ice 621 Sne RE 76 EOI GPIB terminator terere 593 ENON OG e M 1011 Error messages Device specific A 1011 Status Dar eire idi coire eC PER hte 74 1008 Error queues recommendations eerte nnns 587 Errors External generator sss 301 IF e VBE E 74 356 582 1009 Increase sweep points EMI ssssssse 271 INPUT OVLD 74 582 1009 SE DEE 74 1009 74 1009 74 1009 aN 586 RE OVED nter he i eot 74 582 1009 74 1009 T 582 WRONG FW neeese 74 512 526 1009 ESE event status enable register 575 ze nse NANE 571 ESR event status register sss 575 Evaluation Lists SEM 2 5 5 iE rte d t tt era 184 Lists SpU rlOUS rete rere cedet 204 Modes m ge Modes Adding EE 82
70. CHANnel ch eese 661 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb CENTer CHANnel ch esee 661 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb FREQuency CENTer eese rennen 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt NAME CHANnel lt ch gt 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock ssb RF BWidth essen ener 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt TECHnology CHANnel ch eene 663 IEN Ze POMWer ACHannel GB ock sbzTvCHannelCOUNt rennen 663 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing AL Termmate cchz ennt 647 IEN Ge TPOMWer ACHannel GbPACngoCH ANnelzchz eene nnne nennen enne 647 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP lt gap gt SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel cece cece eese ennemis SENSe POWer ACHannel TvCHannel COUN SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth seeeeseeeseeeeeeneeneeene nennen rennen nnnm rene ennren nnne nnne SENSe POWeRHSP 6G oii iscsi irrito pha ect ie ce e TERRE db He ga EE eg dde tede dp deed SENSE eus lee m SENSe POWer TRACe SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber esses enne nennen nne n nente neen rrt 812 SENSe PROBesp ID SRNUmDOr irren rtp petia gaeti ege id pee dcos d poaae daa da dc de aadd na 812 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUp MODE ccescseceesececeeseeeeeseeeeeeceeesaesneeaeeeaeeseeeaeceeecaeeaecaeesaeeaeseeseaseaee
71. Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables EERREEUEUIUTUR RA I AT E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 805 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Ss n Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSE GCORRecHOn VE IBAND TE 806 SENSe CORRection CVEBIAS 1 1 2 terree ito RF PRETI nda RR REL de une E Eid IR tests 806 SENSe CORR ection CVIICATAlog ee tea nudo eet n RD ee Ye ERRRR PH eR ERR DA Un dedi 807 SENSE TCORRectOm ert 807 Eiere E Re rel ET 807 SENS amp CORRScCliorE CVLIDATA tke peace vis SEHR ENNER eege 808 SENSe JCORRectioniCVE HAIRMGRIG 22 122 sens ccccnsssapeedececassagecheveccasainecevensaedsaaueatessaye 808 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer eeseeeseee ENNEN EEN 808 SENSeJCORReoctton ee EE 809 SENSe CORReclion CVIESELCCt ee 2 n cei clint aegis NSA E 809 SENSE eene EE 809 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band
72. INZ 50 HP 8566B INZ HP 8568B HP 8594E IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A available HP 8568A KEYDEF KEYDEF Key definition HP 8566B available HP 856xE HP 859xE KEYEXEC KEYEXEC Key execute HP 8566B available User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 971 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _e M i aM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models KS KS lt numeric_value gt Marker Frequency Coun HP 8566A available HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ ter Resolution HP 8568A KS DN KS UP KS KS KS Manual Peaking HP 8566A available HP 8568A KS KS Lock register HP 8566A available HP 8568A KS KS Unlock register HP 8566A available HP 8568A KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSB KSB Amplitude Units in dBmV HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSC KSC Amplitude Units in dBuV HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSD KSD Amplitude Units in V HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSE KSE numeric value Title mode HP 8566A available char data a HP 8568A KSG KSG Video Averaging on HP 8566A available KSG ON HP 8568A KSG numeric value KSH KSH Video Averaging Off HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSK Marker to Next Peak HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSL Marker Noise off HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSM Marker Noise on HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSO KSO Delta
73. MAXimum NEXT 868 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum RIGHt essent n rnnt nnne nnn 868 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eeseeessees eene 868 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmum LEET 868 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT 868 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum RIGHt eene n nennen nnn 869 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK CALCulate cnz D I Tamarker mz MbREE AA 857 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe inttr nnttEEAnEEEnNEEAESEE AEE EESat Ennn aEE nanen nae 858 E e ER KEE E 858 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker zmz SREL ative nni nnatnnantnnnnennnnn enat 870 CAl Culatesn DELTamarKersm Y WEE 870 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe CAL Culate nz DUlNecks nnen nnna CALCulate lt n gt DLING lt k gt STATE ccscccsscsessessscseoscesnsccsscessacensscssanssescsseasecsaccensbsenscsscaesenecessersnccesnessnanessaass CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO 0 eee cece ene eeeee cere tees sees seeeeseeeseaeeseeeeaeeneeees CAL Culate cnz EGbechum PGtarchlpEAkzearch MAGm nnt CALOCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHoOw essen ener CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch IMMediate e Beni aPAIHBI e denan sad CAECUulatesn FLINesk STATS ere reser tede aptent rds ex deemed o Ud nc eue CAL Culate cnz MAbRker bt vCursion EEANN EEEn E Enan n Enae CAL Culate cnz MAb ker
74. Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 519 See Create New Line on page 520 See Name on page 521 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off Before you can use the command you have to select a transducer Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 519 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the transducer factor Before you can use the command you have to select and turn on a transducer Parameters Unit string as defined in table below RST DB Example CORR TRAN UNIT DBUV Manual operation See Unit on page 521 String Unit DB dB DBM dBm DBMV dBmV DBUV dByV DBUV M dBuV m DBUA dBpA DBUA M dBuA m DBPW dBpW DBPT dBpT User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 939 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW 11 10 5 Customizing the Screen Layout 11 10 5 1 The remote commands required to set up the display of the R amp S FSW are described here e General Display Settings and Items eret enne nas 940 e Colors anu RE 943 e CMAP Suffix Assignmoent ieuecceecseiseeceeseceeten nennen enne nut n nene sane nnn nns 945 General Display Settings and Items The following commands add remove or customize general display and screen ele ments Use
75. Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 3 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 335 SENSe CORRection CVL BIlAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 806 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PRENNE ONCE n ond Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 331 See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 332 See Bias on page 335 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C
76. OFF Manual operation See Results on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe lt State gt This command turns the evaluation to determine the RMS time domain power on and off The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Results on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe lt State gt This command turns the evaluation to determine the standard deviation of the time domain power on and off The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 723 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 9 2 11 5 9 3 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Performing a Time Domain Power Measurement The following commands are required to perform a Time Domain Power measurement INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 Retrieving Measurement Results The following commands query the results for time domain measurements Measuring the Mean Power CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESUIt 724 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESUIt suse 724 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESUIEt
77. PANUNG ui inn tH eie eerte re 510 Suppressing file selection ssssssussss 510 Digital Baseband Interface B17 COMMOCION iie e Meets 49 Display Changing see User Manual sess 83 Colors e Config Ee EE 397 Deactivating see User Manual ss 83 Evaluation bar PA Evaluation methode 397 ut le ET 67 Settings ES Settings remote control ssssssssssss 940 SmartGrid rrisnin erret erit rng 79 Theme E Theme remote ariii naiiai aiaa 943 Update GPIB siiin e 593 Update rate rate eorr tenet 536 Display colors Changing see User Manual n eese 83 Displayed items Touch sCreen iiie retenti herren 537 Display UE 475 Defining zs Remote control inre renis 893 GT le EE 479 Display Port Gonlneblot iiir HR SM ER 48 Display theme Selecting see User Manuel 83 DNS server y ens RE LAN configuration E Double dagger eter hi treten ct tere tron et ence BEN eebe gedet reueg 564 Drop out time Ur aTa 379 388 Trigger Power sensor ssssessssess 289 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 623 Duty cycle POWerF SONSOM i ice ei nnd reae tr En tapar 288 DVI COMMOCION E EX 48 Dwell time s EMI d t ctors e niit rere een 252 Dynamic range Intermodulation free sese 236 Measuring E
78. RF attenuation mode sse 202 Saving list evaluation sese 205 Sweep behavior EIMque E Sweep polnts 2 erit dated eee e eatis Sweep time a Sweep time mode sese 201 Tiransd c r E 203 MBW agde anie nte ntes terit er detis 201 Squelch LOVE M Marker Demodulation sr Remote Control sirsiran aani SRE eara a ra AE A I Peces ENT SRE service request enable register SRQ service request esses Standard MSR Tx channel possis ener nnn 138 Standard deviation Power time domain ses 223 Standard files SOKOV acs C M 182 Standards CP ACLR measurements susss 121 131 Format description SEM sss 189 Provided files GEM 189 Restoring files SEM ec Settings files GEM 182 Start frequency SONKCY intent o HG teenie ents 349 Startup recall acc MP ERPRR 916 Startup Recall SOFIKGy EE 498 Statistics Default scaling iret eee t 218 Gate remote control cccceeeeeceteeeeteeeeeeeeeneeees 713 Gated Bue e E 212 Measurements s Measurements remote control 712 OPUMIZINO NEE Programming example is SCALING EE Scaling remote Control s neee 715 see also APD CODP irr rere ri rii 208 Status I T M 584 Status bar Color eene EE Error messages
79. SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernatel 1 60MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 3MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernatel 5MHZ Jesse cac S Configuring gap CACLR channels SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP1 2 0MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP2 5 0MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP1 2 0MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP2 2 0MHZ Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Configuring and Performing Measurements Return the results for the ACLR measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW RES MCAC Results Transmission channels in subblock A 13 2346727385 13 2346723793 13 2390131759 Transmission channels in subblock B 17 0863336597 Transmission channels in subblock C 13 2390127767 13 2390134744 Totals for each subblock 8 4649064021 17 0863336597 10 2287131689 Adjacent channels 61 9740721019 67 9740728014 0 00434041734 0 00434041734 CACLR channels 0 52933512766 64 9990115835 64 5012521492 0 33507330922 64 4924159646 0 52932552499 0 52932552495 64 4934163414 11 5 4 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio The following commands are necessary to perform carrier to noise measurements CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CN CNO see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect cCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe CALC
80. See Fast SEM on page 174 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution lt RBW gt This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the resolution bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt RBW gt Resolution bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths RST 30 0 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See RBW on page 175 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo lt VBW gt This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the video bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt VBW gt Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths RST 10 0 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See VBW on page 175 ERREUR E E E MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 676 R amp S FSW Remote Commands NSS eee Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe ESPectrum RANGe COUNt Ranges This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Usage Query only SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list Note that e you cannot delete the reference range e aminimum of three r
81. See Tx Center Frequency on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center of the specified MSR subblock Note that the position of the subblock also affects the position of the adjacent gap CACLR channels This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix sb 11213 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Frequency absolute frequency in Hz Manual operation See Subblock Definition on page 136 See Subblock Center Frequency on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt NAME CHANnel lt ch gt Name This command queries the name of the specified MSR Tx channel In MSR ACLR measurements TX channel names correspond to the specified technol ogy followed by a consecutive number The assigned subblock A B C D E is indicated as a prefix e g A WCDMA1 Channel names cannot be defined manually This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix sb 1 2 3 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel Example POW ACH SBL2 NAME CHAN2 Result B WCDMA Usage Query only Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt RFBWidth Bandwidth This command defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR subb
82. Status EventType MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest Then Console WriteLine SRQ is recognized R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 14 1 2 Programming Examples If SRQ is recognized gt subroutine for evaluation Srq End If Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try Catch exp As InvalidCastException Console WriteLine Resource selected must be a message based session Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try Close session mbSession Dispose Wait for end Console WriteLine Press any key to end Console ReadKey End Sub Waiting for the Arrival of a Service Request There are basically two methods of waiting for the arrival of a service request Blocking user inputs not possible This method is appropriate if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is short shorter than the selected timeout if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time and if as the main criterion the event is absolutely certain to occur Reason From the time the viWaitOnEvent function is called until the occurrence of the expected event it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries during the waiting time Moreover it returns an error if the SRQ event does not occur within the predefined timeout period The method is therefore in many cases not suitable for waiting for measurement results especi
83. This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 777 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 358 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 358 ERREUR RE SS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 777 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 3 3 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 358 Configuring a Preamplifier INPUEGAIN STATO E Em 778 INPULGAINE VALU ee ERENNERUNG 778 INPut GAIN STATe lt Sta
84. Usage Query only Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the noise measurement marker function CAL Culate nz M AbkermzFUNCHonNOl ebREzuht 883 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe essen 883 LSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 882 R amp S FSW Remote Commands El Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NOISe RESult This command queries the result of the noise measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt NoiseLevel gt Current noise level The unit is the one currently active Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 NOIS RES Outputs the noise result of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Measurement State on page 462 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NOISe STATe lt State gt This command turns the noise measurement at the marker position on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON Switches on the noise measurement Manual operation See
85. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Start Stop statistics esses 216 icu m P 215 Gating kecs HA 384 Generator Frequencies external generator 299 306 Frequency coupling external generator 306 Frequency offset external generator 306 Output power external generator 306 Generators Frequency range external generator 305 Power range external generator 305 Setup files external generator 295 303 304 Supported external generator 294 Generator type External generator ssssssssseeseeee 303 GPIB m Address Address External generator eeeseeeeeeeeesreeene 304 Characteristics eerte neis 557 Coupling External generator IF Gain remote control sssssssssss 960 Language A Language remote control sssssssss 961 Remote control interface sssssssse 554 Settings ie H ul 593 TTL synchronization External generator 304 GPIB bus control Ile 621 GPIB interface Configuring see User Manual s eeren 50 COMMOCION iiid teret Meer 50 Ixemote
86. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 709 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements Range 2 Range 3 Range Start 10 MHz 100 MHz 100 0000 100 MHz 100 0000 1 GHz RRC Normal 3 Normal 3 24 3 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 5 MHz 30 kHz 300 kHz Manual Auto Auto 1s 4 01 ms 32 1 ms Sample RMS RMS 20 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm Manual Auto Auto 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB on off off 601 4001 32001 ott oft oft None None None Absolute Absolute Absolute 10 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 10 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task RST Resets the instrument SWE MODE LIST Activates spurious emissions measurement Spurious measurement has to be in single sweep mode to be configured INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode LIST RANG COUNCt Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list LIST RANG4 DEL Deletes the fourth range LIST RANG1 STAR 10000000 Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 1 LIST RANG1 STOP 100000000 EES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 710 Configuring and Performing Measurements Defines a stop frequency of 100 MHz for range 1 LIST RANG1 BAND 500000 Defines a resolution bandwidth of 500 kHz in range 1 LIST RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Defines a video bandwidth of 5 M
87. numeric value Marker Amplitude HP 856xE available MKA HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKACT MKACT 1 Select the active marker HP 856xE not available MKACT HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKBW 1 MKBW numeric value N dB Down HP 856xE available MKBW ON HP 8566B MKBW OFF HP 8568B HP 8594E MKD MKD Delta Marker HP 856xE available MKD numeric value HP 8566B HZ KHZ HP 8568B MHZ GHZ HP 8594E MKD DN MKD UP MKD ON MKD OFF MKD MKDR MKDR lt numeric_value gt Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE available HZ KHZ HP 8566B MHZ GHZ HP 8568B S SC MS MSEC HP 8594E USMKDR MKDR Delta Marker reverse available query MKF MKF lt numeric_value gt Set Marker Frequency HP 856xE available HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8566B MKF HP 8568B HP 8594E MKFC MKFC ON OFF Frequency Counter on HP 856xE available elf HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 976 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models MKFCR MKFCR Frequency Counter Res HP 856xE available numeric value olution HP 8566B HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568B MKFERDN HP 8594E MKFCR UP MKFCR MKMIN MKMIN Marker gt Min HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKN MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE available MKN lt numeric_value gt HP 8566B HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568B MKN DN HP 8594E MKN UP MKN ON MKN OFF MKN MKNOISE MK
88. on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin lt Margin gt This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points EEUU RA T UE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 898 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PRENNE GNN GC C H s Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 482 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually chan
89. r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 333 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS Zen ERREUR RE LE MM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 807 R amp S FSW Remote Commands es SS J n Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Comment on page 335 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines t
90. sess Settings Softkey e COUME EE Time frames ss Tine Stamps E MINO e IEN Malue range uiia ge eL be icis Spectrum elle Ire E 90 Spectrum applications 88 Spectrum Emission Mask see SEM osi hr emper es 164 Split jb D 83 Gelle EE A0 Splitters WINKOW S ZE rr tendentes 82 Spurious Emissions E 196 About E ele ul EE 199 Deleting ranges AA 203 Detector s Displaying peaks sesessssss Evaluation list renis Exporting results Ges ge Filter e Format description of export files 206 Inserting ranges m Limit absolute 6 rentrer Limit Check iniret eben ina Limit lines E List details aret entree rene List eval atiorn rr rhe nes List evaluation state D Meas rem nt oet bistrot thinner tora uga 104 Measurement remote control ssss 699 Measurement result list T Peak margins eiii iter etie ente c m Peaks per range vs Perform iere retener apre Preamplifier io conet enne Programming example P EE e 2 P 198 Range Start Stop erret tnn 201 RBW 5 Reference level 2 n nre rere 202 R amp S FSW Index Result fil amp S 2 rrt terne rn enin a e M RF attenuation id sis
91. ssessssss 712 ADpIICAHON ees eege aririedaesdhann Configuring BE Crest ee E 211 Gate remote control seseessssssssss 713 Gated trigger Gate ranges Measurement rin rne irren tais Measurement remote control ot Measurement example ccceceeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees Percent marker irirna Percent marker remote control Petformifigu uuu hire recti ee erret iiis aC Results remote control P Scaling remote control s eerie 715 See also Statistics eerie 208 Using gate ranges sssssseeeeee 219 cdma2000 BTS Application EE 91 cdma2000 MS AppliCation EE 91 Center Mkr Freq Gin 458 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Center frequency cceceeeecenecceeee ceneeeeeeeeeeetesenaaeeeeees 348 Automatic configuration sssssesssssss 395 MSR subblocks Ge MSR Tcchanpel ici creto irt ettet rtr 137 Setting to marker ssssesesessssossssseesssessrrrrrsnrrsssersrret 458 Softkey E EE 345 350 352 Channel bandwidth GIN ses fond 157 CRIAGUR T 127 MSR adjacent channels 140 MSR gap channels sg ECK e Elle o B Mill Channel bar ae TEE 67 Information external generator 301 Channel defined Sequencer Eoi IRERE NEE
92. ssssesssssss 318 High pass filter B13 sssssssss 280 796 Information 524 InStalling EE 547 Preamplifier B24 sess 358 Orientation reegt oni nd rrr terim 510 Output fm 836 Configuration remote sssssssssss 836 Configuration softkey seeessseesssss 341 External reference E IF frequericles one herren eter ice IF frequency remote sese 837 IF Out Frequency eg IF source remote eessessseeseseesee 836 Klee 277 343 Parameters S ltlirigs ire festa en toon tee Mole P Video E Video signal roit e egre po ne eto tree ev 278 Output DUffOF uo eterne 571 OVEN EITOE 5iceidcn de eH erre ret dea bi ae RR 74 1009 OVEN status display sss 75 1009 Overlapping Preventing E 569 Overlapping Commandes ereer eeeeserrrrn resene 568 Overload External generator sss 296 iari re 275 RF input remote essssseseneee 795 Overloading External generator sss 302 Overview configuration esses 273 OVLD External generator sss 296 OVLD status display esssssssesss 75 1010 P Pai channel bar eee rere ree de eer 70 Paint ACCESSING p 26 Parallel poll register enable
93. 02 13 569 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 7 Remote Control Basics 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Sendthe overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Sendthe overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 Areturn value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 4 Resettimeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SyStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrupted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for cont
94. 02 13 877 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m O E M H u m Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frame
95. 1 General Network Settings eene nennen nnns 590 1042 GPIB Settings io reete eer dat rer dei ien iae et Wage 592 10 4 3 Compatibility Settings cecidere d eo npe kde ae ves k kd dee ee ku daa cde sa REY dd 594 104 4 LX Settirigs ied eei hited reete a ie tribe te E ee 597 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 598 10 5 1 How to Configure ahNetwork enne enne 599 10 5 2 How to Operate the Instrument Without ahebwork 605 10 5 3 HowtoLogonioteNetwork eene nennen enn 605 10 5 4 How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Neiworks A 607 10 5 5 How to Set Up Remote Desktop 608 10 5 6 How to Start a Remote Control Session from ab 615 10 5 7 How to Return to Manual Operation 616 EE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 553 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics 10 1 Remote Control Basics Basic information on operating an instrument via remote control is provided here this information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R amp S FSW 10 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The instrument supports different interfaces for remote control The following table gives an overview Table 10 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols VISA address string Remarks Local Area Protocols A LAN connector is located on the rear Network VXI 11 HiSLIP panel of the instrument LAN The interface is based on TCP IP and VISA address string e
96. 2122 te ees SEENEN 764 SENSES TPREQUBnOY OFF E 764 ISENSeJFREGUSney SPAN erede o diee E ER e Rr re ere ORE REEL HE Ap 765 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 761 R amp S FSW Remote Commands ES Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSegFREQuensyrSPANIF DLL iii aaepe tte sade eeeediagceneeedaabeodeesssadndeas 765 SENSA F REOLA STARE EE 765 SENS amp JTFREDQuUSn cy STOP iana He rdg ieii te AEAT EEEE AE aiai eR RETRA 765 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 105 See Center Frequency Marker Frequency on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CSTep This command matches the center frequency step size to the current marker frequency The command turns delta markers into normal markers Usage Event DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe X SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the x axis Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling RST LINear Example DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG Manual operation See Frequency Axis Scaling on page 264 SENSe FREQuency
97. 8568A LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 967 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models CT CT Couple SWT HP 8566A available HP 8568A CTA Convert to absolute units HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E CV CV Couple VBW HP 8566A available HP 8568A D1 2 D1 Display Size normal HP 8566A available HP 8568A DA DA Display address available DEMOD 1 DEMOD ON OFF AM FM AF Demodulator HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E DEMODAGC DEMODAGC ONJOFF 1 Demodulation AGC HP 856xE available 0 HP 8566B DEMODAGC HP 8568B HP 8594E DEMODT DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE available numeric value S MS HP 8566B US SC HP 8568B DEMODT UP DN HP 8594E DEMODT DET DET POS SMP NEG Detector HP 856xE available DET HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E DISPOSE 2 ONEOS TRMATH available ONSWP ALL numeric value DIV Divide HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E DL DL numeric value DB Display Line HP 856xE available DM HP 8566B DEON HP 8568B DEUE HP 8594E DL ON DL OFF DL User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 968 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _e M i aM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models DLE DLE ON OFF Display Line enable HP
98. 904 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 9 Managing Settings and Results CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values Result 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 104 See Limit Check 1 4 on page 176 See Limit Check on page 203 Managing Settings and Results The commands required to store and load instrument settings and import and export measurement results in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 8 Data Management on page 489 Addressing drives The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage instrument specifier lt msis gt using the conventional Windows syntax The internal hard disk is addressed by C For details on storage locations refer to chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 494 Th
99. 9411 02 13 817 R amp S FSW Remote Commands oo a Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Source Offset on page 306 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator SOlRce EXTermal ROSCiIllator SOBD beet 22 22 2 2 ier rer neret EEEEEER ete iere EEN 818 GvGTemCGOMMunicate GIG RDEVice GENeratorAfDDbess 818 GvGTemCGOMMunicate HR DEVice GENerator INTertace 819 GvGTemCGOMMunicate HR DEVice GENeratorlINk 819 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE cccccccccesscecesececeseceessecenceeceaeeeenaes 819 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess esee 820 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce Source This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar EAUTo the external reference is used as long as it is available then the instrument switches to the internal reference Spectrum applica tion only RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 304 SYSTem COMMun
100. 948 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt 924 SGv GfemCOMMunicate PDhRlNter EN MeratefNE VII 924 GvVGTem COMMunicate PDhlNier GE ect device z 924 GvGTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTertace rnnt 819 SGvGTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENeratorlINk SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE c ccccceeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeeees SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt GvGTem COMMunicate RDEVice PME Tercpz COhNFioure AUTOtGTATel ereenn 825 GvGTem CGOMMunicateRDEVice PME Ter pz D Fine neret 826 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeesesneeeess 820 SYS Tem COMPatible ss 5 55 9 rire rent UR ea ea EN EY EA EXE VERF PEL OREERT ee DERE EUM UR E Fg Ue YE EY 997 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe iret deer repente Been ha uero bn rue ER Era aei 943 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate SYSTtem ERRor CL EarAl EE 952 SYSTem ERRoOrEXTended niei eee Gite Line ee A Aneel ee 952 SYS Tem E ee EN 2a e M 953 SYSTem ERROIENEXT ta crt erret et eee The rre dap Eder Ep evans av ERN dU eee e reve ye Dp eR 953 SYS tlem FORMarCIDEN e 953 SYSTem HPCoupling SY Stem IDENtfy FACTO ii Es 948 SYSTem IDENHfyESTRING rre rte emere erect rri eeu ec ed due didt 948 kae nr uHEe ids cc 960 SY Stem LANGUAGE E H 961 SY Re H AE KE 94
101. AbkercmzACOEtF nene 859 CAL Culate nz M Abkerm1z LINK TOMAbkercm z 859 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATE cccccececeeeseeeseeeeeneeenereneeeneaeaaeeaaaeaaaeaeaaaecnateneeens 859 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe nene 859 CALC latesh A MARKET MA EE 860 e CALCulate n DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event E CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Tip to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1 use the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarkerc ml1 LINK TO MARKer m2 Or CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt ml gt LINK TO MARKer m2 commands R amp S FSW Remote Commands mm H HPR aP Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal positio
102. Aborting remote sese 628 Activating remote s esses 628 Channels Example Mode e CES 97 99 Mode remote Programming example sse 630 bciucc Remote control e rrt rne RUN SINGLE de a Setting Up nitet nazis itr trei nire dena Single Sweep nire roti eoe etie ie pda Softkey aids SEALS TMG NIE Sequential commands e ue Service functions sse Numeric mode Dp M M ncc pe Ee ESEgeeg Service packs Service request SRQ sess Service request enable Io cm M 622 Service request enable register SRE 574 Set CP Reference ic M HOM 125 Setting commands AAA 559 Settings Factory defaults supoias sese 490 File name ier ren 183 495 498 Format description SEM aeeeeeeeeeesreereeseeeneen 189 Instrument setup ge Be Uu WEE OI Te 1010 WEE Provided files SEM Se Restoring files 5 rh entes SAVINO 493 498 Storage location eeen 182 495 498 Settings files Deleting eriei aasE Deleting SEM 2 LOAGING oiii retirer tees eee eia Loading SEM Managing SEM Restoring GEM eessen gees ee SAVING EE Saving SEM roit riii a Setup files External generator Soli channel Dar eet ia Shifting Bug Hr 4
103. All Search Limits on page 162 See Limit State on page 225 See Search Limits on page 452 See Search Limits on page 456 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 862 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m IrC Umm X c Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 162 See Left Limit Right Limit on page 225 See Search Limits on page 452 See Search Limits on page 456 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurement
104. CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 762 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENERT Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center on page 348 See Preview on page 384 See Frequency on page 384 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 762 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 350 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO
105. Calibration Analog Baseband on page 532 DIAGnostic SERVice STESt RESult This command queries the self test results Return values lt Results gt Example String of data containing the results The rows of the self test result table are separated by commas DIAG SERV STES RES would return e g Total Selftest Status PASSED Date dd mm yyyy 09 07 2004 TIME 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 936 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Usage Query only SOURce TEMPerature FRONtend This command queries the current frontend temperature of the R amp S FSW During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is also measured as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely This temperature is used as a reference for a continuous temperature check during operation If the current temperature deviates from the stored self alignment temperature by a certain degree a warning is displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power levels A status bitin the STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature register indicates a possible devia tion Return values lt Temperature gt Temperature in degrees Celsius Example SOUR TEMP FRON Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor Usage Query only 11 10 4 Working with Transducers The following commands configure and control transduce
106. Commands of Emulated HP Models on page 963 Note Emulating previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers As of firmware version 1 60 this function is also used to emulate previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R amp S FSW supports most commands from previous R amp S signal and spec trum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths may vary Therefore the R amp S FSW can emulate these other devices including their default values in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy sys tems Note For PSA89600 emulation the option is indicated as B7J for the oPT query B7J 140 or B7J 122 if Wideband is activated see SYST PSA WIDeband on page 961 Remote command SYSTem LANGuage on page 961 IF Gain Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth 300 kHz NORM Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to reference level PULS Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level This setting is only available if an HP language is selected see Language on page 595 Remote command SYSTem IFGain MODE on page 960 Sweep Repeat Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP mode
107. DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query i The asterisk marks a common command m Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it both single and double quotation marks are possible The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 3
108. DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values lt PhaseNoise gt Example CALC DELT2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 463 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 884 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu __ SS E i _ _ _ Sst Analyzing Measurements Basics Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 463 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 464 11 8 3 1
109. Example CALC DELT3 FUNC FME LIM2 DELT Queries the distance of deltamarker 3 to the second limit line Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit lt k gt DELTa lt Amplitude gt This command queries the vertical distance from the marker position to the limit line The unit is dB RETE RU Ee N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 742 11 5 13 7 11 5 13 8 Configuring and Performing Measurements If the marker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position the command returns 200 Return values Amplitude Vertical distance to the limit line in dB Example CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM2 DELT Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line Usage Query only Evaluating the Results The commands required to control the demodulation of signals at the marker position are described in chapter 11 8 3 14 Marker Demodulation on page 891 Programming Example EMI Measurement This example demonstrates how to detect electromagnetic interferences EMI in a remote environment 929599995 22 Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Define the span to be analyzed FREQ STAR 150kHz FREQ STOP 1GHz Configure two traces one with peak detector one with average detector DISP TRAC1 ON DISP TRAC2 ON DET1 POS DET2 AVER fese2999992 Configuring the measurement
110. FSW Network and Remote Operation The paral Remote Control Basics lel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using command PRE Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE the assoc corresponds to the ENAB1e part of a SCPI register If a bitis set in the ESE and iated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 10 4 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and
111. FSW Remote Commands m IrC Umm X c Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 482 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate L
112. FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMitek D I Tag 742 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESUIE eessssssssssseseeeeeneee ener 741 CAL CulateMAbkercmz GCGham ERAMe eene enne enne rennes r rn nnts sen rnts sehr sien nnns s nnn 872 CALCulate MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK esses nnne nnne nnne 873 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe sss eene nennen nnne nennt rene CAL CulateMAbkercmz GCGham v MA Nimum DEI ow eee nennen CAL CulateMAbker mz GCGham vMAimum NENT CALCulate MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK sese enne nenne CAL CulateMAbker mz GCGham v MihNimum AbBOVe eene nennen nnn nennt einn CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CAL CulateMAbker mz GCGham v MiNimumNENT nnne enne nennen tnter nennt nenne CALCulate MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimumg PEAK esses ennt CALCulate SGRam CLEar IMMediate essen nnne nennen rennen nnne GAECulate SGRam CONT sii eaves cress nee Giant rir E REEF FOE EE Er e EH CREER ETUR CALCulate SGRam FRAMe COUN E sss enne nete ennt ensi tnnt enr EA sen ia aaa area aae ENE CALCulate SGRam FRAMe SELect CAEGulate SGRam HDEPIh 4er iunt depre Vp tere Ed de a Ea Aea geed EE aae a Ded re reda CAL CulatezGGham TGTamp DATA 847 CALECulate SGRam TSTamp ESTATe EE 848 VT e EN NIR E ue
113. HP 8594E VTL VTL numeric value Video Trigger Level HP 856xE not available DBIDM HP 8594E VTL DN VTL UP VTL 1 HP 8594E only 2 Command is accepted without error message but is ignored 11 12 2 2 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models The command syntax is very different for models A and B Different names are assigned to identical instrument functions and the command structure likewise differs considerably between models A and models B E a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 987 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu m a Emulating Other Instruments Commands The command structure for models A is as follows lt command gt command code SPC lt data gt lt step gt lt SPC gt lt delimiter gt lt command code gt lt delimiter gt lt data gt lt Value gt lt SPC gt lt units code gt lt SPC gt lt delimiter gt lt SPC gt lt data gt lt step gt UP DN where command code see Table Supported Commands Value integer or floating point numerical value units code DM DM DB HZ KZ MZ GZ MV UV SC MS US lt delimiter gt CR lt LF gt lt gt lt gt lt ETX gt lt SPC gt 3240 lt ETX gt 349 Command sections given in are optional The R amp S FSW GPIB hardw
114. Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Conversion loss on page 329 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 804 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS Ss ee ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Conversion loss on page 329 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Conversion loss on page 329 SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 328 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 328
115. INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measurement channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Manual operation See Replace Current Channel on page 96 SS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 624 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see table 11 1 Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default c
116. INST USER Results Test001 txt Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk or MMEM MOVE C R_S INST USER Results Test001 xml D TestResults txt Moves the file Test001 txt to drive T renames it to Testresults txt and removes it from the instrument hard disk MMEM RDIR C R_S INST USER Results Deletes the directory called Results from drive C unless it still contains any content WE Disconnecting the network drive MMEM NETW DISC T Disconnect drive T 11 9 6 2 Loading Data MMEM CDIR Returns the path of the current directory e g C R_S Instr user MMEM CDIR C R_S INST USER Results Changes the current directory MMEM CAT C R_S INST USER Results xml ox 11 9 6 3 11 9 6 4 11 9 6 5 Managing Settings and Results MMEM CAT xml Returns a list of all xml files in the directory C R_S INST USER Results MMEM CAT LONG xml Returns additional information about the xml files in the directory C R_S INST USER Resul Storing Instrument Settings In this example we will store the instrument settings for the Spectrum channel INST SEL SPECTRUM Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM MEMM STOR TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Stores the channel settings from the Spectrum channel to the file Spectrum dfl Loading Instrument Settings In this
117. Internal e 515 Marker e Phase noise measurement ssssusssss 463 Power SEM 4 det teet be eee i eine deis Range SEM Scl 515 Reference channel CP ACUR uia nire rr ari tet reto ng 123 133 Reference frequency Default e tenses 518 External generator 304 gos E heen 516 L EE 517 Reference level 353 Adjusting to transducer factors sssuss 520 Auto level 395 CP ACLR 116 External generator sss 298 External Mixer B21 ssssessssesssss 322 Offset Hv 356 Offset Power sensor cccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeteaeees 288 Offset softkey AA 356 Position 360 Power Sensor serrada tenete tee beaeo e die cea ie 287 SEM fange ices chs cost reete tie eee eae 175 Setting to marker 458 SOMKCY M 356 Spurious Emissions range susessssss 202 Statistics 218 Bi deer des eebe ege 357 UD E 356 Reference line External generator ssssssssseeeeeee 298 Position external generator ssssssse 309 Shifting external generator 309 Value external generator s eieren 309 Reference marker A 261 447 Reference range Ic OEN EEEE tei geed 178 Reference trace External generator eeeeeessssss 296 298 Storing as transducer f
118. M 82 Closing remote E 757 Dialog EE 76 Layout remote 758 Maximizing remote 755 Querying remote 757 Replacing remote 758 ky tiees 82 Splitting remote sssee 755 Types remote 756 MC p M 24 ACCESS 26 Window title Dar e netten e nnt 70 WLAN AppliCatiOn rr nnne eor rere nta 93 Wordpad secti 26 WRONG FW EITOUS eire rere eus 74 512 526 1009 X X axis Adjusting Spurious Emissions 203 Limit lines 484 ke m 2064 346 349 Transducer lines rrr 522 X Offset Balli 481 X value ELE 260 447 Y Y axis Balli Tt 484 Max Min statistics sse 218 Optimizing display eene 361 Scaling 354 360 cupere c 359 YIG Bypass channel bar eene 70 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eesseeesssss 280 Activating Deactivating remote 797 Y Offset Md 482 Z Zeroing POWer SENSON i e enne 286 Zero span Measurement erret e rene eines 102 Softkey ZOOMING M Activating remote s esse 838 Area Multiple mode remote 839 Area remote 838 Deactivating
119. MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters lt PeakPower gt Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult This command queries the positive peak time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 725 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mun S X A I Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt PeakPower gt Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on page 224 Measuring the RMS Power CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS AVERage RESult This command queries the average RMS of the time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 722 To get a valid result yo
120. MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 327 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 801 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 327 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard waveguide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 328 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 799 Parameters Band KA JQ JUJ VIEJW F D GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 328 Table 11 3 Frequency ranges for pre d
121. Meaning 0 CALibrating This bit is set as long as the instrument is p erforming a calibration 1 2 Not used 3 SWEeping In applications this bit is not used Sweep is being performed in base unit applications are not considered identical to bit 4 4 MEASuring In applications this bit is not used Measurement is being performed in base unit applications are not considered identical to bit 3 5 Waiting for TRIgger Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal 6 7 Not used 8 HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy 9 For data acquisition in MSRA mode only MSRA capture finish mode and data is available for evaluation This bit is set if a data acquisition measurement was completed successfully in MSRA operating For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 10 Range completed activated This bit is set when a range in the sweep list has been completed if Stop after Range has been 11 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable Register The STATus QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do not meet the specifications individual applications User Manuals The STAT QUES SYNC register is used by the applications and is thus described in the You can read out the register with STAT QUI ES COND or
122. Means that one printer is available SYST COMM PRIN SEL2 LAGER on LPT1 Selects the printer for the print job on device 2 HCOP PAGE ORI2 LAND Selects the landscape format for the printout HCOP TDST STAT2 ON Includes date and time on the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Prints all screen elements HCOP Initiates the printout 11 10 Configuring the R amp S FSW The remote commands required to set up the R amp S FSW are described here e Basic Instrument Setup reir cer ene ri eene EE Dh ERR nS eR E Inda uh 930 e Configuring the Reference Frequerioy cedes eese neben ed de e teda uu dde noa 931 e Calibration and Temperature Checks AAA 933 e Working with Trensducets eie iseeeeeseeeieeekeeee tne Lennon nk usen n Lak hd ad 937 e Customizing the Screen Layout ossa cenis te inanki EEANN D dus donde 940 e Configuring the Network and Remote Control essetis 947 e Checking the System Configuratlon enint itte iint agita 950 e Using Service FUhCHORS eceect eene knee cepere kx Herr Ex nnne 954 11 10 1 Basic Instrument Setup SY ON CUCL OG GING Em 930 SYoTem TO OW AI 931 SYSTem CLOGging lt State gt This command turns logging of remote commands on and off R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Parameters lt State gt ON Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file The destination is C R_S instr ScpiLo
123. Mechanical Attenuation Coupling ATT5 Mechanical Attenuation 05 DB ATT10 Mechanical Attenuation 10 DB ATT20 Mechanical Attenuation 20 DB ATT40 Mechanical Attenuation 40 DB CAL Mechanical Calibration Source EATT Electrical Attenuation Bypass PREamp Preamplifier Bypass Return values lt Cycles gt Number of switching cycles Example DIAG INFO CCO CAL Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 950 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Manual operation See Relay Cycle Counter on page 535 DIAGnostic SERVice BlOSinfo This command queries the BIOS version of the CPU board Return values lt BiosInformation gt String containing the BIOS version Example DIAG SERV BIOS Returns the BIOS version Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo This command queries hardware information Return values lt Hardware gt String containing the following information for every hardware component lt component gt name of the hardware component lt serial gt serial number of the component lt order gt order number of the component lt model gt model of the component lt code gt code of the component lt revision gt revision of the component Example DIAG SERV HWIN Queries the hardware information FRONTEND 100001 003 1300 3009 03 01 00 00 MOTHERBOARD 123456 002 1300 3080 02 00 00 00 Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo This command queri
124. Normalization HP 856xE not available SRCNORM 1 0 HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 983 Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models SRCPOFS SRCPOFS Source Power Offset HP 856xE not available numeric value DB HP 8566B DM HP 8568B SRCPOFS DN HP 8594E SRCPOFS UP SRCPOFS SRCPWR SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE not available numeric value DB HP 8566B DM HP 8568B SRCPWR DN HP 8594E SRCPWR UP SRCPWR ON SRCPWR OFF SRCPWR SS SS numeric value HZ CF Step Size HP 8566A available KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A S3 DN HP 856xE SS UP HP 8566B SSAU HP 8568B Ser HP 8594E ST ST numeric value US Sweep Time HP 8566A available MS SC HP 8568A SKDN HP 856xE SLUF HP 8566B STAVIO HP 8568B SI HP 8594E STB STB Status byte query HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E STOREOPEN STOREOPEN Store Open HP 856xE not available HP 8594E STORESHORT STORESHORT Store Short HP 856xE not available HP 8594E STORETHRU STORETHRU Store Thru HP 856xE not available HP 8594E SUB Subtract HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E er E E VM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 984 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Functio
125. OBW 159 161 Search Mode Spectrogram Markers sese 453 Search range ZOOM ATEA eR 401 Search settings TYING OUT sensns aiia 61 Search Signals SOMKEY ente rens 239 244 Second harmonic intercept ssssssusssss 228 Select Frame SOftKGy ect ice eter etri 374 426 Select Marker SOMKCY MC e le lu uii rsen aeta Aborting e Ee EE Staing p Selftest Performlilig intret enero 529 546 remote Remote Results SONGS uiro ehe eit t eet Temperature SEM Adding power classes Ge Alpha value RRC filter 00 eee cence eee 179 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index ADDIICAHONS e 165 Channel power settings seeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 179 Configuring Deleting ranges ssssssssssseeeeren 177 Displaying peaks sssesssssssssm 184 Exporting results 188 Fast MOUS uuo rten rre etin 171 174 PING Rly PO c e NES 174 Format description of export files hs 194 189 177 Format description of settings files Inserting ranges Limit absolute s 176 Limit Check riorem 176 Limit INES rr trei remiss 169 Limit relative 176 List evaluation 184 List evaluation remote control 695 List evaluation
126. OBW A UIN Des Ea SaL Fes UTE UNE NO NN QUEE 162 Performing m Adjust X Axis ReSUIS e cet eren re i pte ok ener Softkey EEN 203 Results remote control s sse 713 Alignment Scaling remote control e GEET 512 see also Statistics 0 0 ceccccccceccsssssesteseessseeeseeeeeseees Performing e 546 Using gate ranges seses REMOTE casse cecis o pea actas S deen d 930 Applications Results ENEE 512 522 523 1xEV DO BTS Ages dete teque de nete 90 1xEV DO MS i uice ene tite e rte 91 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1031 R amp S FSW Index SG FDD BTS i Intr rite rip re trenes SG o BIREN Analog Demodulation Ee edma2000 BUS 1 nete dee cdma2000 MS D Group Delay EE e UO Analyzer jr EE Noise ite EE Phase Noise PUISE M See Spectrum applications ssssssssss 88 Setting Ns SPOCIUM EE 90 TD SCDMADBTS nite rte rite 93 TD SCDMA UE Vector Signal Analysis VSA sssssss 93 WEAN iie fter etes rase cantina headin deine 93 APR channel bar AA 70 APX External generator sessseseeesee 296 301 Arranging VIe M AOW K YS E ASCII trace export Att channel setting ssssssssssssenee 69 Attentato cissi REES 357 Auto Electronic Impact Manual seis Option B25 dh met tee b iden 358 uie ae
127. PEONO ooa repeti eid ei eer be teet oerte 119 Performing measurement x Power mode intr rrt enr Power Unit rcr Predefined Settings Predefined standards sssssssss 153 Reference channel E Reference channel remote control 650 Reference level iecit nie 116 Repeatability Results cin rr nter inen Setting up channels sssssseseese Setting up channels remote control Standards ener rtee etras Standards remote control ssususss 643 Standards Softkey Sweep TIME uiri iit rte teet eeepc eres Sweep TIME 1 etii tenent Hii ree deve Trace averaging Trace Selection rmn Weighting filters eese 129 Weighting filters remote control 648 CPU E ul 535 Crest factor ARD 210 CODE c 211 Cumulated Measurement Time CMT FAMMONICS P M 230 D Data format PSG m Binaon ode LEM XL INE LIES Ionen Date Hiding restoring Instrument setting cnn 537 cun m 33 Date and Time uibem 509 DG channel Da unt ret tro ttn 70 Decimal separator ele export oerte eret re nee aen 424 plz e 564 Default Restoring settings
128. POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt TXCHannel COUNt Number This command defines the number of transmission channels the specific subblock con tains This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 LE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 663 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 8 Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix lt sb gt 11213 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Subblock Definition on page 136 See Number of Tx Channels Tx Count on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP lt gap gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the distance from subblock to the specified gap channel The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap Thus in the R amp S FSW MSR ACLR measurement only 2 gap channels are configured The spacing for gap channels is defined in relation to the outer edges of the surrounding subblocks i e Spacing CF of the gap channel left subblock center RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 See also figure 5 5 and figure 5 6 Suffix lt gap gt 1 2 Gap channel number Parameters lt Spacing gt numeric value in Hz RST 2 5 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Gap CACLR Channel Spacings on page 142 Performing an ACLR Measurement The following commands are r
129. R amp S FSW Remote Commands m K O 3Uvec M P T ge Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage lt State gt This command switches on or off averaging for the active power measurement in zero span in the window specified by the suffix n If activated a time domain value is cal culated from the trace after each sweep in the end all values are averaged to calculate the final result The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with SENSe AVERage COUNt Averaging is reset by switching it off and on again Synchronization to the end of averaging is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC SUMM AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average AVER COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd State This command switches on or off the peak hold function for the active power measure ment in zero span in the window specified by the suffix n If activated the peak for each sweep i
130. RST state is OFF Example CALC DLIN 20dBm Positions the display line at 20 dBm Manual operation See Horizontal Line 1 2 on page 479 CALCulate lt n gt DLINe lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a display line on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DLIN2 STAT ON Turns on display line 2 CALCulate lt n gt FLINe lt k gt lt Frequency gt This command defines the position of a frequency line Parameters lt Frequency gt Note that you can not set a frequency line to a position that is outside the current span Range 0 Hz to Fmax RST STATe to OFF Example CALC FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz Manual operation See Vertical Line 1 2 on page 479 CALCulate lt n gt FLINe lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a frequency line on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC FLIN2 STAT ON Turns frequency line 2 on Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 894 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 4 2 Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate lt n gt TLINe lt Line gt Time This command defines the position of a time line Parameters Time Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher than the current sweep time Range Os to 1600s RST STATe to OFF Example CALC TLIN 10ms Sets the first time line to 10 ms Manual operation See Vertical Line 1
131. Radio MSR Signals on page 116 Parameters lt Number gt Range 1 to 5 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Subblocks on page 133 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the bandwidth of the specified MSR Tx channel This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix lt sb gt 11213 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137 See Tx Channel Bandwidth on page 138 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt CENTer CHANnel lt ch gt Frequency This command defines the absolute center frequency of the specified MSR Tx channel Note that the position of the first Tx channel in the first subblock and the last Tx channel in the last subblock also affect the position of the adjacent channels This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix sb 11213 4 5 Subblock number IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 661 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mun P SX oe H H ee Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters Frequency absolute frequency in Hz Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137
132. Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request ERREUR EA ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 586 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 2 GPIB Languages Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well GPIB Languages The R amp S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used by other devices Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote control pro grams The device model to be emulated is selected manually using SETUP gt Network Remote gt GPIB tab gt Language Via the GPIB interface using the SySTem LANGuage on page 961 command In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB Language setting you can modify the identification string received in response to the ID command Identification String setting Thus any device model whose command set is compatible with one of
133. STAT QUE EVE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 576 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics o The STATus QUEStionable register sums up the information from all subregisters e g bit 2 sums up the information for all STATus QUEStionable TIMe registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit occurred in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel Table 10 6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0 1 Unused 2 TIMe This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels The STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register provides more information on the error type 3 POWer This bit is set if the measured power level in any of the active channels is questionable The STATus QUEStionable POWer Register provides more information on the error type 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if the temperature is questionable FREQuency This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference frequency in any of the acti
134. STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition eese nennen neret 958 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition 959 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENI sees nennen ene ennree neret nnne 957 STATusOUEG onable L Mitznz CGONDitton enne ennt nnne 957 STATusOUEG onable LU lMitnzENAbBle eene tenente nennt nns inns enn nnns nnns 958 SGTATusOUEGtonablellMitznzNiRansiton enne n rents enne nnn 958 STATusOUEGtonablellMitcnz P Ransttion nennen nennen nnns nnne 959 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt SEH STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n CONDition essere nennen 957 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n ENABle esee nenenree neret reete rennen 958 SGTATusOUEG onable M Aboin nzNTRansiton rennen nennen 958 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n PTRansition esee enne nennen nennen 959 STATusOUEG onable M Aboin nztEEVEN enne nnne enne enhn enne rns inns 957 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 958 SGTATusOUEGtonable POVWer CONDitton eene enne enn nnr nennen rentre nnn 957 STATusOUEG onable bOMWerENAb le ener nnne nnne nnns erret n nnns nenne nnns nnns 958 STATusOUEGtonable POMWerNTbRansition enne entente nnn nennt nennt nnn 959 STATusOUEGtonable bOuWerP Ransitton eene enne entem nnnen enne 959 STATusOUEG onable PBOMWerl EVEN 957 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 959 SGTATusOUEGtonable TEMerature CONDmtion nennen enne nnne nnn 957 STATus Q
135. See Input Coupling on page 280 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter ERREUR E E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 796 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 280 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Preselec tor on page 280 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 280 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a matching pad of
136. See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel lt ch gt Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter Parameters lt Alpha gt Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel State This command turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL State This command turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt ch gt State This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Weighting Filters on page 141 ERREUR RA SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 649 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 4 Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt ch gt State This command turns the weighting filter for a transmission channel on and off Parameters lt State gt ON
137. Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 371 SENSe SWEep OPTimize Mode This command selects the sweep type optimization mode LEE M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 771 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 8 8 Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO Automatically applies the sweep optimization mode that is best for the current measurement DYNamic Optimizes the sweep mode for a large dynamic range SPEed Optimizes the sweep mode for high performance RST AUTO Example SWE OPT DYN Select dynamic sweep mode Manual operation See Optimization on page 372 SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points analyzed during a sweep Note that the number of sweep points is limited to 10001 when measuring spurious emis sions For EMI measurements 200001 sweep points are available Parameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 372 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep or data capture time In the Spectrum application the command decouples the sweep time from the span and resolution and video bandwidths Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI
138. State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 763 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C n P erl Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 350 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 350 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If thi
139. TCP IP buffers o Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with imme For more information see also the application note at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1MA208 Socket Communication An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network communication using sockets The socket communication also referred to as Raw Ethernet communication does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the remote controller side It is available by default on all operating systems The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built in telnet program The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with the software on a command by command basis For more convenience and to enable automation by means of programs user defined sockets can be programmed Socket connections are established on a specially defined port The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote control All Signal and Spectrum Analyzers use port number 5025 for this purpose The port is configured for communication on a command to com mand basis and for remote control from a program 10 1 1 2 GPIB Interface IEC 625 IEEE 418 Bus Interface A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument By connecting a PC to the R amp S FSW via the GPIB conn
140. TH THE THE ON OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E TIMEDSP TIMEDSP ON OFF Time Display HP 856xE available TIMEDSP 1 0 HP 8566B TIMEDSP HP 8568B HP 8594E TM TM FREE VID EXT Trigger Mode HP 856xE available LINE HP 8566B TMe HP 8568B HP 8594E TM LINE 2 TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available TRA TRAB Transfer A HP 856xE available TRAA HP 8566B TRA HP 8568B HP 8594E TRB TRB B Transfer B HP 856xE available TRB A HP 8566B TRB HP 8568B HP 8594E TRSTAT TRSTAT Trace State Query HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 986 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _e u aM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models TS TS Take Sweep HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E UR UR Plot Command HP 8566A available HP 8568A VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition arrays HP 8566B available are not supported HP 8568B HP 8594E VAVG VAVG Video Averaging HP 856xE available VAVG TRA TRB TRC HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E VB VB lt numeric_value gt HZ Video Bandwidth HP 856xE available KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8566B TEE HP 8568B VB UP HP 8594E VB AUTO VB VBR VBR numeric value Video Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE available VBR DN HP 8566B VBR UP HP 8568B VBR HP 8594E VIEW VIEW TRA TRB TRC HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B
141. WAI Com Action Programming the controller mand OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR e Setting bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been execu Setting bit 5 in the SRE ted e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned Sending OPC directly after the command This is only the case after the Operation Com whose processing should be terminated before plete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indi other commands can be executed cates that the previous setting has been com pleted WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command commands sent before WAI have been exe whose processing should be terminated before cuted other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC User Manual 1173 9411
142. Windows the R amp S FSW ideally meets requirements for use in production The computer that is used for remote operation is called controller here The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop e Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel soft front panel e Printout of measurement results directly from the controller e Storage of measured data on the controller s hard disk This documentation provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R amp S FSW For details refer to the Windows operating system documentation 10 5 1 How to Configure a Network A precondition for operating or monitoring the R amp S FSW remotely is that it is connected to a LAN network or a PC connected to the GPIB interface This is described here Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network Rohde amp Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument R amp S instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled For more details on firewall configuration see the R amp S White Paper Malware Protection available at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1EF73 and the Windows help sys tem 10 5 1 1 How to Connect the Instrument to the Network There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the
143. WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub End of SRQ routine Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines 11 14 1 5 Reading Out the Output Buffer REM Subroutine for the individual STB bits Public SUB Outputqueue Reading the output buffer result SPACES 100 Make space for response CALL InstrRead analyzer result Debug Print Contents of Output Queue result END SUB REM X X Xkkkckck ck kk ck kk kk kk kk Ck kk kk kk Ck kk ck kckck ck kckckckckck ck k ck ck kckck ck kc kckck kc kckck ck ckck ck ck ck KK REM 2 5 Subroutine for the output queue Public Sub Outputqueue Reading the output buffer Try Dim result As String mbSession ReadString Console WriteLine Contents of Output Queue result Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub Programming Examples 11 14 1 6 Reading Error Messages REM Ss gt s s 5 Subroutine for reading the error queue Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler ERRORS SPACE 100 Make space for error variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer SYSTEM ERROR CALL InstrRead analyzer ERRORS Debug Print Error Description ERRORS END SUB REM xk k kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkk kkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kk kkkkkkkk kk kkkkkkkkkkkkk REM 2 Subroutine for reading the error queue
144. a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands e Asequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands e Anoverlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchroni zation between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable The following commands always return the specified result FREQ STAR 1GHZ SPAN 100 FREQ STAR Result 1000000000 1 GHz Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI FREQ STAR 1GHz STAR SPAN 1000000 The result could be the value of STARt b
145. adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 760 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 11 7 1 11 7 1 1 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters LAYout WINDow n REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow command To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 756 for a list of available wi
146. against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 808 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu ER H mP s Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 335 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 336 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects th
147. allowed to connect to the R amp S FSW via Remote Desktop You can add the users to this group directly when you allow remote ERREUR RA I ET a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 609 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control access on the R amp S FSW as described in chapter 10 5 5 How to Set Up Remote Desk top on page 608 Furthermore you can add or remove users to this group at any time E j Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 Inthe Start menu select Control Panel and then select User Accounts 3 Select Give other users access to this computer The User Accounts dialog box is displayed with a list of users and the user group they are assigned to 4 Give existing users the right to access the R amp S FSW via Remote Desktop a Select the user from the list and then select the Properties button b As the level of access you want to allow the user select Other then select Remote Desktop Users from the dropdown list c Select the Finish button The user is added to the Remote Desktop Users Group 5 Create new users who may access the R amp S FSW via Remote Desktop a Select Add b Enter the name of the new remote user in the text field and select Next LSS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 610 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control c As the level of
148. amp S FSW Remote Commands mu O H Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values Condition 0 The deltamarker has passed the limit check 1 The deltamarker is inside the margins of a limit line 2 The deltamarker has failed the limit check Example CALC DELT2 FUNC FME LIM2 COND Queries the condition of deltamarker 2 in relation to limit line 2 Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit lt k gt CONDition lt Condition gt This command queries the condition of a marker position in relation to a certain limit line Return values lt Condition gt 0 The marker has passed the limit check 1 The marker is inside the margins of a limit line 2 The marker has failed the limit check Example CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM2 COND Queries the condition of marker 1 in relation to limit line 2 Usage Query only CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit lt k gt DELTa This command queries the vertical distance from the deltamarker position to the limit line The unit is dB If the deltamarker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position the command returns 200 Return values lt Amplitude gt Vertical distance to the limit line in dB
149. amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Parameters lt FilterType gt CFILter channel filters NORMal Gaussian filters P5 5 pole filters The 5 pole filter is not available for FFT sweeps RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 263 See Res BW CISPR on page 265 See Res BW MIL on page 265 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The command decouples the video bandwidth from the resolution bandwidths Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz Manual operation See VBW on page 369 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth _L_L__ L LL LL MTN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 769 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 2 2 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See VBW on page 369 See RBW VBW on page 370 See Default Coupling on page 371 SENSe BANDwidth
150. be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 803 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Harmonic Type on page 329 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Harmonic Order on page 329 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Conversion loss on page 329 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Mixer Settings
151. can be operated via the front panel To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is displayed to return to manual operation The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument settings During program execution send the SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON command to activate the display of results see SySTem DISPlay UPDate on page 948 The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis played on the instrument screen To obtain optimum performance during remote control send the SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia grams again default setting in remote control To prevent unintentional return to manual operation disable the keys of the instru ment using the universal command LLO Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then This function is only available for the GPIB interface LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 615 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 5 To enable the keys of the R amp S FSW again switch the instrument to local mode GTL Go to Local i
152. commands base unit REESEN CALIDration RESU coracana retier RTT 934 E TEE EE 934 DIAGnostic INFO CCOUnter tee aa bes nc ca rater bo dk Gaede ned deeg de 950 DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSiDfO trc eer p eren rer ed de iE dace d d 951 DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfoO esses eene nnne enne ennn nn tnr eene nnne nnns enne nnne nnns rennen sensi 951 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut AIQ TYPE 2 oen eorr c rt rere eine rotten reete axe tae event 935 DIAGnosti SERVice INPUt MG DiSTance sosisini seiniisaiapsnaiana niini iiniaiinaninnanaa iiiaad nidad iadaa diaa aaan 934 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency ssssssssssessseeseseeeeneee ener nennen enn nnt rentre nnn 935 DiAGnosttc GERViceINburChRt GbtECirum nennen enne nennen en rnns nennen nnne inna 935 DiAGnosttc GERVice Nu GEI ec 936 DIAGnostic SER ele 836 RI Ee ee Dir ee e DEE 954 DiAGnosttc GERVice GEUNciion LAG Tresuht A 954 DlAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNCction RESults SAVE sse eene n ener nnns nnn DIAGnostic SERVice SINFO i acie ir te totae ti etie Leere Ee ec pe Pc arsine ek beste eyed ee ue einen 955 DIAGnostic SERVice S TESERESUlt sisena reete tr ener rer eed os Eia aa aeaea 936 DiAGnosttc GERViceVERGinto nennen eene seen nnns en rnns sinn nns t enr nr nnn rtr nent 951 DISPlay ANNotation7FREQUCNCY lt cccccccssecicsscsssscessssi
153. confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 126 See Sweep Time on page 370 See Preview on page 384 See Sweep Time on page 384 E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 772 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 9 a Ss T Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and video bandwidths Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Harmonic Sweep Time on page 232 See Sweep Time on page 370 See Default Coupling on page 371 SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Parameters lt Type gt AUTO Automatic selection of the sweep type between sweep mode and FFT FFT FFT mode RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Manual operation See Sweep Type on page 372 SENSe SWEep TYPE USED This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the sweep type Return values lt Type gt SWE Normal sweep FFT FFT mode SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available when using the sweep type FFT User Manual 1173 9411
154. connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Level on page 387 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Level on page 387 ERREUR RA T E e SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 783 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu E O J e T Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation
155. delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 260 See Marker Type on page 260 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker MODE on page 857 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 858 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENERT An
156. details see table 11 6 Return values lt TraceData gt For more information see tables below Example TRAC TRACE1 AS Transfers trace data A to trace 1 Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 104 See Spurious Emissions on page 104 See List Evaluation State on page 184 See List Evaluation State on page 204 Table 11 4 Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only For SEM or Spurious Emission measurement results the x values should be queried as well as they are not equi distant see TRACe n DATA X on page 854 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 853 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MEM G C T o w pngp Analyzing Measurements Basics Table 11 5 Return values for LIST parameter For every measurement range you have defined range 1 n the command returns eight values in the fol lowing order lt No gt lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt lt RBW gt lt PeakFreq g
157. e deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control it is recommended that you switch on the power save mode for the display For more details on this mode refer to the Overview 10 5 7 How to Return to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately gt Select the Local softkey or the PRESET key or use the following GPIB command status viGpibControlREN vi VI GPIB REN ADDRESS GTL R amp S FSW Remote Commands Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions 11 Remote Commands The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 598 D Compatibility with former R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R amp S FSW supports most commands from previous R amp S signal and spec trum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths may vary Therefore the R amp S FSW can emulate these other devices including their default values in order to repeat previous measurements or sup
158. e d a EET ERE Ee E COE 913 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings sese neren nnn ennnrre aiia iaai 913 MMEMOry SEEeGIATEM LEIN6S ALL cincti t ete e bee era ee DE o gae denda dz 914 MMEMory SELect I TEM NONE MMEMorty SEESGI ATEM S GR AI eii rot etr tree tiere par ate eX REPE EE ASTEAREN CIE HEY E RESP nents 914 MMEWMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive sess ene neren nene rsen terns nnne 914 MMEMory SELect TEM TRANsducer ALL sess rennen enne 915 bus ESAES cHBEgP MMEMOry S TORSG PEANK iiie ntt etin eh po RR RE Rein E t rre rece elec ee iei MMEMory STORe SGRam MMEMory STORe SPURious MMEMorv STObe GTATe ntin ttt ttt ut Eut EAEEAEAAENEEAEEAEANEAEENEEAEENEEEENEEAEEAEENEAEEAEA EEEE EE EEEn MMEMory STORe STATe amp NEXT e eterne ate eerte pea e dec p EE ER e eu du eo dec egg ELENEN TEE SEERA 917 MMEMoty STORGHY Pe se e 918 MMEMofy STOResna TI RAG Gis Egeter 927 OUTPut IF IFFRequency OUMPUEIFESOURCE E OUTPut Ree Geen ER RIIT 789 OUTPut TRIGgersport DEVel mieci tates col potete ttes ie es fuses ndlaesadbevescdevctlenndceesactnesds testa Pa FERNER sends 790 OUTPut TRIGg rsport QT d EE 790 OUTPutTRIGger port PULSe IMMediate essen nennen eee nren nennen 791 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth
159. effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Parameters lt Range gt Range 1 dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB Manual operation See X Axis on page 218 See Range on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level for statistical measurements The effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Note that in case of statistical measurements the reference level applies to the x axis Parameters lt RefLevel gt The unit is variable If a reference level offset is included the range is adjusted by that offset Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 0 dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See X Axis on page 218 See Ref Level on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Y Axis on page 218 See Y Max Y Min on page 218 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 717 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 8 5 11 5 8 6 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt U
160. elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 862 MMEMory STORe LIST on page 926 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 880 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEakeCOUNG 880 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate cesses 881 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE eese 881 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT cccccscccsseeceeceeceseceseeceeceseeeeeaues 881 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT ccccccccceesecesceeseeseseessececeeceeeeeeeees 882 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fteakexy AEEA EE NARE EEn ai 882 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fteakey 882 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 470 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set
161. frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the current frequency The search incl
162. functions of the external tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Useful commands for source calibration described elsewhere e chapter 11 10 4 Working with Transducers on page 937 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition eese 820 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACGevtSCALelbRVAl ue enne nennen 821 SENSe CORRection COL Lect ACOUTE EE 821 SENS amp ICORRSGIODnNMETHoOG eerte SEANCE ENEE D de e EL ER OE Rad 822 SENSe ee e EE 822 SENSeJCORRection E 822 SENSe JCORRection TRANsd cer GENe amp ralor 2 i aa tac ERR cen exea SEENEN 823 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 10096 corresponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time display Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 820 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS
163. gt List of network drives in alphabetically descending order e g W V U Usage Query only MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives lt State gt This command returns a list of all network drives in use User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 911 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt State gt You do not have to use the parameter If you do not include the parameter the command returns a list of all drives in use This is the same behavior as if you are using the parameter OFF ON Returns a list of all drives in use including the folder information OFF Returns al list of all drives in use Usage Query only MMEMory RDlIRectory Directory This command deletes the indicated directory Parameters Directory String containing the path of the directory to delete Note that the directory you want to remove may contain no con tents Usage Event 11 9 2 Selecting the Items to Store The following commands select the items to be included in the configuration file Depending on the used command either the items from the entire instrument MMEMory SELect ITEM oronly those from the currently selected channel MMEM SELect CHANnel ITEM are stored MMEMorny SELectOHANnel ITEMEALL reiten terrere ceu eunte tede de 912 TE ERR E BE 912 MMEMorn SELbectCHANnBelFITEMEDEFaulb c tua cicacau n idend aaa cha iacens 913 MMEMornysSELect ITEM DEFUN
164. gt RESUIt 00 eee cece cece eeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesseeseaeeseaees 654 CALOulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RELative essent 654 CAL Culate Mrt AChower Al Temate ch fREL atvelGTATe nen 654 CALOulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute sessi 657 SS P M Qs User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1013 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit El CALOulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute STATe essssssseseeeeeeeneenneen eene 657 CAL Culate LU IM ACbowerGAb oapz REGu 658 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative STAT ec eee cee eeeneceeeseeeseeeeeeeseaeessaeeseeesseeenaees 658 CAL Culatel IM ACPowerGAb oapzfREL atvel nnne 658 CALCulate EIMiEACPower S TAT s lt seicesceneanerseencescensaneeacenconteneencendencaneenconesnuahenstesonteneanensbencoutpndarenndecns 655 VEER heen 903 CAL CulateL IMtCLEarilMMediatel nnne nenen ree ad 904 CALCulate LIMiECOMMBrit 3 oerte cette e en dede De deed eh aed a Ah iud 896 CALCulate EIMiEESPectrum LIMIts niano ne te eer ree EE Oe Ed Ee 689 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum MODBDE ee eene retenta ttn rre nete Ea na aaea a iaaea 690 CAL Culatel Mt tGbechum PC aesCOUN A 691 CALOulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class LIMit S TATe essen 691 CALOCulate LIMit ESPectru
165. if the power reference is the channel power Parameters Alpha Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Channel Power Settings on page 179 See Alpha on page 179 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe State This command turns the RRC filter in the reference range on and off The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Channel Power Settings on page 179 See RRC Filter State on page 179 SENSe ESPectrum RRANge lt RefRange gt This command queries the reference range Return values lt RefRange gt Number of the current reference range Range 1 to 30 Usage Query only SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe Type This command defines the type of the power reference IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 688 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 6 5 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Type gt PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Manual operation See Power Reference Type on page 178 Configuring the Power Classes The following commands define the power classes for SEM measurements CALCUlate LIMTE SPec BUI 689 GAL Oulate IMIEESPectr mmdMQODE rr eire eae E AEE EA Ea ANEN 690 GALGulate LIMiEESPectrum VALUe uiieen onec etna andina n R
166. input mixer e Increase the RF attenuation for RF input e Reduce the input level for digital input UNCAL One of the following conditions applies e Correction data has been switched off e Noocorrection values are available for example after a firmware update e Record the correction data by performing a self alignment For details refer to chapter 3 1 1 6 Performing a Self Alignment and a Self Test on page 23 WRONG FW The firmware version is out of date and does not support the currently installed hard ware Until the firmware version is updated this error message is displayed and self alignment fails For details refer to chapter 9 3 4 4 Firmware Updates on page 526 13 2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode In remote control mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor The answer format of R amp S FSW to the command is as follows error code error text with queue query remote control command concerned The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional Example The command TEST COMMAND generates the following answer to the query SYSTem ERRor 113 Undefined header TEST COMMAND There are two types of error messages e Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes These mes sages are defined and described i
167. least the span of the range e the x axis has to be linear e theunit has to be dB Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt Transducer gt String containing the transducer file name including the path infor mation Manual operation See Transd Factor on page 176 Configuring the Reference Range The following commands define the reference range for the SEM sweep list SENSe JTESPectm E e EE 687 SENSe JESPechumiPIL Ter e ET EN 688 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe cesses 688 SENSe ESPectr mi RRANge centre tret pre Fondi nta Scr rk Dane Ra Re D Rx aa aede da ea 688 ISENS amp JESP etrumilT YPO 1 a creer a t dite AE RAT D NEESS Sege 688 SENSe ESPectrum BWID Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power ERREUR RA I E MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 687 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a JO Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters Bandwidth minimum span lt value x span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz Manual operation See Channel Power Settings on page 179 See Tx Bandwidth on page 179 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the RRC filter The RRC filter is available
168. level value for 10 probability for the CCDF CALC MARK2 X Returns the level for a probability of 95 Measuring the Time Domain Power All remote control commands specific to time domain power measurements are described here e Configuring the Measurement 1 3 2 eerte et rete ger NEEN 721 e Performing a Time Domain Power Measurement sess 724 e Retrieving Measurement Results 724 e Programming Example Time Domain Power 727 Configuring the Measurement The following remote commands measure the time domain power Useful commands for time domain power measurements described elsewhere CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe Remote commands exclusive to time domain power measurements CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF seessssesssesenen nnne 722 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage eese 722 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLGd esses 722 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATel eese 722 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe eese 723 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe eese 723 CAL Culate nzM Abkermz FUNGCHon SUMManv HMG STATel enen eere reee nnne 723 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe 723
169. line to 326 us CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 6ms Sets the right limit line to 538 us INIT WAI Initiates the measurement and waits until the measurement is finished CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS RES Queries the mean peak and RMS time domain power R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 10 11 5 10 1 11 5 10 2 Configuring and Performing Measurements Measuring the Harmonic Distortion All remote control commands specific to harmonic distortion measurements are descri bed here e Activating the Measurement nennen nnne ener nennen ns 729 e Configuring the Measurement 2r tede eet LA e RR Det ue dede ena 729 e Performing the MeasuUremigltt ciii reetinoce realice EE EENS 730 e Retrieving ReSHES uice e t ae EEEREN KREAN AAAA TE RR Rua LER ERR 731 e Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion 731 Activating the Measurement The following command activates harmonic distortion measurement CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe eese 729 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics STATe State This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off Note the following e f you perform the measurement in the frequency domain the search range for the frequency of the first harmonic whose power is determined is defined by the last span e f you perform the measurement
170. loaded with this command Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file to delete The string may or may not include the file s extension Example MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TESTO1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Recall on page 493 See Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel on page 496 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 916 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m M Managing Settings and Results MMEMory LOAD TYPe CHANnel Mode This command defines whether the channel specific settings that will be loaded with the subsequent MMEM LOAD STAT command will replace the current channel or activate a new channel Parameters Mode NEW REPLace NEW The loaded settings will be activated in a new channel REPLace The loaded settings will replace the currently active channel RST NEW Example INST SEL SPECTRUM2 Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM2 MMEM STOR TYP CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C NR SMInstrNuserNSpectrum Stores the settings from channel SPECTRUM2 to the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum MMEM LOAD TYP NEW Specifies that channel specific settings are to be activated in a new channel MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum to the new channel S
171. lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA or CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA H not the R amp S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit is Hz ors RST Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain lt SpanSetting gt This command selects the domain of the limit line Parameters lt SpanSetting gt FREQuency TIME RST FREQuency Manual operation See X Axis on page 484 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 896 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu O M dW d P H Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE Mode This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric val
172. lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation STATe eese 892 SENS amp J DEMod SQUelchiEEVl uia eoi cer tepore ad citi te tenete nnne REENEN EEN aan 893 SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe eccentric 893 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous State This command turns continuous demodulation of the signal at the marker position in the frequency domain on and off ERREUR RA ET SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 891 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mm a Analyzing Measurements Basics In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC2 MARK3 FUNC DEM CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation Manual operation See Continuous Demodulation on page 468 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff Duration This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodulated In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Parameters Duration Range 10 ms to 1000s RST Marker demodulation OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC DEM HOLD 3s Manual operation See Marker Stop Time on page 468 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation SELect lt DemodMode gt This command selects the demodulation mode at the marker position Parameters lt DemodMode g
173. m1z LINK TOMARR erem CAL Culatecnz MAbRkercmz AOF F se nnen ete aa einsi ssh iaki ki inead tnn ness tesn seitens seni nnn snnt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COUNt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COUNt FREQUEN CY 0 c cee ccee cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeseeessaeeeseeseeeseiees 890 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNtRESoOIlution esses eene enne entren nnne nt nnn 891 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE sss enne nennen nnne 885 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESUIE ssssssssssssseeseee eene 885 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN essent n nente n nnne CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCnon CENTer eene enhn nie nnnnr rnt entn nnne nnn CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep esses nnne rennen rennen rennen senes CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous sese 891 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDOff esses 892 SS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1016 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit a ao e CAL Culate cnz MAb
174. manual limit line selection as and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value the associated predefined limit lines is selected This command has the same effect as a combination of the CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN and the CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class EXCLusive commands however the power class to be used is not defined directly but via the expected power As opposed to CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO the power class is not re assigned to the input signal power dynamically but only once when the command is executed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 690 R amp S FSW Remote Commands ee ee ed Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Power gt integer Range 200 to 199 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined This command must be executed before any new power class values can be defined using CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class MAXimum and CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class MINimum Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt EXCLusive lt State gt This command selects the power class used by the measur
175. mun Om ep Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the alternate channels The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Parameters lt LowerLimit gt The first value defines the limit of the lower alternate channel the lt UpperLimit gt second value the limit of the upper alternate channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 DB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate channels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt LowerChan gt text value lt UpperChan gt
176. n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm eme CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 402 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 839 11 8 2 11 8 2 1 Analyzing Measurements Basics Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom win dows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 402 See Restore Original Display on page 402 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 402 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data The comma
177. name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part For more information on the negative transition part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 572 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optiona
178. not change the settings 12 Set the Display the connection bar when use the full screen option If activated a bar showing the network address of the R amp S FSW will appear at the top edge of the screen You can use this bar to reduce minimize or close the window If deactivated the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the R amp S FSW screen in full screen mode is to select Disconnect from the Start menu 10 5 5 4 How to Start and Close the Remote Desktop To set up a connection to the R amp S FSW 1 In the Remote Desktop Connection dialog box see chapter 10 5 5 3 How to Con figure the Controller on page 611 open the General tab In the Computer field enter the IP address of the R amp S FSW In the User name field enter instrument to log in as an administrator or Normal User to log in as a standard user In the Password field enter 894129 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the connection information RDP To load an existing connection configuration a Select the Open button The Open dialog box is displayed b Select the RDP file Select the Connect button The connection is set up If the Disk drives option is activated on the Local Resources tab a warning is displayed indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the R amp S FS
179. on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 General ACLR Measurement Settings The following commands control the measurement algorithm Useful commands for the ACLR measurement described elsewhere SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 642 SENSe POWer TRACe on page 642 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 639 Remote commands exclusive to ACLR measurement ee e EG 656 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 655 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 7 Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command turns high speed ACLR and channel power measurements on and off If on the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on each channel in the time domain It returns to the frequency domain when the measurement is done In some telecommunications standards high speed measurements use weighting filters with characteristic or steep edged channel filters for band limitation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON Manual operation See Fast ACLR on page 124 Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 the channels for the ACLR mea
180. operation See Manual Source Frequency on page 306 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe State This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R amp S FSW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 306 E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 815 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m A H IP s Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator Value This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq Sp gt Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EX
181. out the CONDition section of the status register The commands do not delete the contents of the CONDition section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the EVENt Part For more information on the event part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCP Status Register on page 572 STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME EVENt lt ChannelName gt These commands read out the EVENt section of the status register At the same time the commands delete the contents of the EVENt section E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 957 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 11 4 11 11 5 Using the Status Register Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command work
182. output Manual operation See Squelch on page 468 Configuring Display and Limit Lines The commands required to configure display and limit lines in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 7 5 4 How to Work with Display and Limit Lines on page 485 Configuring Display Lites erect rera sit creer Enea diene eed 893 Deining Limit Checks eri init Rt e Fas evi Rode teure a dade ae d 895 Configuring Display Lines The following commands configure vertical and horizontal display lines GALGulate n DLINesk certc aine e rhe a ecd eta de eer Rege pase d e tanen a E a Made dnd 894 eier DIE RI NEE 894 ele EE RE 894 CALC DEE RTR KE 894 GAL Guat Spm FLING SENG Eed dcacivanecuucedanabceascanddcanisamedsmudddaeranasdacsdenaveastiewedeanas 895 GAL Culate lt n gt TLING lt LINES STAG EE 895 ERREUR RA AE US a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 893 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m OE Q H UM p Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate lt n gt DLINe lt k gt Position This command defines the vertical position of a display line Parameters Position The value range is variable You can use any unit you want the R amp S FSW then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R amp S FSW uses the currently selected unit
183. p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 812 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Suffix lt p gt Return values lt SerialNo gt Usage Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Serial number in a string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 282 Suffix lt p gt Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 282 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 813 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 6 4 Setting B
184. page 184 See Show Peaks on page 204 11 5 6 8 Performing an SEM Measurement The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement SENS SWE MODE ESP see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 674 INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 11 5 6 9 Retrieving Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for SEM measure ments e CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 e TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory on page 854 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 854 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement In this example we will configure and perform an SEM measurement Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task For most common measurement stand ards the R amp S FSW performs the measurement optimally with the predefined settings without further configuration ee Preparing the measurement RST Resets the instrument SWE MODE ESP Activates SEM Measurement SEM has to be in single sweep mode to be configured User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 696 Configuring and Performing Measurements INIT CONT OFF Turns on the SEM measurement a aa a Managing Measurement Configurations ESP PRES WCDMAN3GP
185. page 930 10 4 3 Compatibility Settings The R amp S FSW can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum analyzers e g in order to use existing control applications Compatibility with former R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers As arule the R amp S FSW supports most commands from previous R amp S signal and spec trum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths may vary Therefore the R amp S FSW can emulate these other devices including their default values in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy sys tems The required settings are configured in the Compatibility tab of the Network Remote dialog box jetwork Remote Network GPIB Compatibility LXI Language PSA89600 IF Gain Pulse Sweep Repeat Coupling Wideband Revision String User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 594 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation ee ee aq M Network and Remote Control Settings Ee CN eR ET 595 DE AWA E 595 ee Ee cla TEE 595 eso M T 596 e MM 596 Se SUNG C 596 Resetting the Factory ISBVISIOTI 1 2 tt pne hr ret edet raped did kd dade d reda Rad ae odds 596 Language Defines the system language used to control the instrument For details on the available GPIB languages see chapter 11 12 2 Reference GPIB
186. position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 755 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter perma nently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error ERREUR E SS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 758 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 d m x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls lt Index2 gt The index of a window on the other side of the splitter lt Position gt New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right corner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitt
187. raped neces 936 SOURCE TEMPerattire FRONDO Z eire ere e bre e eek eile nae Geer 937 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 933 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW CALibration ALL This command initiates a calibration routine and queries if calibration was successful During the acquisition of correction data the instrument does not accept any remote con trol commands In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed the MAV bit in the status byte can be used If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable SRE register the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of cor rection data has been completed Return values lt CalibrationState gt 0 The command returns a 0 if calibration was successful Example CLS Resets the status management SRE 16 Enables MAV bit in the Service Request Enable register CAL Starts the correction data recording and then a service request is generated Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Starting a Self alignment on page 523 CALibration RESult This command returns the results collected during calibration Return values lt CalibrationData gt String containing the calibration data Example CAL RES would return e g Total Calibration Status PASSED Date dd mm yyyy 12 07 2004 Time 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 Usage Query only Manual operation See Alignment Re
188. sana ede e dnd 916 MMEMory LOAD TYPe CHANnel sees neren nnne t eren neret rns nt erinnern innen 917 MMEMory MDIRGClOl Ys M 909 bub isb ene Mp ege d 910 MMEMory MSIS MIMEMORY INA E 910 ll leie TER eg e RE ee TE 911 MMEMOory NET WOrkiMAP e Ee Ee GEN 911 MME Morv NE TWork UNUlGeddrtves AAA 911 MMEMorvNE Work UG Ddrtves cee eee cce cen eceneeceeeseaeeseaeeceaeeseaeeseaeeseeessaeescaaeesseeesseeeseaeesseesseeeseaees 911 SSES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1021 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN MMEMOFYRDIRE CHOI d C e 912 MMEMorv SEL ect CHANnell TTEMIALL A 912 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault essen enne nnne enne 913 MMEMorv GEI ect CHANnell IT EMIHW ettings enne rennen 913 MMEMorv GEI ect CHANnelfITEMIUlNesS All 914 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE ccccceceeseeeceeereeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeecaeseeecaeseaeeaeesaeseeesreeaeseeeenreeeeetenas 914 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRAM cece eese een eeenren nee ener enr ennnei 914 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive esee emen 914 MMEMory SELect CHANnel I TEM TRANSducer Al 915 MMEMOoryiSELectiI TEMA iL C 912 MMEMOorty SELect ITEM DBEFAUlt eiit reti
189. settings LCI function According to the LXI standard an LCI must set the following parameters to a default state Parameter Value TCP IP Mode DHCP Auto IP Address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP Ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWeblfc The LAN settings are configured in the Network tab of the Network Remote dialog box or using the instrument s LXI Browser interface Remote command SYSTem LXI LANReset on page 949 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 598 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation SSE EEE EEE es How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Remote operation Remote operation of the instrument from a connected computer is possible using SCPI commands see chapter 10 1 2 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instru ments on page 558 Sending remote commands requires the instrument to be con figured in a LAN network or connected to a PC via the GPIB interface as described in chapter 10 5 1 How to Configure a Network on page 599 Remote Desktop In production test and measurement a common requirement is central monitoring of the T amp M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics Equipped with the Remote Desktop software of
190. sse Threshold ET Type spectrograms ge ZOOM limits cit aree ri eter deste Percent marker scr C M 211 Softkey CCDF A 214 Performing EMI measurement A 267 Period Gate ranges statistics ssssussss 216 Persistence spectrum Spectrogram acte t ade ee eE 415 PASC 4 O EMI a LISN control EMI 2 eter aides 266 Phase noise measurement Activating Deactivating sss 463 ADPIICAUOM MA E Q 92 Deactivatirig EE 464 Marker des zs Reference point sessssssseseeene 463 Remote COnttol sie cas iii ectetuer epe ha 883 PHN marker functions s sess 72 PHONES CONMC CION CERTES 40 Ping EM PK trace information assesses 71 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 805 UE 837 Position Limit line values 0 cee ecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteteteneeeeeeeetes 484 Transducer factors isinsin diridir 522 Positive peak detector se n 253 Positive Peak detector ssssssssese 406 Power Channel see Channel Power 106 Harmonics i Mean time domain sene 223 Peak time domain eeeeseeeee 223 Percent OBW og 5 RMS time domain sene 223 Standard deviation time domain 223 Time domalri E 222 POWER UE
191. ssssssssesssseessessrsessrrrsrrnrsreeseet 409 Elle E EE Sweep count S i de le Traces algorithm sess 409 Traces remote Control 843 B Band Conversion loss table B21 ssss 335 External Mixer B21 remote control 802 External Mixer B21 sees 328 Band power MEI M 444 Band power measurement Activating Deactivating essseeesssss 466 Deactivatihng sensasion err rrr ER eher 467 Power mode Span Band power measurement remote control 885 Bandwidth Configuration Softkey eeesssesssss 367 Coupling 364 CP ACLR 127 Default settings snrnid ene ianea 362 MSR adjacent channels 140 MSR gap channels 142 MSR Tx channel ss e 138 MSR subblocks rrr enn nnn 137 Resolution 264 362 369 doro 363 369 Baseband Input jen m 44 BB Power Trigger softKey cette terr reni 386 Bias Conversion loss table B21 332 335 External Mixer B21 remote control 799 External Mixer B21 331 Boolean parameters sssssee 565 C C N C NO see Carrier to Noise sssssssrsserrireorscensetareinesernnienae 154 CACLR see Gap channels ssrrossiressni siearinenininiyinis 138 Calibration Analog Bas
192. stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the delta marker search area Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST ViSible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 455 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all frequen cies Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Event LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 876 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mm 2 H H A Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe
193. standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments The I O channel LAN or TCP IP USB GPIB is selected at initialization time by means of the channel specific address string VISA resource string indicated in table 10 1 or by an appropriately defined VISA alias short name A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces __ ___haSS_ S N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 558 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 4 Remote Control Basics chapter 10 1 1 1 LAN Interface on page 554 e chapter 10 1 1 2 GPIB Interface IEC 625 IEEE 418 Bus Interface on page 557 chapter 10 1 1 3 USB Interface on page 558 For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation Messages The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories e Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They are used to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface e Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces if not indicated otherwise in the description Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are
194. state 184 Measurement c nint Erin rerit 104 Measurement remote control ussss 673 Measurement result list zo 184 MSR remote control sss 693 Peak margins creer ire e oreet eet 184 Performing 185 Power Classes orcarina naaiden 169 179 Power classes remote control 689 Power class ranges 180 Preamplifigr ice ad emper retorno is 176 Programming example sss 696 Provided settings files 189 RE EE cepts 167 Range Start Stop 5 6 aider eene 174 RBW wee 175 Isefer rice Jee ees emeret nes 175 Reference power sse 178 Reference range 178 Reference range remote control 687 Restoring standard files ssssssssss 183 Result files E 188 ace 165 Results remote control 696 709 RF attenuation 176 RF attenuation mode sse 175 RRO UE 179 Saving list evaluation 184 Settings MOS uiuit cene 182 187 Standard files rrr mentre 182 Standards remote control 673 Sweep E 173 Sweep list remote control suus 675 Sweep time 175 Sweep time mode sese 175 Transduc r EE 176 Tx Bandwidth 179 Used power classes A 180 und 175 Sensitivity RBW AM Y 362 Sequencer Aborted e
195. the DHCP server is available DHCP On the setting is read only The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 591 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 4 2 Network and Remote Control Settings Subnet Mask Defines the subnet mask The TCP IP protocol is preinstalled with the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 If the DHCP server is available DHCP On this setting is read only The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are obtained automatically from the DHCP server Network Configuration Opens the standard Windows Network Configuration dialog box for further configura tion GPIB Settings Alternatively to connecting the R amp S FSW to a LAN the GPIB interface can be used to connect a remote PC For details see chapter 10 1 1 2 GPIB Interface IEC 625 IEEE 418 Bus Interface on page 557 The GPIB settings are defined in the GPIB tab of the Network
196. the following interfaces e 10 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 554 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation a aaa ee Remote Control Basics e 100 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3u e 1Gbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol They are connected using a commercial RJ45 cable shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5 The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instrument Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be instal led on the controller VISA library Instrument access is usually achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsulates the low level VXI GPIB LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user See chapter 10 1 3 VISA Libraries on page 558 for details The R amp S FSW supports various LAN protocols such as LXI RSIB raw socket or the newer HiSLIP protocol IP address Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection The host address is part of the VISA resource string used by the programs to identify and control the instrument The VISA resource string has the form TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR or TCPIP host add
197. the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Pulse length in seconds See Trigger 2 3 on page 343 See Output Type on page 343 See Pulse Length on page 344 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 791 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11 7 5 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 7 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 394 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition measurement time hys teresis can only be adjusted automatically in the MSRA Master not in the MSRA appli cations SEN Se Aust RE 792 SENS amp ADJust CONFigure DUERallon 2 2 2 Lr oaia a ePoe ee Ye isda 792 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE sess 793 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer esses 793 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure H Gteresles Uber 794 SENS amp JADJustCONEFigure TRIG 2 eoi eie eee dete E ete Ch e exa EA 794 Esp ABA ize c 794 SENS JADJUS KLEVE M E 795 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Cent
198. the supported device models can be emulated Supported languages Language Comment SCPI 71100C Compatible to 8566A B 71200C Compatible to 8566A B 71209A Compatible to 8566A B 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 587 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation a se eS qa GPIB Languages Language Comment 8568B Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument 8591E Compatible to 8594E 8594E Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK PSA89600 Notes e If you select a language other than SCPI the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was 20 before e The Start stop frequency reference level and number of sweep points are adapted to the selected instrument model e When you switch between remote control languages the following settings or changes are made SCPI
199. to remote control Remote command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate on page 948 GPIB Terminator Changes the GPIB receive terminator According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is LF and or lt EOI gt For binary data transfers e g trace data from the control computer to the instrument the binary code used for LF might be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by changing the receive terminator to EOI Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator on page 948 IDN Format Defines the response format to the remote command IDN see IDN on page 620 This function is intended for re use of existing control programs together with the R amp S FSW Leg Legacy format compatible to the R amp S FSP FSU FSQ family New R amp S FSW format Remote command SYSTem FORMat IDENt on page 953 UO Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function All remote control commands received by the R amp S FSW are recorded in the following log file _L_L_L_L_L LLLL EL S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 593 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation DEENEN Network and Remote Control Settings C R_S instr ScpiLogging ScpiLog txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes e g in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs Remote command SYSTem CLOGging on
200. to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 343 OUTbutTRlGger zportz Dibechlon cece eee ce eaee eee ete tee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeaaaaaeaaaneneneees 789 OUTPUE tRIGSerepants DEE 790 Een PO OTY EE 790 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate eese eee eene nennen nnne 791 OUTbutTRlGoerzportz PULL Se LENGm nennen eene nnne nennt 791 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction EEUU RU RA ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 789 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix lt port gt 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 343 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGgere oort OTYPe Suffix port 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 343 See Ou
201. value Use the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP command to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit PClass STATe State This command selects the limit check mode for all SEM ranges Suffix lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 685 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt State gt Manual operation Configuring and Performing Measurements ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as rela tive to the measured power in the reference range AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated RST RELative See Limit Check 1 4 on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel lt RefLevel gt This command defines the reference level for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the reference level has to be identical for all ranges Suffix lt range gt Parameters lt RefLevel gt Man
202. zangez LUlMit PDClaes AbBGolute GTOb SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez LUlMit PClases REL ative STAR ARS eneee 682 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative S TARt FUNCtion eessessss 683 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez LUlMit PDClaes REL ative GTOP 684 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative S TOP ABSolute esses 684 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1026 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative S TOP FUNCtion esses 685 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez RL EVel eene nnnr nennen nennt enn 686 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep T ME sese nren nene nnnnis 686 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe crangez GWEep TIME AUTO 687 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSducer essere nennen neret rennen innen 687 IGENZGe EGbechumR AhNGe zangezTrFbREOuencvlGTAht nennen 678 IGENZGe EGbechumRAhNGe rangezTEREOuencvl TOP 678 SENSe ESPectr m RRANgOe 2i rere nepos eee ee te i ape dean aul le tn ee pedet 688 SENSe ESPectr m F D YIPe sae ceno rente nct nera setae gerne ah sauces eA sk de Rin rara nex Oe eia uud Ee RM de Kei ISENS FREQUENCY CEN M E SENS FREQ uenoy CENTOESTEP rete a evo t edat Feed oa erat t x
203. 01 for 8566A B and 8568 A B 601 for 8560E to 8565E 401 for 8594E Trace Data Input Formats Trace data input is only supported for binary date TDF B TDF A TDF I MDS W MDS B GPIB Status Reporting The assignment of status bits by commands R1 R2 R3 R4 RQS is supported The STB command and the serial poll respond with an 8 bit value with the following assignment Bit enabled by RQS Description 0 not used value 0 1 Units key pressed 2 End of Sweep 3 Device Error 4 Command Complete 5 Illegal Command 6 Service Request 7 not used value 0 Bits O and 7 are not used and always have the value 0 Please note that the R amp S FSW reports any key pressed on the front panel rather than only the unit keys if bit 1 was enabled Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB query On the HP ana lyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus On the R amp S FSW this is not possible Therefore this bit is set as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set It won t be reset by performing a serial poll Reference Command Set of Emulated PSA Models The R amp S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PSA89600 instruments Despite the differences in system architecture and device features the supported com mands have been implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre spondence with the original EEUU RU TUE N
204. 02 13 773 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS SS SSS a MM Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Note this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs use the SENSe SWEep OPTimize command Parameters lt FilterMode gt WIDE AUTO NARRow AUTO Automatically applies the sweep optimization mode that is best for the current measurement NARRow Optimizes the sweep mode for a large dynamic range WIDE Optimizes the sweep mode for high performance RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter 11 7 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis settings in a remote environment e Ampie re E 774 e Configuring the Attenuation cc cceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeetaaeeeeeeseeaeeeeteeneaeeeeeneaaaees 776 e QCohtngurng a Preampliflgfe ice reete Rae cet e te eta era ee ete te ene Redes 778 Saling ihe hc I 779 11 7 3 1 Amplitude Settings The tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 6 4 2 Amplitude Settings on page 355 Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere SENSe ADJust LEVe1 on page 795 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CAL Culate nzM AbkermzFUNCHonRtterence eene 774 Ee sso n 775 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACGevtSCALelbRLEVel n
205. 1 Band Power Marker The following commands control the marker for band power measurements Using Markers CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon BOwWerMODE 885 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESUIt ccccceccecsesecessececeeceeeeeeeees 885 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN ccccesscecescceseseceseseceaceeseeeeeenees 886 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe eene 886 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as a power in dBm DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Configures marker 4 to show the measurement results in dBm Hz Manual operation See Power Mode on page 467 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Return values lt Power gt Signal power over the marker bandwidth E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 885 R amp S FSW Remote Commands E Sj Oh _ _ i _ i oO ___ _ gt E E ss Analyzing Measurements Basics Example Activate the band power marker CALC MARK FUNC BPOW STAT ON Select the density mode for the result CALC MARK FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Query th
206. 2 on page 479 CALCulate lt n gt TLINe lt Line gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a time line on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC TLIN STAT ON Turns the first time line on Defining Limit Checks Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x values for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This control line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines e Configuring Limit BEE 895 Managing Limit Lite E 903 e Checking the Results of a Limit Check cerei tds 904 Configuring Limit Lines ATG tlle ts UAT CORA A GA i rere rrr A E ee eee 896 CALGulate LIMIt lt k A CONTIOIDDATA e awaszdwndcctanadphencwedsataiss condensa o qe meo notera aS 896 CAL e HENRI e eech RTE E 896 CGAECulate LIMIESKSSCONTIGEMODE uiid Et ano no aaa a a a EAA 897 GAEGulate E IMIESKS S CONTIOIOFPSBt 1 2 erras opere dies xtate ers on inet lare Tee Fina rever Ends 897 GAECulate EIMIESKS CONTEOLSEIFL iiic audi ceccen saec cusua c enu pna necne o mE ne Pa srcne nn na Dead once cas 897 CALCulate LIMit k CON THORSPA GING 22 222 2 3 2 22 920 1 EtDe dded e neue euenit add cun ra iden uade 897 CAL e EB e e Ee E E 898 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGIN cccccsecccesseeceeceeceececseseeceneeeseeeesesseesneeseu
207. 2 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters 10 1 5 5 Structure of a command line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following e a lt New Line gt LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 566 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 5 6 Remote Control Basics e a lt New Line with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line contains two commands Both commands are part of the HCOP com mand system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follow
208. 23 INSTr ment CREate NEW EN 624 INS Trumen t CREE REPLACE eet tedio Rd ecR Na aaa ee 624 INS Tr melb DEESIB 2 Seege de dee es 625 b cgit E RR TEES ETE TITOLO D TTD 625 INS Tremenb ep LEE 626 le Lage EE 626 INS Trump SELeel eiae eee sad arem tre Eng nentes o RE Ey a be nen RR Eau uaa 627 DISPlay ATAB State This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed measurement channel Parameters State ON OFF ON The MultiView tab is displayed OFF The most recently displayed measurement channel is displayed RST OFF INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a con secutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new mea surement channel named Spectrum 2 IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 623 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS SS ee ed Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Usage Event Manual operation See Duplicate Current Channel on page 96 INSTrument CREate N
209. 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TOI RESult This command queries the results for the third order intercept point measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters lt TOI gt Third order intercept point LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 733 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 11 2 11 5 12 11 5 12 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See TO on page 105 Programming Example Measuring the TOI This example demonstrates how to determine the TOI in a remote environment d eege Configuring the measurement RST Reset the instrument CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Activate TOI measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI SEAR ONCE Initiates a search for signals in the current trace CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Returns the TOI Measuring the AM Modulation Depth All remote control commands specific to AM modulation depth measurements are descri bed here e Configuring an
210. 26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 955 R amp S FSW 11 11 11 11 1 Remote Commands Using the Status Register Usage Query only Manual operation See Creating R amp S Support Information on page 529 Using the Status Register For more information on the contents of the status registers see e STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 578 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register on page 579 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register on page 580 e STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register on page 581 e STATus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 581 e STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register on page 582 e STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register on page 582 e General Status Register Commeands eiecit 956 e Reading Out the CONDition Part 957 e Reading Out the EVENtE ep 200 Deere ret eee eee deat deed 957 Controlling thie ENABle Part aie erae eter nece 958 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 958 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part iececeeeneeee reete 959 General Status Register Commands STA MUS PRE EE 956 STATUS QUEWSENEX ME 956 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detec ted All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not
211. 288 See Slope on page 289 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe State This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 E AE I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 835 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 11 7 6 6 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 7 4 3 Configuring the Trigger Output on page 789 DIAGHGSICSERVige Lie isis chet dece tre aret Eee zb pec ia Ree a te d appe tus a a pande dana 836 jeune 836 OUR Put IFAEERRGQUBIG ee a da tete ena end nn bna vna addu dus 837 EK Tu EE KL KEE 837 CUM UBUIP ORE VALUE M A eds 837 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off For details see chapter 6 2 1 4 Input from Noise Sources on page 277 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 343 OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD co
212. 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 Configures initiates and queries the results of the measurement Result example 105 225059509 105 656074524 105 423065186 104 374649048 103 059822083 101 29511261 99 96534729 99 7452468872 99 6610794067 100 327224731 100 96686554 101 450386047 102 150642395 103 240142822 105 95476532 110 583129883 115 7760849 126 279388428 124 620399475 116 97366333 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 7 1 Result Display Configura tion on page 397 General Window Commands eere eet 755 e Working with Windows in the Display 755 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 6 1 11 6 2 Configuring the Result Display General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independant of the application Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 627 RI FORM mm 755 DISPlayEWINDowsn SIZE ES 755 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels See chapter 4 1 R amp S MultiView on page 89 SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously f
213. 3 9411 02 13 726 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a ES is a ee Configuring and Performing Measurements Measuring the Standard Deviation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation AVERage RESult This command queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 722 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt StandardDeviation gt Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt StandardDeviation gt Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Q
214. 351 Tracking generator See External generator sss 291 Tracking threshold Transducer factor User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Transducers Activating Deactivating ssssesessesss 519 Adjusting reference level 520 Calibration with external generator 297 309 Checking 548 Comment 521 Compatibility E 519 elle Lee EE 548 Configuration 514 Configuration remote control 937 ConflQurilig 22 opisania EEEREN 548 Copying 520 549 Creating 520 549 Data points reti eee dene 522 Deleting 520 549 Deleting values A 522 Editing Factors Inserting values ccccccceeeeeecenneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 522 Managing e 518 Name SAVING eite eto eer elei treu SEM range Settings Shiftitigi orient e tede de 522 550 ic M M ite 518 Spurious Emissions range 203 Dn teure gesteet ter erry 521 Validity EE 514 View filter 520 pc 522 Y 8XiS Uit roter ere ree 514 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator 308 External generator sss How to external generator ds a TRG channel Dar rero tier itta Trigger Configuration preview sees Riet Delt EE Drop Out NEE Drop out time Power sensor External errOrS riiintean External remote AA
215. 4 13 12 LIMit 8 FAIL LIMit 7 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL 11 10 9 8 7 5 5 4 3 2 1 o LIMit 1 FAIL S D not used External REFerence SRQ lt aa VW _ CALibrating _ STATus OPERation A T 6 Ras Mss L 5 FHESB a A 4 HMAV 3 not used 2m DIQ 1 U H L ACPLimit SRE STB SYNC F LMARGin LIMit CALibration ZUNCAL bat L A FREQuency L L r amp TIME EXTended PPE STATus QUEStionable ISTflag amp 7 Power On amp 6 User Request amp 5 Command Error amp 4 Execution Error at 3 pone Dependent amp 2 Query Error amp 1 Error Event Output amp 0 Operation Complete Queue Buffer ESE ER STAT QUES TIME 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LO UNLocked OVEN COLD not used Sweep time too low 15 not used s 8 7 fe 5 4 3 2 1 o Frontend temp error not used s INFO LERE STAT QUES EXTended Fig 10 1 Graphical overview of the R amp S FSW status registers hierarchy STB SRE not used s INPut overload IF OVerload UNDerload o 5 wjo 5 o o s o v OVERIoad 0 STAT QUES POWer d i TEMPerature STAT QUES FREQuency STAT QUES TEMPerature POWer 1 not used 5 4
216. 4 Power ClasSs6S ni rnit ires de Ce eee Pda ertet dra 179 Power Mode S ee EE 387 Power Sensor Config sss 284 Power Unit Se Preamp EE Print SCTOC EE EE R amp S Support Ge E UR lise Reference Reference range ssssssssseeeee REPLGVGl cia E Ref Level APD CCDF geg Ref Level Offset cnr erred Ref EvI Mkr Lvl ie iet dite eects Repetition interval ud Res BW EE R amp S FSW Index Res BW Auto remote sss 768 Res BW Manual n e eeeereeeeeerrrrneen 264 369 RF Atten Auto RF Atten Manual cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 357 RF POWOL aiite pto a he cen pte eu 386 Save ES SAVE PIG eebe C Scale Config ierit et Gina tern aan Search Config is Search Signals dte ertet Select Frane nier e re terres j Select Marker esses 262 448 isT e UT po M 98 Set CP Refererice iet t erret 125 Signal Track sp Single Sequencer s sese 99 Single Sweep sssssssss 245 373 427 Span Manual Spectrogram Standard files Startup Recall Startup Recall On Off sss 498 Status Mio fm SWEEP CONG E 367 Sweep count ists Sweep list ii Sweep TIME o eee are anniek cian Sweeptime Auto zn E Sweeptime Manual sse 370 TIME A i Ti
217. 508 See Output Medium on page 509 HCOPy IMMediate device This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME Suffix device Usage Manual operation 1 2 Printing device Event SCPI confirmed See Printing or Storing a Screenshot Print Screen on page 508 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME This command adds a consecutive number to the file name Suffix device Usage Manual operation 1 2 Printing device Event See Printing or Storing a Screenshot Print Screen on page 508 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 922 R amp S FSW Remote Commands au CU A mm se nn Managing Settings and Results HCOPy ITEM ALL This command includes all screen elements in the printout The screen elements include comments title time and date Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Printing or Storing a Screenshot Print Screen on page 508 HCOPy ITEM WINDow TEXT Comment This command defines a comment to be added to the printout Parameters Comment String containing the comment Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Comment on page 510 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation device Or
218. 689 e Configuring MSR SEM Measurements esent tnn nennen 693 e Configuring the List Evaluatloh iiec ee ece ecce zen nennen 695 e Performing an SEM Measuremenlt 1 niae dene te cce te kennen Dona 696 e RENN ROWS anen Seeerei 696 e Example SEM Measurement 696 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements CAL Culate LIMtESPectrunt RES TOFG ieiuno aaan a daai ii aaa 673 IGENGe IEGbechum DRE Ge GT ANdard enemies 673 SENSe ESP ctrumiPRESeERESTOre 22 2 inerte ac tia einer Rea o ERR dee 674 ISENSe ESPectrumiPRESeE S TOR EE 674 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory set values are restored Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the current Spectrum Emission Mask standard to the default setting SENSe ESPectrum PRESet S TANdard Standard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for SEM standards is C r_s instr sem_ std User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 673 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 6 2 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name If you have sto
219. 74 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 880 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X on page 882 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y on page 882 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NOISe RESult on page 883 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 884 ERREUR RE ES M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 869 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 887 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 885 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUN tion NDBDown RESult on page 888 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor on page 888 S S CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 888 N N CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COU t FREQuency on page 890 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CALCulate lt n DEL Tamarkersm EE 870 CAL Gulstespn sDEETaIa ROSSI rs edo ise eec edente cuc Venu dae reves dee dao 870 ele EE EE 871 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on th
220. 77 Shift x Limit Hr 485 Trarisd cer liTiGs eor rie eterne 522 Shift y Limit INES 2 2t riesige eerte te cote etes 485 Transducer liis 2 retirer decer tre 522 Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 308 Signal capturing Duration remote ssesseseseneee 772 Signal count Marker siaren i ai aA 440 460 Remote COMtTrOl 3 2 A irrito red eta eto 890 Ee E 460 Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 800 External Mixer B21 sasssa 331 Signal source Ee uito concret te eor dece ETE op Ep 797 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1049 R amp S FSW Index Signal tracking W Bandwidth irrito rennen rtis Configuring Steeg le GIE Threshold m Uc m Single Sequencer Ge 99 Single sweep SOfIKOV iri etr eat 245 373 427 Sifigle ZOOM i t iere eee rt ee rio te tee 400 402 Slope Edg6 gale reed eere eee Power sensor trigger dep e M Trigger Power sensor sessseeesess 289 SmartGrid AGUVALING eL 81 Arranging windows sesessn 82 Display 2 Evaluation bar n nene nennen 82 e 79 Mode ra TYING E ep aan ennui 54 Soft Front Panels WS HAG eee aaia 551 softkey Clear All Messages remote control 953 Filter
221. 8 1 Zooming into the Display 11 8 1 1 Using the Single Zoom DISPlayPWINDewernsZOONEC E 838 DISPlayEWIND ws n gt ZOOM STA RE 838 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep 1Rm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 402 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 838 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 1 2 Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 402 See Restore Original Display on page 402 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 402 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eene 839 DiSblavtWiNDow znztZ0OOM Mil TipleszzoomzGTATe e 839 DISPlay WINDow lt
222. 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E DONE DONE Done query HP 856xE available DONE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E DW DW Write to display and available increment address E1 E1 Peak Search HP 8566A available HP 8568A E2 E2 Marker to Center Freq HP 8566A available HP 8568A E3 E3 Deltamarker Step Size HP 8566A available HP 8568A E4 E4 Marker to Ref Level available available EDITDONE limit line edit done HP 856xE available EDITLIML edit limit line HP 856xE available ERR ERR 250 cal level error Now some FSx errors are HP8568A not yet availa ERR 300 LO unlock mapped to HP errors HP856xE ble ERR 472 cal error digital filter ERR 473 cal error analog filter ERR 552 cal error log amp ERR 902 unscale track ing generator ERR 906 oven cold ERR 117 numeric unit error ERR 112 Unrecognized Command ERR ERR Error queue query HP 856xE not yet availa HP 8566B8 Ple HP 8568B HP 8594E EX EX Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A available HP 8568A TE a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 969 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models FA FA numeric value HZ Start Frequency HP 8566A available KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A RAUR HP 856xE FAEN HP 8566B por HP 8568B HP 8594E FB FB numeric value HZ Stop Frequency HP 8566A available KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A PRUE HP 856
223. 9 SYSTem LXI LANReset SYSTem EXEMDBESCrIpLOnD coca hp ree cere sez teure e tegat nd ea pde ette e recientes 949 GvGTemLXIPAGGword eene tenerte nnns siat nsi iet rnss idt rns siet nnns idt rns sent ness nannten nnn 949 SX S Temi PRESSLU ET 918 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXEQCute esses enne nennen ree nereet nen nns eene etn sentes 918 SYSTem PRESet COMPatible 3 52 214 2 ALL thc hid nb MA hb aL aba hb hp read doof 953 SYSTem REVision FACTory SYSTem REVision STRing SYSTEM RSW AP ane E HR ee SGvGTem GH T down SS S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1024 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN TRACE SNS COPS oett ein a eR eae 844 TRAGesnP2 p DATA 3 nete eerte e eee teer eee toe ete oe E Cnt i e me reti t Gtine 853 TRACesn DATATMENMOry iiirieete trot reip etae ttd EE 854 TRAGesn gt DATA D V 854 TRlGoert St OuencelDGBbower HOL Doft 997 TRIGger SEQuence DT IM onto rot neutr natae innt AAEE ovtenconiensecddostsnsecssssenasiensoeasiaeys TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME TRIGger SEQuence IF Power HOLDoff TRiGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTEresis ccsccssscssesessstersscenestensssesssecnssnensseesssceaeseennsesonsasaesneseessenees 782 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower esent trennen nnne enne 783 TRIGger SE
224. 9000000 Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 2 ESP HSP OFF Switches off Fast SEM mode so the ranges can be configured individually ESP RANG2 BAND RES 1000000 Defines a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 FILT TYPE RRC Selects an RRC filter for range 2 ESP RANG2 BAND VID 5000000 Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 SWE TIME 1 Defines a sweep time of 1 second for range 2 ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Defines a reference level of 0 dBm for range 2 ESP RANG2 INP ATT 10 Defines an input attenuation of 10 dB for range 2 Create a transducer that can be used It has to cover the corresponding frequency range SENSel CORRection TRANsducer SELect Transducer SENSel CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB SENSel CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Test Transducer Frequency Span 0 MHz bis 20 Ghz SENSel CORRection TRANsducer DATA 0e6 5 20e9 3 ESP RANG2 TRAN Transducer Includes a transducer called transducer for range 2 ESP RANG LIM1 STAT AND Checks the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 1 and fails if both limits are violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant They are defined here to demonstrate the use of the MAX function for relative limits ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STAR FUNC MAX Enables the use of maximum function for relative limit start If the value
225. 9411 02 13 712 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 8 2 11 5 8 3 Configuring and Performing Measurements Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement Manual operation See CCDF on page 105 Configuring Statistical Measurements The following commands configure the measurement Useful commands for configuring statistical measurements described elsewhere SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 Remote commands exclusive to statistical measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERGent 713 CAL Culate nz GTATsttcehGAMples A 713 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent lt Probability gt This command sets a marker to a particular probability value You can query the corre sponding level with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Using the command turns delta markers into normal markers This command is available for CCDF measurements Parameters lt Probability gt Range 0 to 100 96 Example CALC1 MARK Y PERC 95PCT Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 96 Manual operation See Percent Marker CCDF only on page 214 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples Samples This command defines the number of samples included in the analysis of statistical mea surement functions Parameters Samples Range Min 100 Max depends on the RBW filter RST 100000 Example CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500
226. 99 Channel power Comparing CP ACLR seen 147 Density CP ACLR esee 125 134 SEM results Settings SEM i ect eterne rb iri eura 179 Channel Power See CP ACLER E 103 Channels Activating CP ACLR CP ACLR measurements esses 123 Duplicating WEEN Names CP ACLR m NOW Operating modes ssseeseeseieneseesenneeseeerersrnrseserernne Replacing de Sequential operation sss Spacings configuring sss Spacings CP ACLR us e SWIGHING ME MMI OUT 2 iiod eoo send eege errat eese Hte ts Weighting filters ssseesssseseeeennnee Channel settings Display qd 67 69 Presettihg sioe er tier ore pP e ERR Pe 489 Ch Power ACLR See CP AGLR ie cni eig mathe 103 CISPR Average pru e M 252 CISPR Average detector t M O 254 CISPR bandwidth eeeene 252 265 Clear status aoc 619 CLRW trace information sese 71 CMT pj NE 230 CNT marker functions s sse 72 ee M 566 Color curve Shap d cid he d deitas 415 428 Spe ctrograms eer 415 433 Color mapping Color CUVE pare 428 Color range icici an eraa aaie aa teste edant ere 428 429 Color SCHEME sei cescsssecesiccecasezcavewuscsceseeerssvneses
227. 99 to 199 lt Max3 gt must be higher than lt Max2 gt LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 689 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu I A F ree I e Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values lt RangeLimits gt As a result of the query the range limits including the beginning of the first power class 200 and the end of the last power class 200 are indicated Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 lt 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt lt 70 200 gt Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum MODE lt Mode gt Which limit line is to be used for an SEM measurement depends on the power class the input signal power belongs to This command defines wether the power class is deter mined automatically or manually Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The power class and thus the limit line is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement The selection is made with the CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class EXCLusive command RST AUTO Example CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum VALue Power This command activates the
228. ACHannel RELative STATe State This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit of the alternate channels If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Parameters lt LowerLimit gt The first value defines the limit of the lower alternate channel the lt UpperLimit gt second value the limit of the upper alternate channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF ERREUR EA ET M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 653 R amp S FSW Remote Commands
229. AL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power SENSO s eint ertt aaa a anaa EN CERES 825 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements 826 e Triggering With Power SQNSOMS i cccccciccieeccccssasadandecedesanaascondennnaacndanacdecaateadenceneans 833 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 825 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeeeeneneees 825 Sv Tem CGOMMunicate RDEVice PME Tercps DEFime enne 826 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe lt State gt This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 286 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FSW Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 286 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 825 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS SSS a ee Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SYSTe
230. ANGe lt range gt POINts IGENGeUlGTRANGe zangez RL EVel unisini inndata ripiena aiaiai adiadas i eNe ad IGENZGe IUISTbRANGe zangez GWEep TIME IGENGe IUISTRANGe rangez SGMWEep TIME AUTO SENSe LIST RANGe range TRANSsducer ssessssssessseeeeeeeen eene nene entere enens etre nnns eterne SENSe LIST RANGez range FREQuency STARt esses eren rennen rennen SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP SENSe MIXer BIAS MIGH i cess uicti reae ed ertet tranne seed det E Ee dde be oe toa Fere aie Iis rg baIiBeu e IGENZGe IMiSertREOuencv HANDover nennen nennt ree neret reset nns et rree resin rester entries IGENGe Mixer EREOuency START 801 SS B PR User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1027 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REENERT ISENSe MIXer FREQuency S TO ies etre tt erronee enitn Seege ged Ede 802 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet essent eene nnne nnne tnn 802 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue esee nne nnne nnns 802 IENGe Mixer HAbMontc HIGH STATe A 803 IEN Ge Mixer HAbRMontcHIGHTVAL ue 803 EISE Kee Tel d EE 803 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOWT 5 2 2 taria rn tmt tk tnn methane erra cun a tna rne angue 804 SENSe MIXer EOPOWOE cocoa rare ite ce decide i euge Ded ai tu erben de
231. ARKeremeP GOUNE xac randa tata aant dp a tad eo run aa atu orae ava kat eae nas 890 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt FREQuengoy esses nnne 890 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNtRESoOlution eee 891 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COUNt State This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position on and off The frequency counter works for one marker only If you perform a frequency count with another marker the R amp S FSW deactivates the frequency count of the first marker To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 1 CALC MARK COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK COUN FREQ Outputs the measured value Manual operation See Signal Count Marker State on page 460 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COUNt FREQuency This command queries the frequency at the marker position ERREUR RA ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 890 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 14 Analyzing Measurements Basics To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement wi
232. AT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared See STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt on page 957 and STATus QUES tionable POWer Register on page 581 The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see chapter 6 2 1 1 RF Input Protection on page 275 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 795 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu u Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt CouplingType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 281 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation
233. ATe 737 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement STATe lt State gt This command turns the EMI measurement marker functionality on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Manual operation See EMI on page 106 11 5 13 2 Configuring EMI Markers The commands required to configure EMI markers are described here Useful commands for configuring EMI markers described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 859 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 859 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 857 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt on page 859 CALCulate n DELTamarker m1 LINK TO MARKer m2 on page 857 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 856 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 859 Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI markers CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector eene 737 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector eee 738 CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector Detector This command selects the detector for a specific deltamarker during the final evaluation If the deltamarker is not yet active the command also turns the deltamarker on
234. Analyzing Measurements Basics Positioning the EE 864 Retrieving Marker TEE 869 e Marker Search Spectrograms diiit esent ERKENNEN SEENEN 871 e Fixed Reference Marker Settings seeeeeeeeeniee einn tntha edente ntnia 878 e Marker Peak LIIS tere t epe exu DICH GRE Ret RN Bude du sa ta Du du ta ha 880 e Noise Measurement Maike oie etienne EEN cnn e Ede HAE AREE Rd 882 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker enne 883 e Band Power MOIKer ae emer eerte nete rne eee Ene aaa 885 e qmndbg DownlMakkt seess a eR edat eid dea deca redii tuu 887 Signal Count MaIKBE ner eee A a reete eene ian ecd ec ee e etna dai 890 Marker DemodulatlOb or eerte nene Ee nena en adr denen ege d 891 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram GALGulate n DELTamarker AOFEF ic aidscin eee tonne dirae nacer RR cuna edd 856 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz Nk 856 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkerm lz UNK TOMAbkercm z 857 CAEGulate mnsDEEFamarker r MODE EE 857 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREFP ccccccccececsseeceecceceeecesseceaceeseseceeeecaeceseneeeaees 857 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STAT cccccccesecceeseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeecesaaacaaeaanenecnenenens 858 CAL Culat lt n DEL Tamarkersm gt TRACE Ate eret ceo sepia ASSEN ENEE 858 GALGulate n DELTamairkerem X lacinia esee dean REESEN EES 858 CAL Culate nz M
235. BGATOUQOLy eiecit ener cot eapite ET qa nde be Eye NEEE IEEE Reda Ma ERR u En degen IEN Ge EGbechumMSh GzhMCbhesent SENSe ESPectrum MSR LTE CPResent SENSe ESPectrum MSR RFBWidlth eee cere tere eceeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeesaeseaeeseaeeeateseaeesseeseaeeneaees 694 SENSe JESP ctrum PRESet RESTOLC6 reuse iret p tie teret rtc Le EIL ede g rae fe BE Ere se ee oce Reha denier 674 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe esses eene nnne neennne nennen DE nnne testen nnne enin 674 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdarq eese eene enne nennen nennen nennen 673 IGENZGe EGbechum RANGeCOUND ener ere ennree neret rns et ers in reiten rns eene tenentes 677 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit lt PClass gt STATe SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VID 0 ee eee eee e eee e cece eeee tease sees teaeeeeeseeeseaeenaees IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez DBANDwidrl RE Goluton IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez D I ete nennen ennt n nennen SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer fb IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINPuCATTenuaton eene SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut GAIN sess nnn renn ennt rnnn nnn IGENZGe EGbechumRAhNGe zangezNPuCOGAINGTATe nennen nnne IEN Ge EGbechumRANGe czangezINGert SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STARt eee 681 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe
236. BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the coupling ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution band width RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 001 to 1000 RST 1 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 res olution bandwidth Manual operation See RBW VBW on page 370 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path Changing the video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is lt 100 kHz Parameters Mode LiNear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level val ues if you halve the linear power the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB LOGarithmic The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier RST LINear Example BAND VID TYPE LIN Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier Configuring the Sweep Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 842 p D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 770 R amp S FSW Remote Commands nS a Settin
237. Before you can use the command you have to select and turn on a transducer Parameters Comment RST empty comment Manual operation See Comment on page 521 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DATA lt Frequency gt lt Level gt This command defines the shape of the transducer factor Parameters Frequency The unit for Frequency is Hz Frequencies have to be sorted in Level ascending order The unit for Level depends on SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Manual operation See Data points on page 522 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DELete This command deletes the currently selected transducer factor Before you can use the command you have to select a transducer Example CORR TRAN DEL Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Line on page 520 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the frequency scaling of the transducer factor Parameters lt ScalingType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LINear Manual operation See X Axis Scaling on page 522 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SELect Name This command selects a transducer factor LE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 938 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Parameters Name String containing the name of the transducer factor If the name does not exist yet the R amp S FSW creates a transducer factor by that name Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTORI
238. COPy IMMediate lt device gt ccccceccccseeeeeererereceeeeecaeaeaenseneeeseseaeaeaaeaeaeaseeeneseaesaaeaes 922 HCOPyIMMediate lt device S E WEE 922 ele e ITEMA L BEE 923 FACOPYITEMWINDOW PEAT e 923 HCObDv PAGE ObRlentation devlcez enean enne nennen ntn nr nnns 923 HCOPY TDS ENK EE 923 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 924 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT eese 924 Gv GTem CGOMMunicate Ph lNter SEL ect devlcez rtr tterorotorsrnrnnn nn nenent 924 HCOPy ABORt This command aborts a running hardcopy output Example HCOP ABOR Usage Event SCPI confirmed HCOPy CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt This command defines the color scheme for print jobs Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 919 R amp S FSW Remote Commands lt colors gt Example Usage Manual operation Managing Settings and Results 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies HCOP CMAP DEF2 Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout or a hardcopy Event See Print colors on page 542 HC
239. Culate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency sss nennen 888 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult 888 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCioncNDBown GTATe enne entren 889 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME 889 CAlLCulate cnzM Abker mz FUNGCionNOlGebRtGuht nnt 883 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe sss nnne nennen CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE sess enn rnnt nnn CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUItPHZ sss nennen 665 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion POWer GE ect 641 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog esee 644 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete essen 644 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion POWerGTANdard SAVE nennen 644 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion Rtterence eene enne nnne n nnne CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCion SGSUMMarv AOET nennen enn nnnn nennen nnn CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCion SGUlMMarv AVERage ener nennen nnne 722 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon SGUMMarv MEAN AVERaoe RE Gu 724 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon SGUMMarv MEAN PHOL d REGuI ne 724 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult CALCulate n MARKer m FU
240. D 4 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register The STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register contains information about possible temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the R amp S FSW A separate temperature register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TEMPeratur CONDition OrSTATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt F Table 10 14 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self align ment temperature During warmup this bit is always 0 For details see Temperature check on page 513 1 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register The STATus QUEStionable TIMe register contains information about possible time errors that may occur during operation of the R amp S FSW A separate time register exists for each active channel User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 582 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation m A eee Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition or STATus QUEStionable TIME EVENt Table 10 15 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStiona
241. DB Amplitude Scale Log HP 856xE available DM HP 8566B SES HP 8568B HP 8594E LL LL Plot command HP 8566A available HP 8568A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 974 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EE a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models LN LN Amplitude Scale Lin HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E M1 M1 Marker Off HP 8566A available HP 8568A M2 M2 Marker Normal HP 8566A available M2 numeric value HP 8568A HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ M2 DN M2 UP M2 M3 M3 Delta Marker HP 8566A available M3 numeric value HZ HP 8568A KHZ MHZ GHZ M3 DN M3 UP M3 M4 M4 numeric value Marker Zoom HP 8566A available HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A MA MA Marker Amplitude HP 8566A available HP 8568A MCO MCO Marker Count off HP 8566A available HP 8568A MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A available HP 8568A MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A available MF HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MINH MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 975 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _e u aM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models MKA MKA
242. DE lt Mode gt This command selects the trace display mode for power measurements Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe The power is calculated from the current trace MAXHold The power is calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm Manual operation See Power Mode on page 125 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the results of power measurements To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 639 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m ada UP Hu Configuring and Performing Measurements Query parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each subbloc
243. E 8566A 8566B 8568A 8568A DC 8568B 8568B DC 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C 71209A PSA89600 FSP FSU FSQ FSV FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK RST SCPI Example SYST LANG 8560E Sets the system language to 8560E to simulate the HP model Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Language on page 595 SYST PSA WIDeband State This command defines which option is returned when the OPT query is executed depending on the state of the wideband option It is only available for PSA89600 emulation LE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 961 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt State gt Manual operation Emulating Other Instruments Commands ON OFF HIGH OFF The option is indicated as B7J ON The 40 MHz wideband is used The option is indicated as B7J 140 HIGH The 80 MHz wideband is used The option is indicated as B7J 122 RST OFF See Language on page 595 See Wideband on page 596 SYSTem REVision FACTory Resets the response to the REV query to the default value e g after a user string was defined using the SySTem REVision STRing command REV query available for HP emulation only see SYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Example Manual operation Define the system language SYST LANG 8563E Set the response back to factory setting SYS REV FACT Query the revision REV Response 920528
244. ELete lt file_name gt MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt file_name gt MMEMory LOAD TRACe 1 lt file_name gt MMEMory MDlRectory lt dir_name gt MMEMory MOVE file name1 2 file name2 MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt file_name gt MMEMory STORe TRACe lt numeric gt lt file_name gt READ WAVform SENSe FREQuency CENTer numeric SENSe FREQuency STARt numeric SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric SENSe FREQuency SPAN numeric SENSe POWer ATTenuation numeric SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal F REQuency numeric SENSe ROSCillator OUTPut OFF ON SENSe ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal EAUTo SENSe SPECtrum TRIGger SOURce EXTernal lt 1 2 gt IF IMMediate SENSe WAVeform ADC RANGe P6 SENSe WAVeform APER SENSe WAVeform AVERage TACount numeric SENSe WAVeform BWIDth ACTive SENSe WAVeform BWIDth TYPE FLAT GAUSsian SENSe WAVeform IFGain numeric SENSe WAVeform IFPath NARRow WIDE SENSe WAVeform NCPTrace ON OFF SENSe WAVeform PDIT ON OFF SENSe WAVeform SRATe numeric LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 993 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments Commands Supported 89600 commands SENSe WAVeform SWEep TIME numeric SENSe WAVeform TRIGger EOFFset SENSe WAVeform TR
245. ET mad HP 8594E RQS RQS Service Request Bit HP 856xE available mask HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 982 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEEMCHSGNN OMM H A s Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models 1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A available HP 8568A S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A available HP 8568A SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available SAVES SAVES Save State Register HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E SAVET SAVET TRA TRB lt num Save Trace HP856xE available ber gt HP8594E SDEL delete limit line segment HP 856xE available SDON limit line segment done HP 856xE available SEDI edit limit line segment HP 856xE available SMOOTH SMOOTH TRA TRB Smooth Trace HP 856xE available TRC lt number of points gt HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E SNGLS SNGLS Single Sweep HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E SQUELCH SQUELCH Squelch HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HP 8566B DMEDB HP 8568B SQUELCH UP DN HP 8594E SQUELCH ON OFF SP SP numeric value Span HP 8566A available HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A SP DN HP 856xE SP UP HP 8566B SP HP 8568B HP 8594E SRCNORM 1 SRCNORM ON OFF Source
246. EW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory See also INSTrument SELect on page 627 e INSTrument DELete on page 625 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 Manual operation See New Channel on page 96 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example
247. External power lef EE 379 388 Holdoff Power sensor sss 289 Hysteresis 378 388 Hysteresis Power sensor sssssssss 289 LOVE 387 Level Power sensor 288 Meas remenis suisidio 377 378 Offset softkey 388 E re 343 389 ower SCNSOM iioee risen ront tontos 288 291 Slope 989 784 Slope Power sensor esses 289 Status register oci acriter ia 575 TRIGGER ODDEEOE o euegsdees 49 Trigger Gate Configuration Softkey ssssssssssss 382 Trigger event noc 622 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT Corin8ctots siine ari erre een 45 1054 R amp S FSW Index Trigger level External trigger remote sss 783 UO Power remote m IF Power remote RF Power remote Trigger source BB Power Eet Zeg eegregeh ee ee ee Free Run se IF POWT 2 nies ri E T Power Sensor osito rie ier eset 387 RF Power EN Un ge boo TRK marker functions essen 72 Troubleshooting File namero doce iit rts 916 Hardware ER leif gel WEE 795 Overload external generator sessseseeereeeseseeeeen 302 Trying out Prerequisites arisna iaiaaeaia 51 TTL handshake see TTL synchronization 00 0 0 eee eeen 304 TTL synchronization AUX control external generato
248. GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREO STAR R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 6 3 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREO STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACe1 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENS amp e PROBesp D PAR Inumbet 22 eere rera nk oce sone De eren aes niece 812 SENSe PROBESpsHdDSRBumbet 22 2 2 6 nao oc bao ce pae aa cited 812 SENSe PROBe p SETUp MODE una rt rk nr ek nnn nnn RA Run anaE n enn nd 813 E Eeer E Ne TEEN 813 SENS amp JPROBE p SETup iS TATG iere tate eiie eevee RR bleedin 814 ISENSEJPROBeSpSISETUDIT d E 814 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt
249. GevtSCALelAUTOONCE 779 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelMODE treto ssrnrnnererereennn 780 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition eee 780 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACING 0e ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee cae aaa enne enne nnne nnne 780 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing Parameters lt Range gt Range 1 dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 360 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 360 EET RU EET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 779 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m E P Setting Basic Measurement Parameters DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y M
250. Grid Minorlines CMAP27 Marker CMAP28 Display Lines CMAP29 Sweepcount Text CMAP30 Limit and Margin Check Text CMAP31 Limit and Margin Check Margin CMAP32 Table Overall Title Text CMAP33 Table Overall Title Background REESE E TUE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 946 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Suffix Description CMAP34 Table Overall Text CMAP35 Table Overall Background CMAP36 Table Value Title Text CMAP37 Table Value Title Background CMAP38 Table Value Text CMAP39 Table Value Background CMAP40 Trace 5 CMAP41 Trace 6 these settings can only be defined via the theme DISPlay THEMe SELect and are thus ignored in the SCPI command 11 10 6 Configuring the Network and Remote Control The following commands are required to configure a network or remote control for the R amp S FSW Useful commands for configuring remote control described elsewhere e syYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Remote commands exclusive to configuring a network and remote control SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRSesS etie enean tad 947 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator cesses enne 948 CHEN DISPlay le E 948 SYS Tenn IDENthyFAC Toy eerte noua edd ade era 948 SA Siete EN UR ERIS RIPE EE EODD ETE IS 948 excu M ia
251. H STAT ON Turns trace mathematics on CALC MATH EXPR DEF TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 EET RU ET UU N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 850 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENERT Analyzing Measurements Basics Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace Math Function on page 422 CALCulate lt n gt MATH MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW calculates trace mathematics Parameters lt Mode gt For more information on the way each mode works see Trace Math Mode LiNear Linear calculation LOGarithmic Logarithmic calculation POWer Linear power calculation RST LOGarithmic Example CALC MATH MODE LIN Selects linear calculation Manual operation See Trace Math Mode on page 423 CALCulate n MATH POSition Position This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical operation Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram area 100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border Range 100 to 200 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example CALC MATH POS 100 Moves the trace to the top of the diagram area Manual operation See Trace Math Position on page 423 CALCulate n MATH STATe State This command turns the trace mathematics on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MATH STAT ON Turns on trace mathematics Usage SCPI
252. Hz for range 1 LIST RANG1 INP ATT AUTO OFF Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation in range 1 off LIST RANG1 INP ATT 10 Defines a input attenuation of 10 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 FILT TYPE CFILter Selects an Channel filter for range 1 LIST RANG1 DET SAMP Selects a sample detector for range 1 LIST RANG1 POIN 601 Defines 601 sweep points for range 1 LIST RANG1 RLEV 20 Defines a reference level of 20 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 SWE TIME 5 Defines a manual sweep time of 5 second for range 1 Create a transducer that can be used It has to cover the corresponding frequency range SENSel CORRection TRANsducer SELect Test SENSel CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB SENSel CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Test Transducer Frequency Span 0 MHz to 20 Ghz SENSel CORRection TRANsducer DATA 0e6 5 20e9 3 SENS LIST RANG1 TRAN Test Includes a transducer called Test for range 1 LIST RANG1 LIM STAR 10 LIST RANG1 LIM STOP 10 Defines an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start and stop frequencies of range 1 LIST RANG LIM STAT ON Turns the limit check for all ranges on CALC PSE MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks in the diagram with blue squares CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 8 11 5 8 1 Configuring and Performing
253. IGger INTerpolation ON OFF SENSe WAVeform TRIGger SOURce EXTernal lt 1 2 gt IF IMMediate STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt number gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle number STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle number STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle number STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition number STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition number STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle integer STATus OPERation NTRansition integer STATus OPERation PTRansition integer STATus OPERation EVENIt SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt SYSTem ERRor NEXT SYST
254. IMit k UNIT on page 900 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 901 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Analyzing Measurements Basics Usage Event Manual operation See Shift y on page 485 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 484 See Y Axis on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 900 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 481 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Parameters Limit Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 900 RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 483 ERREUR RA I ET A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 902 R amp S FSW Remote Commands eS a Analyzing Measurements Basics Managing Limit Lines eler ulate T m 903 Qe
255. IN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off The preamplification is defined by SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN VALue on page 705 Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Preamp on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the preamplification level for the range The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit STARt Level This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop on page 203 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 705 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR CC M n Configuring and P
256. INDows n TYBE ucc rthe terrae ttn nmn aa anakan aana ahaaa aaia waaa 996 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency SWEep STATe esses 997 SYSTemeCOMP3lIBlG 2 oreet eer cete etre eee ee dtes hr ee deeg 997 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOL Dot 997 TRIGgerSEQuencel RFPowernHOLbBuolf 221 sancesesashiececcaesaceccaanteadenqaseseacuedabvadedseavend 997 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command links a limit line to one or more traces E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 995 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR eee Commands for Compatibility Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Limit lines no longer need to be assigned to a trace explicitely The trace to be checked can be defined directly as a suffix in the new command to activate the limit check see CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 904 Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 RST 1 Example CALC LIM2 TRAC 3 Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe State This command changes the display state of the selected measurement window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs See chapter 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 755 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF OFF The window is closed RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed
257. INGLE Mm 245 373 427 S SA trace information esee 71 Sample detector aux ce a a a a Samples Stati StC So p Save Recall Mode SOLUS Tonina m 496 Saving EWEN e 493 algerie 494 501 Instrument settings eene 498 Elta qe 485 en EE 511 SEM result files 188 Settings on sete Ene ettet SOMKOY Spurious Emissions result files 2 Transducer lines sess TNO Ke LE Scalar reflection measurement External generator sss 293 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 360 Configuration softkey sees 359 Default statistics sss 218 Statistics 2 X axis remote Control sss 762 c iaa 354 360 Y axis remote control sss 780 SCPI Parameters indi ce aee cta c needed 563 Syntax version SCPI confirmed commande 559 Screen See Touch screen sssssesssesisssersesrrsrrrrrrrssssreerrrsen 542 Screen colors see User Manual sssssesssssiensesesrrsrresrsseserrrrrrsnne 33 Screenshots Printing EE 508 511 Saving SS le Allee TEE 66 Search ag E E e WEE 85 Searching Configuration softkey eee 450 453 Search limits Activating ME 162 452 456 Deactivating sssssssessssss 162 453 457
258. IS T RANGe lt range DE lecto eie tuzci utc e eph Dd Ree teta dde cd aen RA REID den OR A 702 SENS amp 3EIST RANGesrange FIETetr TYBE rra retento iere take eere kk ceeds 702 IGENZGe IST RANGe zange tFREO uencvlSTAht nene tneoerrrre nen enorernrennnene 703 SENS amp LIST RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP heann iiaa aaa 703 IGENZGe IST RANGe rangez INPutATTenuation cece esee enne 704 IGENZGe LIST RANGe rangez INPutATTenuation AUTO 704 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STAT cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeaneees 705 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN VALue eene eene 705 SENSe EIST RANGe range LIMIt S TARE 222i cce ererceie eerte ea aane aiaia 705 E LIST RANGELUMIESTA NEE 706 SENSeTHIST RANGesrange sLIMIESTOP nca te antea but i In karta ga AEN 706 SENSe JEIST RANGe srange POINIS iiit dene ederent teta cheese eu eee 706 SENSE EIS T RANGesrangsP e REEWVGl eere ttt enun Fo i nnn Rx gehen re sa nn 706 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME sisse nnne nennen nnne rnnt 707 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO sse 707 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer ener h nnne enne 707 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution lt RBW gt This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range R amp S FSW Remote Commands 88 omi Configuring and Performing Me
259. IT WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC SGR CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement See Spectrogram Frames on page 374 See Continue Frame on page 374 See State on page 426 CALCulate SGRam FRAMe COUNt lt Frames gt This command defines the number of frames to be recorded in a single sweep Parameters lt Frames gt Example Manual operation The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Sets the number of frames to 200 See Spectrogram Frames on page 374 See Frame Count on page 374 CALCulate SGRam FRAMe SELect lt Frame gt lt Time gt This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Parameters lt Frame gt lt Time gt Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 846 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Example Manual operation Analyzing Measurements Basics INIT CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep CA
260. If on the R amp S FSW updates the diagrams traces and display fields only The best performance is obtained if the display is off during remote control operation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON Manual operation See Remote Display Update on page 593 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory This command resets the query to IDN to its default value Usage Event Manual operation See Reset to Factory String on page 593 SYSTem IDENtify STRing String This command defines the response to IDN Parameters String String containing the description of the instrument Manual operation See Identification String on page 593 LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 948 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW SYSTem LXI INFo This command queries the LXI settings Return values LXIInfo current version LXI class Computername MAC adress IP adress Auto MDIX gt String containing the current LXI parameters e version e LXIClass lt ComputerName gt lt MACAddress gt lt IPAddress gt lt AutoMDIX gt Usage Query only Manual operation See Current LXI Configuration on page 597 SYSTem LXI LANReset This command resets the LAN configuration as required by the LXI standard The com mand also resets the LXI password and instrument description Usage Event Manual operation See LAN Reset on page 598 SY
261. Ker lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe State This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 464 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the time domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values Time time 1 absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds time 2 absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds EEUU RA ET M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 889 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 13 Analyzing Measurements Basics Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 465 Signal Count Marker The following commands control the frequency counter CGALGulatesps M
262. LC SGR FRAM SEL 25 Selects frame number 25 See Spectrogram Frames on page 374 See Select frame on page 374 CALCulate SGRam HDEPth lt History gt This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R amp S FSW memory Parameters lt History gt Example Manual operation The maximum number of frames depends on the number of sweep points Range 781 to 20000 Increment 1 RST 3000 CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Sets the history depth to 1500 See History Depth on page 426 CALCulate SGRam TSTamp DATA lt Frames gt This command queries the time stamp of the frames The frame results themselves are returned with TRACe lt n gt DATA Query parameters lt Frames gt Return values lt Date gt Example Usage CURRent Returns the time stamp of the current frame ALL Returns the time stamps of all frames The results are sorted in descending order beginning with the current frame The return values consist of four values for each frame date of the measurement in seconds that have passed since 01 01 1970 milliseconds of the date for a higher resolution These numbers are appropiate for relative uses but you can also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the screen The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses If the Spectrogram is empty the command returns 0 0 0 0 CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns t
263. LLLLLLULLLIDIEM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 816 R amp S FSW Remote Commands aS a ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Source Freq ET Denominator Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 306 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel Level This command sets the output power of the selected generator Parameters Level numeric value RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 306 SOURce EXTernal STATe State This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Source State on page 305 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for example attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed N User Manual 1173
264. LPHa ALTernate ch eeeeeeeeeennenne 648 IGENSGe JPOWer ACHannel El Ter Al Pa CHANnelcchz 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel cesses nen 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL esee nennen 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch eeeeeeeee eere 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch eeeeeeennnen ne 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL Value This command defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for all channels Parameters Value numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALL 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the alternate channel weighting filter User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 648 R amp S FSW Remote Commands aS ee ee ad Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Alpha gt Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140
265. Linear scaling KAKS 2064 346 349 Line impedance stabilization network SES BRI 256 Lines Configuration Softkey ssssuss 478 479 RI Horizontal iss Limit see Limit lines esses 479 Vertical scisti m terere in er 479 Linking uc BI Configuration EMI um EMI eege deeg Highpass filter EMI eene Phase EMI ueteri eter List valuation remi Evaluations iet tenens Saving SEM Saving Spurious Emissions 205 jd O Softkey ET oi Spurious Emissions sse 204 EC EE 184 State Spurious Emissions 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 204 LO leie Level External Mixer B21 Level External Mixer B21 remote control 800 Loading zero 494 501 Instrument settings ssssssssseeees 498 Settings fils niter 183 d De Allee VIE 65 Logarithmic scaling SWEEP POIMS ierit eene tie 346 Ke HU 264 346 349 Login Netwofk 605 Operating system sssssessseemeee 25 Logo PANUNG EE 509 Loop bandwidth External reference eene einn 517 LOUNL j gc 74 1009 LOUNL status display seessses 75 1009 Lower Level Hysteresis oic M 396 L
266. M 5 Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public Sub Esrread Try Programming Examples Dim myESR As Short mbSession Query ESR Read ESR If myESR And 1 gt Then Console WriteLine Operation complete If myESR And 2 Then Console WriteLine Request Control 0 0 0 Then Console WriteLine Query Error If myESR And 8 0 If myESR And 16 gt 0 Then gt If myESR And 4 gt gt Then Console WriteLine Device dependent error Console WriteLine Execution Error Program aborted Output error message Stop Stop software End If If myESR And 32 gt 0 Then Console WriteLine Command Error Program aborted Output error message Stop Stop software End If If myESR And 64 gt 0 Then Console WriteLine User request If myESR And 128 0 Then Console WriteLine Power on Catch exp As Exception End End Sub Console WriteLine exp Message Try R amp S FSW Maintenance 12 Maintenance The R amp S FSW does not require regular maintenance Maintenance is essentially restric ted to cleaning the R amp S FSW It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument for example clean ing agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as sol
267. MEMory DATA lt FileName gt lt Block gt This command writes block data into a file The delimiter must be set to EO to obtain error free data transfer When you query the contents of a file you can save them in a file on the remote control computer The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the instrument or for transferring them to the instrument Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file lt Block gt Data block with the following structure Hash sign lt number gt Length of the length information lt number gt Length information of the binary data number of bytes lt data gt Binary data with the indicated lt number gt of bytes Example MMEM NAME Public User Testfile txt Creates a new file called testfile txt MMEM DATA Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter means 2 hash sign and length of the length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes Contents of the file store 20 binary bytes characters to the file Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name of the file to delete The path may be relative or absolute Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MDIRectory Directory This command creates a new directory E N User Ma
268. MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a shortor long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 565 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 5 4 Remote Control Basics Example HCOP ITEM LABel Test1 Or HCOP ITEM LABel Testl Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure Example FORMat READings
269. MMECION d M 40 lo C 84 Search for topic 85 IBI E M 85 Hiding Screen elements see User Manual o oeeeieieeeeeee 83 Hiding restoring Display IC 537 Highpass filter LISN control EMI etie iet ce 266 High pass filter FROM OG iss Seeds 796 Diaries D 280 ud e Protocol ge Resource EE 555 History Spectrograms aec ei id ded reet 426 History Depth Ee 426 Hold Trace setting EE 419 Horizontal Line 1 2 Eo CV A 479 HIP emulation neret rre rene 963 Hysteresis Lower Auto level sess 396 Io 388 Trigger Power sensor ssssssssssss 289 Upper Auto level esse 395 l VO Beeren er 593 UO Analyzer APPIICAMOM pe 92 TEILEN qe EE 56 UO data doe Mem 502 UO Power Trigger level remote sese 784 IBW method CP ACLR measurements sese 110 Identification EMOTE icc M 620 Identification string CSPIB dosecusues 593 scrape 593 alle E crm 587 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index IEC IEEE bus See GPIB sissies irt nente P tene terrre 554 IECWIN a ACCOSSIAG M 26 IF VIDEO DEMOD CONNECCION siiis diirai erecti 49 278 jose 342 IF freq
270. MS Requests the rms phase HP 856xE available noise PH RMSFT Updates internal fre HP 856xE available quency variables PH RMSX Calculates the rms phase HP 856xE available noise PH SPOTF Executes the spot fre HP 856xE available quency measurement PLOTORG 2 PLOTORG DSP GRT Plot command HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E PLOTSRC 2 PLOTSRC ANNT GRT Plot command HP 856xE available TRB TRAJALLDSP GRT HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 980 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models PP PP Preselector Peaking HP 8566A available HP 8568A PRINT PRINT Hardcopy HP 856xE available PRINT 1 0 HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E PSDAC 2 PSDAC Preselector DAC value HP 856xE available numeric value HP 8566B PSDAC UP DN HP 8568B HP 8594E PSTATE 2 PSTATE ON OFF 1 0 Protect State HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E PU PU Pen Up HP 8566A available HP 8568A PWRBW PWRBW Power Bandwidth HP 8566B available HP 859x HP 856xE R1 R1 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A available HP 8568A R2 R2 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A available HP 8568A R3 R3 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A available HP 8568A R4 R4 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A available HP 8568A RB RB numeric value HZ Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE availa
271. Manual 1173 9411 02 13 633 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mun Q X T Ue Configuring and Performing Measurements Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abor tion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in max hold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions Example for Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sweeps and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 373 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchroniz
272. Measurements INIT SPUR WAI Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC LIMI1 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 1 TRAC SPUR Queries the peak list of the spurious emission measurement Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF All remote control commands specific to statistical measurements are described here e Activating Statistical Measurements esses iseenene tennis 712 e Configuring Statistical Measurements ecce een e ERAN nnne 713 e Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements sss 713 e Scaling the Hreageo est e endete terrre n ne ne eb Peru NAEK 715 e Performing a Statistical Measurement 2 ient cernentes 718 UE DEI eA 718 e Programming Example Measuring Gtatisttce 719 Activating Statistical Measurements The following commands activate statistical measurements CALGulatesn STATistics APD STAT tocco neon ten Stn neto nea hee RE RR ee 712 CAL Culate nz GTATiettce CCDETSTATel eene nnne n nnns 712 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics APD STATe State This command turns the APD measurement on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT APD ON Switches on the APD measurement Manual operation See APD on page 104 CALCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe State This command turns the CCDF on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF User Manual 1173
273. N gt Describes the individual file lt NameFileN gt Name of the file lt SuffixFileN gt Type of the file Possible suffixes are ASCii BlNary DIRectory STAT lt SizeFileN gt Size of the file in bytes Usage Query only MMEMory CDlRectory Directory This command changes the current directory Parameters Directory String containing the path to another directory The path may be relative or absolute Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the stored settings Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEMory COMMent ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 MMEMory MMEMory STORel STATe 1 ACP T As a result in the selection list for recall settings the comment ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 is added to the ACP entry Manual operation See Comment on page 496 MMEMory COPY lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt This command copies one or more files to another directory Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file lt DestinationFile gt String containing the path and name of the target file The path may be relative or absolute Usage SCPI confirmed IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 908 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mL YjCQ T Managing Settings and Results M
274. NCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe sse CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz EUNGCion SGUMMarv PHOL d CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCion SGUMMarv PPE ak AVERaoe RE Gut 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak PHOLQG RESUItE sess 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESUIt essen 725 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS AVERage RESUlIt sss 726 CAL Culate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon SGUMMarv RMS PHOLOREGu nt 726 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESUIt essen 726 CAL Culate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon SGUMManvRMSTGTATel 723 SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1017 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN CAlCulate cnzMAbker mzFEUNGCion GUMManv GDEViaton AVERaoe RE Gut 727 CAL Culate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon SGUMMarv GDEViaton PDHOLdREGu eneee 727 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESUIt esses 727 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe sse 723 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe eene 722 CAlLCulate cnzMAbRker mz EFUNGCHonTOIRESun tenente nnne 733 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCnon TOItSGTATel nennen nnne 733 CALCulate n2 MARKer m MAXimum AUTO sse eee nenne nnne eterne hn rn
275. NOISE ON OFF Noise Measurement HP 856xE available MKNOISE 1 0 HP 8566B MKNOISE HP 8568B HP 8594E MKOFF MKOFF Marker off HP 856xE available MKOFF ALL HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKP MKP numeric value Marker position HP 856xE available MKP HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKPK MKPK Marker Search HP 856xE available MKPK HI HP 8566B MKPK NH HP 8568B MKPK NR HP 8594E MKPK NL MKPT MKPT Marker Peak Threshold HP 856xE available MKPT HI HP 8566B MKPT NH HP 8568B MKPT NR HP 8594E MKPT NL p VV R Qr 9 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 977 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models MKPX MKPX numeric value Peak Excursion HP 856xE available pa HP 8566B MKPX DN HP 8568B MKPX ME HP 8594E MKPX MKRL MKRL Ref Level Marker Level HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize Marker HP 856xE available Freq HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKT MKT lt numeric_value gt MKF fstart MKT HP 856xE available SIMS US SC SE Span HP 8594E MKT MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA TRB Marker to Trace HP 856xE available TRC HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MKTRACK MKTRACK ON OFF Signa
276. NPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RF Power First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency TIME Time interval viDeo Video mode is available in the time domain and only in the Spec trum application PSEN External power sensor RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Source on page 384 See Free Run on page 385 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 385 See Video on page 385 See IF Power on page 386 See Baseband Power on page 386 See RF Power on page 386 See Power Sensor on page 387 See Time on page 387 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 786 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 4 2 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Repetition Interval on page 387 Configuring Gated Measurements SENSe SWEep EGATB 2 nci rre e In e ete Re ends EX RR a deena ae n RR E nee YE npe uana 787 EE EGATSH
277. No error is returned For details on error queues see chapter 10 1 7 Status Reporting System on page 570 Usage Query only SYSTem FORMat IDENt lt IDNFormat gt This command selects the response format to the IDN query Parameters lt IDNFormat gt LEGacy Format is compatible to R amp S FSP FSU FSQ FSG family NEW FSL R amp S FSW format Format is also compatible to the R amp S FSL and R amp S FSV family RST NEW Example SYST FORM IDEN LEG Adapts the return value of IDN to the R amp S FSP FSU FSQ family Manual operation See IDN Format on page 593 SYSTem PRESet COMPatible lt OpMode gt This command defines the operating mode that is activated when you switch on the R amp S FSW or press the PRESET key Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 953 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 10 8 Configuring the R amp S FSW For details on operating modes see chapter 4 Applications and Operating Modes on page 88 Parameters lt OpMode gt MSRA Defines MSRA as the default operating mode as the presetting SANalyzer Default Defines Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode as the presetting RST SAN Usage Event Using Service Functions DIAGHOStIC SE GE DEE 954 Dl ACGnostc GERVice GtUNchion LAGfresut 954 Dl ACGnostc GERVice GtUNcion RE Gute DEL ete annann nannaa nannaa 955 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNCction RESUS SAVE 955 DIAGnoslic GERVICe SINFO n iiec c
278. Noise Measurement State on page 462 See Switching All Noise Measurements Off on page 462 11 8 3 10 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function Useful commands for phase noise markers described elsewhere e CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 883 R amp S FSW Remote Commands eed ee C J J mmw Analyzing Measurements Basics Remote commands exclusive to phase noise markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO c ccccesseeseeseeceeeseeeseeseeeaeens 884 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESUIt eee 884 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe eese 884 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement Manual operation See Defining a Reference Point on page 463 CALCulate lt n gt
279. Note Users with administrator rights retain their access rights via Remote Desktop even when they have been removed from the Remote Desktop Users Group 7 Select OK to close the dialog box 10 5 5 3 How to Configure the Controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows7 Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection For other versions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 611 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 1 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control In the Start menu of the controller select All Programs gt Accessories gt Remote Desktop Connection The Remote Desktop Connection dialog box is displayed Select the Options gt gt button The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data E Remote Desktop Connection o m Remote Desktop 7 Connection General Display Local Resources Programs Experience Advanced Logon settings F A Enter the name of the remote computer Computer 123456 hd Username instrument You will be asked for credentials when you connect Allow me to save credentials Connection settings 1 Save the current connection settings to an RDP file or open a saved connection Save Save As Open 5 Qin arces
280. ODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 360 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time display Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Position on page 309 See Ref Level Position on page 360 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 780 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 4 11 7 4 1 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Scaling on page 360 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements The commands required to configure a triggered or gated measurement in a remote environment are described here The tasks fo
281. OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 129 Selecting the Reference Channel The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE ccce 650 IGENSGe JPOWer ACHannel HE FerenceTsCHannel AUTO 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUual eee 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the channel power as the reference for relative ACLR measurements Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE Usage Event Manual operation See Setting a Fixed Reference for Channel Power Measurements Set CP Reference on page 125 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO RefChannel This command selects the reference channel for relative measurements You need at least one channel for the command to work Parameters lt RefChannel gt MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX Selects the channel with the peak power as reference channel Manual operation See Reference Channel on page 123 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual lt ChannelNumber gt This command defines a reference channel for relative ACLR measurements LEE User Man
282. OLDOff EE 787 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGEh cette teet tette teet te teta 788 IGENGe lut enEGATebOL aty eee eeeaeaee ae retinens tnn rt rni r nennen 788 SENSe SWEGp EGATESOURGO EE 788 SENS amp SWEepIEGATe amp TEE eebe ENEE AEN ENEE 789 SENSe SWEep EGATe lt State gt This command turns gated measurements on and off In case of measurements with an external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain completely unaffected The measurement ends when a particular number of measurement points has been recorded see SENSe SWEep POINts on page 772 Performing gated measurements turns the squelch off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 us SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 us INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay The trigger delay has no effect on e measurements using the Level gate mode p H
283. OP 15 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt lt Limit gt This command defines a relative limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define a relative limit regardless of the limit check mode Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the SEM range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Relative limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 50 Default unit dBc Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt 10 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt ABS Limit This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 170 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the SEM range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined LSS E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 682 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Level gt Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range to be used in additi
284. OPy CMAP lt item gt HSL lt Color gt This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix lt item gt Parameters lt Color gt Example Manual operation Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 hue tint sat saturation lum brightness The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters HCOP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color See Defining User specific Colors on page 543 HCOPy CMAP lt item gt PDEFined lt Color gt This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 920 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt Color gt Example Manual operation Managing Settings and Results BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta HCOP CMAP2 PDEF GRE See Modifying User Defined Colors on page 542 See Predefined Colors on page 543 HCOPy DESTination device Destination This command selects the destination of a print job Suffix device Parameters Destination Usage Manual operation 1 2 P
285. Output Trace Annota HP 8566A available tions HP 8568A PA PA lt numeric_value gt Plot command HP 8566A available lt numeric_value HP 8568A PD PD lt numeric_value gt Plot command HP 8566A available lt numeric_value HP 8568A PH_MKF Spot frequency in Hz HP 856xE available PH_FMIN Min offset frequency to be HP 856xE available measured User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 979 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models PH_FMAX Max offset frequency to HP 856xE available be measured PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the HP 856xE available spot frequency PH_DRIFT 0 for stable signals 1 for HP 856xE available drifty PH RLVL Reference level for the HP 856xE available log plot PH SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available PH VBR Filtering HP 856xE available PH RMSPT Amount of data points to HP 856xE available skip when doing the inte gration PH RMSFL Lower integration fre HP 856xE available quency in Hz PH RMSFU Upper integration fre HP 856xE available quency in Hz PH EXIT Quits phase noise HP 856xE available PH F UDT Updates internal fre HP 856xE available quency variables PH LMT L Apply limits to PH FMIN HP 856xE available and PH FMAX PH MEAS Generates log frequency HP 856xE available plot PH MKF D Updates the spot fre HP 856xE available quency PH R
286. P FSQ FSV Example SYST COMP FSP TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 782 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff Time This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this com mand is available for any trigger source not just RF Power SSE SSS SSF User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 997 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 14 11 14 1 11 14 1 1 Programming Examples Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 782 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Time gt Default unit S Programming Examples Some advanced programming examples for complex measurement tasks are provided here e SERVICE e EE 998 Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the relevant bits of t
287. PD J User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 814 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Ne ees Setting Basic Measurement Parameters e Measurement Confouraton essen nnne nennen 815 e nterface Configulalion irit Datei dee e tM ELDER Edda 818 e Source CallbKation ee HERE HERTN RHENO Eed 820 e Programming Example for External Generator Control 823 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator SOURce EXTernalFREQuengGy ciere ccv scies teret setate nane de cenae dede va a REESEN 815 SGOUbBceEvTemaltREOuencv COUPimngtSTATel eren 815 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENom inNnator a sssssseieeenenaeseesesesnsanesesesenannnes 816 SGOUbBceEvTemalFREOuencvl FACTortNUMerator 816 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet ceci cens cen en edid eese mea sean iden Rea den Orci annui 816 SOURCE EXT emal e ER ET 817 SOBRce EXTermal STATE iiiter ettet eee ebd te td eine 817 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet esee 817 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency Frequency This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters Frequency Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual
288. PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 i ae User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 873 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m O E M H u m Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all
289. PECTRUM2 MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command saves the current instrument configuration in a dfl file Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file The file extension is dfl Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save Saves the current device settings in the file Save df1 Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save File on page 496 See Save on page 522 MMEMory STORe STATe NEXT This command saves the current instrument configuration in a dfl file ES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 917 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PRENNE OMNCM w P J Managing Settings and Results The file name depends on the one you have set with MMEMory STORe STATe This command adds a consecutive number to the file name Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save Saves the current device settings in the file Save d 1 MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current device settings in the file Save 001 df1 MMEM STOR STAT NEXT i Saves the current device settings in the file Save 002 df1 Usage Event Manual operation See Save File on page 496 MMEMory STORe TYPe Mode This command defines whether the data from the entire instrument or only from the cur rent channel is stored with the subsequent MMEM STOR
290. PNULN3GPP UL xml Loads the 3GPP configuration stored in the file 3GPP UL xml ESP RRAN Queries the current reference range ESP RTYP CPOW Selects the channel power as the power reference ESP BWID 4 MHZ Defines a channel bandwidth of 4 MHz for the power reference ESP FILT RRC ON ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Uses an RRC filter with a roll off factor of 0 5 when measuring the reference power Zeene Configuring Power Classes CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 3 Defines 3 power classes CALC LIM ESP LIM 100 0 Defines the value ranges of the three power classes as dBm power class 1 200 to 100 power class 2 100 to 0 power class 3 0 to 200 CALC LIM ESP PCL1 LIM ABS Defines an absolute limit check for class 1 CALC LIM ESP PCL2 LIM REL Defines a relative limit check for class 2 CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN Defines a manual selection of the power class CALC LIM ESP PCL2 ON Activates the use of the second power class for the entire measurement n Configuring a Sweep List ESP RANG2 INS AFT Inserts a range after range 2 ESP RANG1 INS BEF Inserts a range before range 1 ESP RANG COUNt Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list currently 11 ESP RANG5 DEL Deletes the 11th range ESP RANG1 STOP 10000000 Defines a stop frequency of 9 MHz for range 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP RANG2 STAR
291. Quence LEVel IQPOWer ett oer nin nieto etri enata aiai daidai inenika 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower esee enne n erret innen ener enne 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel V D6oO ott prt tse tn nensi th tn rn ran nene ea ye sacs 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port eese nrenneren nennen 783 TRIGger SEQuence RF Power HOL Doft 997 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe TRIGger SEQuence SOURCe 5 nnne ettet etr nni ne soccactnyseudnsrteckndscsuesteduntvedtadeses TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval sees t ertet 786 UNITS PME ee E EE 832 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATIO roesai eeii aaaeaii aiia eaaa EaR Ea N aaa adenan 833 SENSe JADJUSCEALL EE 792 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation eseesesssseeeeeeeneneeeeennee nennen nnne nne rennes 792 IEN Ge IAD lust CONEioure DUPRatton MODE eene nnne 793 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresiel Oe 793 IGENGe IWAD JustCCOhNFioureHvGTeresis Uber SENSe JADJustCONFigure TRIG ucn eee cott ret credit edd re eau NEES Eegen SENSe ADJust FREQuency sssssseseeseeneneeeeneee nennen nnrenne trennen reet etre tr etre tnit erret eren nnne SENSe JADJUSELEV eli D eae Wire athe Sad anette A ee M SENSe JAVERage COUNti EE SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE naassen ienie tte t dor tecta ee RETE Vp dete vide DRM Y asd SENSe AVERage n STATe t essssssssessseeeeeeneenee enne
292. R SEM measurements For details see chap ter 5 5 4 4 Multi Standard Radio MSR SEM Measurements on page 172 For manual operation see chapter 5 5 5 4 MSR Settings on page 180 SENS amp ESPectrumiMSR APPLY cd cierran cuc cnt ENEE ENEE SEENEN AE EN 693 SENSeJESPectiumiMSR BCA Tee A 2 552 cr ERENNERT ean dna d 693 SENSe ESPectrum MSR GSM CPReSentt NENNEN EEN 694 SENSe ESPeetrumMSR LTE CPReSGHI eue ceterae ennt than near tu 694 SENSe ESPectrumiMSR RFBWidlth 11e rte dt a a aaia 694 SENSe ESPectrum MSR APPLy This command configures the SEM sweep list according to the MSR settings defined by previous commands Usage Event Manual operation See Apply to SEM on page 182 SENSe ESPectrum MSR BCATegory Category This command defines the band category for MSR measurements i e the combination of available carriers to measure User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 693 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS ss ee ee ee ed Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Category gt 11213 1 2 carriers LTE FDD and W CDMA 2 3 carriers LTE FDD W CDMA and GSM EDGE 3 2 carriers LTE TDD and TD SCDMA RST 1 Manual operation See Band Category on page 181 SENSe ESPectrum MSR GSM CPResent State This command defines whether a GSM Edge carrier is located at the edge of the specified RF bandwidth In this case the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges
293. R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation gt How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control In the web browser open the http instrument hostname orhttp instrument ip address page e g http 10 113 10 203 The default password to change LAN configurations is LxiWeblfc The Instrument Home Page welcome page opens TA Brvrenvert Here Pe Lienen Manager Mrs ln sten MAC Address Current Time Curent Time source VISA resource string D EI EI Device Indicator INACTIVE ipress to tog pie Status 2010 RONDEASCHNARI A aget raren A The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI standard including the VISA resource string in read only format Press the Device Indicator button on the Instrument Home Page to activate or deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R amp S FSW A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red symbol indicates an error for example that no LAN cable is connected When a device is connecting to the instrument the LXI logo blinks The Device Indicator setting is not password protected The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface are the following e LAN Configuration opens the menu with configuration pages e Status displays information about the LXI status of the instrument e Help Glossary opens a document with a glossary of
294. R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 Network and Remote Operation In addition to working with the R amp S FSW interactively located directly at the instrument itis also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC Various methods for remote control are supported e Connecting the instrument to a LAN network e Using the LXI browser interface in a LAN network e Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network e Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 598 10 1 Remote Control Basics esee enne nennen nennen nnne n nenne nnn 554 10 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols enn 554 10 1 2 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments sssss 558 10 1 3 VISA Libraries neo eret ea laden EROR TAB ee 558 10 14 Messages HE 559 10 1 5 SCPLCommand STUGUN aeinn i E EEEE EAER 560 10 1 6 Command Sequence and Gvnchrontzaton enne 568 10 1 7 Status Reporting Systetm onec cd caaseseeevieecacaeeneedierccasededeseeincataeneesteance 570 10 1 8 General Programming Recommendations sss enn 586 10 2 GPIB EDD EDIT e 587 10 3 The IECWIN TOOl iter e uta creo coe E aeter ee o ut ineo eu 589 10 4 Network and Remote Control Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennenn 590 10 4
295. R amp S FSW Manual operation See Reference Frequency Input on page 516 See Behavior in case of missing external reference on page 516 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EAUTo This command queries the current reference type in case you have activated an auto matic switch to the internal reference if the external reference is missing Parameters Reference INT internal reference EXT external reference Example SENS ROSC SOUR EAUT Queries the currently available reference type Usage Query only Manual operation See Reference Frequency Input on page 516 See Behavior in case of missing external reference on page 516 SENSe ROSCillator SYNC State If enabled a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT connector Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ROSC SYNC ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 517 Calibration and Temperature Checks The following commands control calibration and temperature checks on the R amp S FSW CALibraton ALL E 934 CALD AION RE SNE Hc c 934 DIAGn ste SERViceINPUEMC DISTANCE aarian iinnat annan idinaan aiiai iana 934 DlACGnostc GERVice Nur GedCEhReouencny 935 DIAGnostic SER Vice INPuCRF SPECITUL siehe Eege SEN elt 935 DIAGnostic SERVIce INPubEAIQETYPE cerco derunt EENS 935 DIAGnestig SERVics INPUT SELE TE 936 DIAGHOSTIE GERVICE STESERESUIE need cerra aiaa Ei ariaa a aaia nea
296. R dna a E iania 690 GALCulate LIMitESPectrum POLass COUDNL iia iiie caseeaceee ee anta anne ar Rr dann a Ra Rad SNE 691 CAL CulatellMitEGbechum bClLass casszlEsCLushvel nene 691 CAL CulatellMitEGbechum bClLass casszLIMITSTATel nee eeoeose rere rerornnr nnne 691 CAL CulateLlMtEGbechum PCLass Jassz MANimum 692 CAL CulateLlMtEGbechum PCLass Jassz MihNimmum 692 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum LIMits lt Max1 gt lt Max2 gt lt Max3 gt This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step You can only define values for the number of power classes defined by CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass COUNt on page 691 Setting parameters lt Max1 gt Defines the value range for power class 1 as 200 to Maxi Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 2 If only 2 power classes are defined the value range for power class 2 is defined as Maxi to 200 Range 199 to 199 lt Max2 gt Defines the value range for power class 2 as lt Max1 gt to lt Max2 gt Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT gt 3 If only 3 power classes are defined the value range for power class 3 is defined as lt Max2 gt to 200 Range 199 to 199 lt Max2 gt must be higher than lt Max1 gt lt Max3 gt Defines the value range for power class 3 as lt Max2 gt to lt Max3 gt The value range for power class 4 is defined as lt Max3 gt to 200 Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 4 Range 1
297. RRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 10 1 7 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except RST and SYSTem PRESet influence the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 10 16 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL SDC RST or STA CLS voltage Device SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Clear m Set Clear Selected et Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear STB ESR yes z E yes Clear SRE ESE yes e Clear PPE yes z User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 585 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation EH Remote Control Basics Event Switching on supply DCL SDC RST or STA CLS voltage Device SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Clear n Set Clear S
298. Remote dialog box GPIB Address Identification String Remote Display Update GPIB Terminator EOT I O Logging Off cerle oiai 593 identification SUG ELE 593 Resol fo Factory SNO TL 593 Remote Display Update Dr nei eret rt ove ala ta nde AATE un 593 ciii MM 593 UDN e ms 593 ere MM 593 m User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 592 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation REESEN Network and Remote Control Settings GPIB Address Defines the GPIB address Values from 0 to 30 are allowed The default address is 20 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 947 Identification String Defines the identification string for the device which is provided as a response to the IDN query Maximum 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing on page 948 Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string Each instrument has a unique ID according to the following syntax Rohde amp Schwarz FSW Unique number Remote command SYSTem IDENtify FACTory on page 948 Remote Display Update Defines whether the instrument display is updated or switched off when changing from manual operation
299. SENS amp PMETer p TRIGgerESTATe eiut eet erre te re antt enhn eni 835 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index E a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 833 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a eS Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range 0s to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 0s Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 See Trigger Holdoff on page 289 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters
300. SENSe GORRSection CVE SNUMBSL unc c vete due Dd e eae A 809 I SENSe CORRsection METHOd tenti treten onconestdebceneanensbeadsanapadowiehcesneneetiinenesoaneits 822 SENSE CORR6ction e UE 822 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel S TATe esee 937 IGENGe CO bechon TRANSducer COMMent 938 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DATA sess neret eene eenr et res enn se trn enne enneis 938 SENSe CORRection TRAhNsducer DEL ete nennen nenen nennen nennen neret 938 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator sssssssssssssssseeeeeee eene nnne nennen rnnt nnn n rentre nnn 823 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing essent nennen nennen nersntn enne 938 SENSe CORRection RANsducer SEL ect 938 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT IEN Ge CORbechon TRANsducertGSTATel seen nnnn net nn rens enn nini sinerent nen 939 ISENS ee E RE SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel oreet rater ti hen tnr rennen trahere nnne daas SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe iriure ttn tret Rene a NE aE LAN Pateat Ce ine ene eh nia uer ef SENSe ESPectr m BWID reir tp Wee E ep e Aleta casio Hp eek eese and SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe IGENGe EGbechrum HiobGbeed natt E nAtEEAANEEANEEEAAEEEAAEE ESSEE E nSt EEn nenna neen SENSe ESP ctr m MSR APPILy ionis tt oontra aaa Feeds ed ENEE T EEEa SENAERA SENSe ESPectr m MSR
301. SPlays WINDaw SGRam COLor STYLE E 849 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 429 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 848 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS Se IN I OR NN NN Analyzing Measurements Basics DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor LOWer Percentage This command defines the starting point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 Example DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 10 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 428 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor SHAPe Shape This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters Shape Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Shape on page 428 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 Example DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 95 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 428 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt This command selects the color scheme LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 849 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 2 3 Analyzing M
302. STem LXI MDEScription lt Description gt This command defines the LXI instrument description Parameters Description String containing the instrument description Manual operation See LXI Manufacturer Description on page 598 SYSTem LXI PASSword Password This command defines the LXI password Parameters Password String containing the password Return values Password The query returns the current password Manual operation See LXI Password on page 598 ERREUR EA N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 949 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW 11 10 7 Checking the System Configuration The following commands are required to check the system configuration on the R amp S FSW Useful commands for obtaining system information described elsewhere DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo on page 955 Remote commands exclusive to obtaining system information DIAGhOStIC INFOC COUMO EE 950 DAGOS SERVICE BIOSIN EE 951 DIAGhoslic oERVICE HWINfGO EE 951 DIAGNOSE SERVICE Ee E 951 SY HEET NI EE 952 SYSTemERROCEXTendesi EEN 952 SYSTEM Te LIST 953 RR ERT KE 953 SYS em PORMBtiIDENG MC 953 SYSTem PRESetCOMPatible 2 Seed Seed EENEG 953 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunter Relay This command queries how many switching cycles the individual relays have performed since they were installed Query parameters Relay ACDC
303. See Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit on page 125 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW displays the power of adjacent channels You need at least one adjacent channel for the command to work Parameters Mode ABSolute Shows the absolute power of all channels RELative Shows the power of adjacent and alternate channels in relation to the transmission channel RST RELative Manual operation See Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode on page 124 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 665 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 10 Configuring and Performing Measurements Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements The following programming examples are meant to demonstrate the most important commands to perform channel power measurements in a remote environment e Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement 666 e Example Configuring and Performing an MSR ACLR Measurement 668 Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement In this example we will configure and perform an adjacent channel power measurement Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task For most common measure ment standards the R amp S FSW performs the measurement optimally with the predefined settings without further configurati
304. See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Level on page 387 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Level on page 387 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo Level This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters Level Range O PCT to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Level on page 387 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it e P PQ M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 784 R amp S FSW Remote Command
305. Selecting ute Eire erri Eee re ate 399 TYING OUT e M 54 Evaluation bar IB E 82 Evaluation list Details Spurious Emissions ssss 205 Peaks Spurious Emissions ussssse 205 Spurious Emissions sse 197 Evaluation methods hocce p 756 ud qe EE 573 Event status enable register IE 619 Event status enable register ESE 575 Event status register c M 619 Event status register Eh 575 Example Calibration with an external generator 312 Remote control of an external generator 823 Exclude LO erani ge ert eden reed 451 455 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1036 R amp S FSW Index Exclude LO remote contra 861 EX IQ BOX lu E 49 Export format SEMLresults corri pe teen rege Spurious Emissions results E He MD Savi edie ask Ais Exporting NEI EE 501 FUNCIONS e tiie arent Hemp R Measurement settings Peak list nidis SEMIiresult files 5 nter tte Softkey us Spurious Emissions result files 206 Trace data iere ere ee erret 502 Traces EXREF status display see 75 1009 Ext Gen channel bar sss 70 External generator Activating Deactivating sess 305 EE Calibration
306. Special numeric values Boolean parameters Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are speci fied in the command description LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 563 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation m H es Remote Control Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENS FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENS FREQ STOP 1 559 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo e M milli e U micro e N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent Accordin
307. T Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 418 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 841 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C M n Mn s Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters State ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 419 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 421 SENSe AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of swe
308. T 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 330 SENSe MIXer SIGNal lt State gt This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal D Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 331 See Auto ID on page 331 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 800 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 800 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 331 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer settings SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDONVer crate toe terea do rente taa Ron ENEE 801 SENS amp IMIXer FREGUency S DARE iiie
309. T FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 306 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator lt Value gt This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq pp EE Offset Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 306 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer ERREUR RA E ET e e A AA LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
310. T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1028 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN IGENZGe POMWer ACHannel Pl TerGTATeGAb oapz n een rennen nnrrnn reset 660 IGENGe POWerACHannel ti TerGiATeGbBlock sbz CHANnelcchz 660 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel essere nennen 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL esses nenne nennen nennen 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate che sss rennen 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE eene ener itn at nnne nn ia dne ena ka dana aada diada Gea ER a da ENKEN IGEN Ge POWer ACHannelNAME ACHannel eene ennt nnt nnt net nrnnr nennen enn SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME AL Ternate ch esses nennen neret rennen neret nennen SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch esses enne nene nren neret nere rennen SENSe POWer ACEHantielP RESOL niii inrer n o ee ecu e ea Feud EP en sv ERE SERE REED SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESetRLEVel sess neret nennt senes SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE sse nennen nnne nnns nnne nennen nnn SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO IGENGe POWerACHannelRtterence TSCHannel MAkNual 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount sess neren eren nreen nne et niter sene nre enne 661 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt BANDwidth BWIDth
311. TE Application rete eet rie ene 92 LVL External generator ssssssssseee 301 EVL channel bat iet eere rear eese 70 LXI Browser interface Configuratio EE LAN configuration Ss Manufacturer Description sssssssssss 598 PASSWOMG M M 598 Ping i Remote control terret Reset EC marenn aaraa ariaa see user Manual E Ern m inh asennad Atel M Maintenance sssrin eer Y dee 1007 Manual peak search eene 257 Margins Euge Peaks SEM orate deeg gege Peaks Spurious Emissions o KLEIN Marker nier 71 Search area softkey sss 455 Search type softkey sss 455 Marker demodulation esee 267 Marker functions DG AGU V GTN NEP 470 Measurement example see 473 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Marker peak list See Peak ISB E 469 Markers ET AM Modulation Depth measurement 244 Analyzing in detail esses 471 Assigned trace Band UE Band power remote control ssuus 885 Basic settings i es Configuration remote control 856 Configuration softkey ssssssss 445 448 Deactivating Delta riarkers ttes 260 447 461 Demodulation ssis risina 444 467 472 Demodulation remote control Fix
312. The command returns two results The first is the result for the lower the second for the upper adjacent or alternate channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed Example INIT IMM WAT CALC LIM ACP ACH RES PASSED PASSED Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative STATe State This command turns the relative limit check for the alternate channels on and off User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 654 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 6 Configuring and Performing Measurements You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe State This command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off In addition limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel see CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative STATe CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute STATe and CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative STATe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Limit Checking on page 139 See Adjacent Channel Definition
313. The instrument performs a PRESET 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK The instrument performs a PRESET The following instrument settings are changed Table 10 17 Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK instruments Model of Trace Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling Points 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC 8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC 8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC FSEA 500 0 Hz 3 5 GHz 20 dBm AC SSES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 588 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation The IECWIN Tool Model of Trace Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling Points FSEB 500 0 Hz 7 GHz 20 dBm AC FSEM 500 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 20 dBm AC FSEK 500 0 Hz 40 GHz 20 dBm AC Note The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding fre quency of the R amp S FSW if required 10 3 The IECWIN Tool The R amp S FSW is delivered with ECWIN installed an auxiliary tool provided free of charge by R amp S IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instrument either interactively or from a command script The R amp S IECWIN32 tool
314. Tus QUI EStionable POWer register contains information about possible over load situations that may occur during operation of the R amp S FSW A separate power reg ister exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QU STATus QUEStionable POWer EV ENt EStionable POWer CONDition or User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 581 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Table 10 13 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable POWer register Bit No Meaning 0 OVERIoad This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device The R amp S FSW displays the keyword RF OVLD UNDerload This bit is set if an underload occurs at the RF input The R amp S FSW displays the keyword UNLD IF_OVerload This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path The R amp S FSW displays the keyword IF OVLD Input Overload This bit is set if the signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum see chap ter 6 2 1 1 RF Input Protection on page 275 The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device In order to re enable measurement decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the mixer input see INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet on page 795 The R amp S FSW displays the keyword INPUT OVL
315. Type remote control D System Messages remote control 953 Trace Mode remote control sssss 722 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control 822 Calibrate Reflection Short remote control 822 Calibrate Transmission remote control is Normalize remote control sussssse Softkey bar Hiding r storing re eee 539 Softkeys of Samples APD CODE 214 Power Bandwidth sess 161 AGIR MOd TE 134 Adjust Settings 125 135 157 162 232 Adjust Settings APD 215 219 Adjust X AXIS 4 ihrer pieta acini 203 All Functions Off rennen 470 Amplitude Config T Analysis BW APD CCDF see 214 Pme MER 394 Auto Freq QUIE ER 357 395 Bandwidth Config sssssssese 367 BB Power ET sms GIN T GINO Carrier Noise Config iun ec Center Mkr Freq sussssssssssseeeeeen Channel Bandwidth Channel defined Sequencer sessssee eessen 99 Clear Spectrogram ssssssssssss 374 428 Color Mapping je m COMMEN m eEENEe Continue Single Sweep sssss 245 373 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Continuous Sequencer eseeeeeee
316. UEStionable TEMPerature ENABle sss ener nnne rnnt nnns rennen nnn 958 SGTATusOUEGtonable TEMeratureNTRansiton nennen nn entren 959 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition esses ener enne nente 959 SS P ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1023 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVEN 957 STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDilon eterne nere neret nnne nnn ener ens 957 STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle sess enne aaiae iE nnns e nnns ennt aind 958 STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition esses eene nnne enne nnn adi nennt seni 959 STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRAnSition ccccceseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeseiaeeeeee 959 STATus QUEStionable TIMEEEVENI rent rrt ener Dee enr eruta e eco Yr ER ERE EFE TS REESE RE ERES 957 ENTENTE ER A TE 957 STAT s QUEUSENEXT 92 iieri pet o ree ere et entr dy sty bested wie dessa eege e Eyed o eeu de ded 956 b si isum 961 DY STEM CLOGGING m 930 SGv GfemCOMMunicate GPIDGRDEVice GENerator ADtDbess nn 818 SvGTem CGOMMunicate GPIDI SEL FlADtDhess ener rennen eterne nennen 947 GvGTem COMMunicate GPIDIGEL ElhRiEhRminator eene ener enne nnne
317. Up a Network and Remote Control 10 5 3 3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism 10 5 4 Deactivating the automatic login mechanism When shipped the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under Win dows To deactivate the automatic login mechanism perform the following steps 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed Enter the command C R_S INSTR USER NO_AUTOLOGIN REG Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login mechanism is deactivated The next time you switch on the instrument you are prompted to enter your user name and password before the firm ware is started Reactivating the automatic login mechanism 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed Enter the command C R_S INSTR USER AUTOLOGIN REG Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login mechanism is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Networks Sharing directories makes data available for other users This is only possible in Microsoft networks Sharing is a property of a file or directory 1 In the Start menu select Programs Accessories and then select Windows Explorer Select the desired folder with the right mouse button In the context menu select Sharing with gt Specific people The dialog box for sharing a direc
318. User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 991 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments Commands In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R amp S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation Supported 89600 commands CAL CLS ESE ESR IDN IST OPC OPT PCB PRE PSC RST SRE STB TRG TST WAI CALibration AUTO OFF ON ALERt CALibration TCORrections AUTO ON OFF CONFigure WAVeform DIAGnostic EABY ON OFF DIAGnostic LATCh VALue numeric DIAGnostic _LATCh SELect lt string gt DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA lt string gt DISPlay ENABle OFF ON DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision numeric DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel numeric DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet numeric FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat DATA ASCiijREAL UINT MATLAB numeric INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 992 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Emulating Other Instruments Commands Supported 89600 commands INITiate IMMediate INSTrument CATalog INSTrument NSELect lt numeric gt MMEMory CATalog dir name MMEMory COPY file name1 2 file name2 MMEMory DATA file name definite length block MMEMory D
319. W Select OK to confirm the warning After a few moments the R amp S FSW screen is displayed If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left hand corner of the screen you must restart the R amp S FSW in order to see the modified screen res olution e Press the key combination ALT F4 e The R amp S FSW firmware is shut down which may take a few sec E onds e On the desktop double tap the Analyzer icon Analyzer User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 613 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the Soft Front Panel i e the user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to buttons For details see chapter 9 6 7 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels on page 551 8 To deactivate or activate the Softfrontpanel press the F6 key After the connection is established the R amp S FSW screen is displayed in the Remote Desktop application window ry All Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 cr 10 43 Al H EJ Pepe rt Loud M 5 L ER Dy SMEEP TRACE mn mmc R v hi 7 em ED se e 0 a coms eg cuwer E3E3 D I The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desk top window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R amp S FSW screen To terminate Remo
320. a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 926 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results Note that depending on the size of the history buffer the process of exporting the data can take a while Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SGR Spectrogram Copies the spectrogram data to a file Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 425 See Export on page 501 MMEMory STORe SPURious lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measure ments to a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SPUR test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file For details on the file format see chapter 8 3 4 1 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 503 Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 925 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the t
321. a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values Result Result at the marker position The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 398 See Marker Peak List on page 398 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers e P B i User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 871 R amp S FSW Remote Commands c
322. a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 757 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS M r Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 756 for a list of available window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the
323. access The instrument provides an auto login function for the administrator account i e login with unrestricted access is carried out automatically in the background By default the user name for the administrator account is Instrument and the user name for the standard user account is NormalUser In both cases the initial password is 894129 You can change the password in Windows for any user at any time Some administrative tasks require administrator rights e g firmware updates or the configura tion of a LAN network Refer to chapter 9 General Instrument Setup on page 512 to find out which functions are affected At the same time you log on to the operating system you are automatically logged on to the network As a prerequisite the user name and the password must be identical on the instrument and on the network ERREUR E S N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 605 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 5 3 1 10 5 3 2 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control How to Create Users After the software for the network has been installed the instrument issues an error message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named instrument default user ID for Windows automatic login in the network Thus a matching user must be created in the R amp S FSW and in the network the password must be adapted to the network password and the automatic login mechanism must then be deactivated The net
324. access you want to allow the new user select Other then select Remote Desktop Users from the dropdown list System and Security Programs e User Accounts Appearance and Personalization o O ts G jol b Control Panel User Accounts we s e troi Pane D KN Control Panel Home User Accounts e Change your account picture Give other users access to this computer Network and Internet User Accounts S3 Hardware and Sound Users Adv j Use the list below to grant or deny users access to your computer and to change passwords and other settings Add New User k Clock Language and Region Ease of Access d Select the Finish button The user is created What level of access do you want to grant this user Standard user Users Group Standard account users can use most software and change system settings that do not affect other users Administrator Administrators Group Administrators have complete access to the computer and can make any desired changes Based on notification settings administrators may be asked to provide their password or confirmation before making changes that affect other users 9 Other Remote Desktop Users Members in this group are granted the right to logon remotely Bak JI Fne Cancel 6 Remove users from the Remote Desktop Users Group a Select the user from the list and then select the Remove button b Select OK to confirm the action
325. ace gt FUNCTION ecceecseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeaeserseatenteeaeeeresae SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion AUTO R amp S FSW Index 1xEV DO BTS Settings niae pe edd ee gd 522 ADpliCation gt seis estesa tt b cretus se Peces 90 To ch sereen og entornos 513 522 523 1xEV DO MS All Functions Off ADDIICatiOn EE 91 SOMKCY M 470 3G FDD BTS Alpha ADDIICALION gt ne ctos tct see certe 91 RRG filter SEM tad edicere eren 3G FDD UE Alphanumeric parameters ga ADDIICAUION EE EN AM modulation depth ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaee 75 Q Channel DaF rue crees 70 ADOUE EE of Samples Configuring 2 Softkey APD CCDF riiintean 214 Determining cce pe nectit ze Power Bandwidth Markers cece le 161 Markers remote control IDN Measurement remote control sss 734 Programming example sese 736 Results E 7 Results remote control sssssssssss RST cider iad ee dpt ledio uses uada 586 Search signallS 2 indiget qiie SWAN ME 569 Search signals remote control Sp AM Modulation Depth sssssssssseeeeees A Amplitude Configuration softkey seessssessssss 355 Aborting Distribution white noise sssse 221 Continuous SWEEP eee 427 Optimizi
326. actor external generator 297 309 REF INPUT El WE 51 Reflection measurement External generator cccccccceeceeeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeees 293 How to external generator eeeeeieseeeereieeesree 310 Ref Level channel setting sessssssssssss 69 Ref Lvl Mkr Lvl SONKGY sees P 458 Registers x ifn ed Nes erede retro eyed eC Ra ioe 571 Relay Cycle Counter sssssessseseesnsesrnrserrnserrrnssrrrnssens 535 Remote commands r Remote control Blocked EE Configuration see user Manual 86 Errors Ignored commands s sss 586 Interfaces ice rettet rer ree e 554 Introduction see user Manual ee neee 86 LXI settings Ge ProtOColS iiiter nr Mri Sequential commands sssssssssssssss 1008 Remote Desktop m Ellen scarface 611 Ending S SSIOMN ET see User Manual e ze Setting up a connection sssssssssesssss 613 Setting up controller seessssssesss 611 Setting up instrument sess 608 Remote display Update GPIB iater mt ree 593 Remote operation Configuririg tton tenni tete erras 553 Deactivating the instrument eeeee erene 615 GPIB address GPIB settings see also Remote Control 553 Settings e Setting UP EE 598 Starting Stopping 2 Removable hard dri
327. aed LE dem 903 GALE DUlate t IMIESKESDEL te 1 neret eL eter Ce Ee rere niae ege 903 CAL Cullate LIMI k STAT tte eR sea dude reae rates ee dena e pas eue hen a aas dede un na ped NR Eden 903 e TER A E eer E 904 CALCulate LIMit ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines Return values lt LimitLines gt String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabetical order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 481 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt COPY lt Line gt This command copies a limit line Parameters lt Line gt 1to8 number of the new limit line lt name gt String containing the name of the limit line Example CALC LIM1 COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2 CALC LIM1 COPY FM2 Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 482 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt DELete This command deletes a limit line Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Line on page 482 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL ERREUR RA ET UE SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 903 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REENERT Analyzing Measurements Basics Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check a
328. agetacsens 635 lee eer e 636 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see chapter 10 1 6 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution on page 569 For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 628 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one E M User
329. ally when using triggered measurements The following function calls are required Status viWaitOnEvent analyzer VI EVENT SERVICE REQ SROWaitTimeout VI NULL VI NULL Wait for service request user inputs are not possible during the waiting time IF status VI SUCCESS THEN CALL Srq If SRQ is recognized gt subroutine for evaluation E Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker Dim Status mbSession WaitOnEvent EE RU EET UE E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1000 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 14 1 3 Programming Examples MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest SROWaitTimeout Wait for service request user inputs are not possible during the waiting time If Status EventType MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest Then If SRQ is recognized gt subroutine for evaluation Srq End If Non blocking user inputs possible This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is long longer than the selected timeout and user inputs should be possible during the waiting time or if the event is not certain to occur This method is therefore the preferable choice for waiting for the end of measurements i e the output of results especially in the case of triggered measurements The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regular intervals and returns control to the operating sy
330. alyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 239 See Marker 1 2 3 on page 244 See Marker Position X value on page 260 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 448 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt State This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 260 See Marker Type on page 260 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first LEE User Man
331. and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO Turns on basic spectrum measurements ESPectrum Turns on spectrum emission mask measurements LIST Turns on spurious emission measurements RST AUTO Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 104 See Spurious Emissions on page 104 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements See also CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass class LIMit STATe on page 691 SENSe TESPectr mHigl S GETT 676 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez BANDwid RE SGolutton re ressesreee nene 676 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez BANDwidtb Vleo 676 EE TEE der ere EE 677 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range DELete essen ener 677 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range FILTer TYPE essen 677 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARL cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeaeeneteneees 678 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STOP essen 678 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation esee 679 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range INPut ATTenuation AUTO esee 679 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange INPut GAIN essent 680 IGENZGelCGbechum RANGe zangez INPuGAIN STATe erener erererororerersrernenen 680 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangezN ert 680 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit PClass ABSolute STARt
332. and selects the filter type for pulse power measurements The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Parameters lt FilterType gt CFILter NORMal P5 RRC CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST This command queries the results of the pulse power measurement This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measurement If there are no results the command returns an error Return values lt PulsePower gt List of pulse powers The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring The unit is dBm Usage Query only SENSe MPOWer SEQuence Frequency lt RBW gt lt MeasTime gt lt TriggerSource gt lt TriggerLevel gt lt TriggerOffset gt lt Detector gt lt OfPulses gt This command configures and initiates the pulse power measurement The R amp S FSW caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this command If you use the command repeatedly the R amp S FSW only changes those settings that you have actually changed before init
333. anges is mandatory Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Range on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FILTer TYPE lt Filterlype gt This command selects the filter type for an SEM range In case of high speed measurements the filter has to be identical for all ranges The EMI specific filter types are available ifthe EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range e D Y9 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 677 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt FilterType gt Manual operation Configuring and Performing Measurements NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM Refer to the datasheet for available filter bandwidths See Filter Type on page 174 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency of a SEM range Make sure
334. arameters Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band ji ILLE LL ES Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON na A E Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band H R SENS COR H R H R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB a Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80
335. are differs from that used in the HP analyzers Therefore the following constraint exists lt LF gt EOI are still used as delimiters since the GPIB hardware is able to identify them The other delimiters are identified and evaluated during syntax analysis 11 12 2 3 Special Behavior of Commands Command Known Differences ABORT Does not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the status byte An additional DONE is required for that purpose ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected AT AT DN UP Step size CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the status byte An additional DONE command is required for that purpose CF Default value range step size CR Default ratio Span RBW CT Formula for coupled sweep time CV Default ratio RBW VBW DEMOD requires option R amp S FSW B3 DET DET returns SAMP instead of SMP on the R amp S FSW DET not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the status byte An additional DONE is required for that purpose EEUU RU a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 988 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a lM aM aTM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Known Differences ERR Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a 0 in response FA Default value range step size FB Default value range step size ID Que
336. are or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTRbit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is oft
337. arget file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 425 See Export on page 501 11 9 6 Examples Managing Data e SON Data etre d RR Ra RR ERE EE dae 928 L adinG DA LED 928 e Storing Instrument Settings SSES NEESS ELE D eret nae 929 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 927 Managing Settings and Results e Loading Instrument Zens c cccc scccceeeeeetedcecceneeaetedecceeeesdeseesseeedasaaacdnaeees 929 Printing toa FIC E 929 e Printing ore PAME eei tentent SEENEN en 930 11 9 6 1 Storing Data MMEM MSIS C Selects drive C as the default storage device MMEM NETW USED Returns a list of all drives in use in the network MMEM NETW UNUS Returns a list of free drive names in the network MMEM NETW MAP T Server ACLRTest Maps drive T to the directory Server ACLRTest MMEM MDIR C R_S INST USER ACLRTest Creates a directory called ACLRTest on drive C MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER Test001 txt Creates a file called Test001 txt MMEM COMM ACLR test results Creates a comment for the file MMEM DATA TestOOl txt 4212FileContents Writes 12 characters to the file Test001 txt Copying the data to another location MMEM COPY C R_S INST USER Results Test001 txt T Copies the specified file to network drive T MMEM DEL C R_S
338. ary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE Use of the command OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep 1 CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESE 1 SetbitO in the ESE Operation Complete 2 CALL InstrWrite analyzer SRE 32 Setbit 5 in the SRE ESB 3 CALL InstrWrite analyzer INIT OPC Generate an SRQ after oper ation complete After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 583 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation BREET Remote Control Basics The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur The program should react appropriately to the service request A detailed example for a service request routine can be found in chapter 11 14 1 Service Request on page 998 Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possi bility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instru ments which do no
339. asic Measurement Parameters SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 797 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt State gt DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only External Generator Control External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 6 2 4 2 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 292 e
340. asurement The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned on with SENSe LIST POWer SET The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 746 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe LIST POWer SEQuence Frequency RefLevel lt RFAttenuation gt lt ElAttenuation gt FilterType lt RBW gt lt VBW gt lt MeasTime gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement The list can contain up to 200 entries frequencies You can define a different instrument setup for each frequency that is in the list If you synchronize the measurement with OPC the R amp S FSW produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual meas urements has been performed Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured For more information on querying the results see SENSe LIST POWer RESu1t Parameters lt Frequency gt lt RefLevel gt lt RFAttenuation gt lt ElAttenuation gt lt FilterType gt lt RBW gt lt VBW gt MeasTime lt TriggerLevel gt Defines the receive frequency Each frequenc
341. asurements Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt RBW gt Resolution bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths Default unit Hz Manual operation See RBW on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo lt VBW gt This command defines the video bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt VBW gt Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths Default unit Hz Manual operation See VBW on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe BREak State This command controls the sweep Parameters State ON The R amp S FSW stops after measuring one range To continue with the next range you have to use IN1Tiate CONMeas OFF The R amp S FSW sweeps all ranges in one go RST OFF Manual operation See Stop After Sweep on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe COUNt This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Usage Query only S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 701 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list Note that e you cannot delete the reference range e aminimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix range 1 30 Selects the
342. ate d dee aiaa Tina etu dr cede ce op ecd redd 626 leger ue E e 627 LAY OutADD EWINDOW H R B 756 LAY out CATalog OK e KEE 757 LEAYOout IDENBf WINDOW itte tid neat EENS eileen iis nena 757 EA YOUTREMGOVE WINDOW rm 757 LAYout REPLace WINDOW rnt rn nonno too causes sgeasetenaeniedasdoceasusensantvoeedieasntadondossees 758 els M 758 LAYout WINDowsns AD D ein ee centre eet Sere uetus yk eb anat pda mus iii ZU bd Ea bee e eee REY o A EXER CR ad gun 760 LAYOUtEWINDOWS N gt TEE EE 760 EAYout WINDowsn REMOWVe ect rentrer ere Exe ma Eaa E ENEE AAE NEEE pe ora Ma rea Ee Rea Fu nal Va pede 760 LAYU WINDOW M gt REPLACE saaana reete iiie HERE iab ated eek 761 MMEMory GATalog EONGY eerte eh ree re Seb masa ENEE HELD Ee Ee BEN Ye au dap e Bde EE Deka oda 907 ll del Ee NK WE 907 MMEMOPY eB e ADT 908 MMEMory Uess gereegelt 915 MMEMory CLEar S KN RE 916 MMEMory COMMSBnNiL roit te trn ener aatis eira adea va dx epe eua e dena anes 908 IMME MOBY COPY eode eee M M Lem e 908 MMEMory DAT Asi 909 bubo MIN c OM 909 MMEMory EOAD AUTO iiit bee cenae eee ev Fed obey aris pec pec herbe ko EE 916 MMEMOry EOAD STATO6 iiiter dde Eget eredi se eed Tideo ue Ue ed
343. ation to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see chapter 10 1 6 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 568 For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual ERREUR RA I ET e SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 634 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS SS SS as a ee Configuring and Performing Measurements If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 628 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 102 See Zero Span on page 102 See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 373 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With sweep count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measureme
344. ative STARt FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 683 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP lt Limit gt This command defines a relative limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define a relative limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the SEM range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters lt Level gt Relative limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 50 Default unit dBc Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP 15 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP ABSolute lt Limit gt This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 170 Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the SEM range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at
345. ble KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8566B BEEN HP 8568B RB UP HP 8594E RB AUTO RB RBR RBR lt numeric_value gt Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE available RBR DN Ratio HP 8566B RBR UP HP 8568B RBR HP 8594E RC1 6 RC1 6 Recall Last State HP 8566A available HP 8568A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 981 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i Ee Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models RCLS RCLS numeric value Recall State Register HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E RCLT RCLT TRA TRB num Recall Trace HP856xE available Ese HP8594E RESET RESET Instrument preset HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E REV REV Firmware revision HP 856xE available REV HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E RL RL numeric value Reference Level HP 856xE available DB DM HP 8566B RL DN HP 8568B RL UP HP 8594E RL RLCAL RLCAL lt numeric_value gt Reference Level Calibra HP 856xE available RL tioti HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E RCLOSCAL RCLOSCAL Recall Open Short Aver HP 856xE not available age HP 8594E RCLTHRU RCLTHRU Recall Thru HP 856xE not available HP 8594E RLPOS RLPOS Reference Level Position HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HP 8566B REPOS DN HP 8568B REPOSE HP 8594E RLPOS ROFFSET ROFFSET Reference Level Offset HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt DB HP 8566B DM HP 8568B ROFFS
346. ble TIMe register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 Sweep time too low This bit is set if the sweep time is too low and thus calibration fails Note the STATus QUEStionable bit for CALibration is not affected by this error 2to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 10 1 7 4 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used e Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument e Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why e Parallel poll of all devices e Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands e Query ofthe error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from figure 10 1 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENABIe parts ofthe status registers can be set such that arbitr
347. ble bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Manual operation See Filter Type on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is e smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid greater than the span the sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will adjust the start fre quency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span For more information see chapter 5 6 Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 195 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is ERREUR E A SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 703 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements e smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid gr
348. cated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands described in chapter 11 10 4 Working with Transducers on page 937 Parameters Name lt name gt Example CORR TRAN GEN SMUO1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMU01 trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 309 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes a signal generator of the type SMU04 is connected to the R amp S FSW including TTL synchronization as described in External Generator Connec tions on page 292 dee Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Set the generator type to SMU04 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMUO4 Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT GPIB SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 28 Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 823 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the
349. cer on page 629 A detailed programming example is provided in chapter 11 4 3 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements on page 630 E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 628 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR a a a aM Selecting the Operating Mode and Application A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SINGle Sequence mode For details on synchronization see chapter 10 1 6 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 568 For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been performed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the seq
350. channels on CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS STAT ON Turns the absolute limit check for the first alternate channel on POW ACH PRES ACP WAI Determines the ideal ACLR measurement configuration Configuring and Performing Measurements POW ACH PRES RLEV WAT Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the results of the limit check for the adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ALT1 RES Queries the results of the limit check for the first alternate channels CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP Returns the results for the ACLR measurement Example Configuring and Performing an MSR ACLR Measurement This example demonstrates how to configure and perform an ACLR measurement on a multi standard radio signal in a remote environment a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Select ACLR measurement CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer SELect ACPower Select MSR Standard CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer PRESet MSR Configure general measurement settings SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1 25GHz SENSe FREQuency SPAN 62 0MHz SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount 3 Configuring SUBBLOCK A SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TXCHannel COUNt 3 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLockl FREQuency CENTer 1 230GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 RFBWidth 12MHZ SENSe POWer ACHanne
351. ck kckckckckck ck kc kckckckck ck kc KK KK Private mbSession As MessageBasedSession Sub Main Console WriteLine Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors Dim SROWaitTimeout 4000 Timeout As Integer for WaitOnEvent Opening session Try FSW is alias instead of use resource string For example on TCP use TCPIP0 192 168 1 2 inst0 INSTR mbSession CType ResourceManager GetLocalManager Open FSW MessageBasedSession mbSession TerminationCharacterEnabled True Try mbSession Write CLS Reset status reporting system mbSession Write SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register mbSession Write ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and query error mbSession Write STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events mbSession Write STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits mbSession Write STAT QUES ENAB 32767 Set questionable enable bits for all events mbSession Write STAT QUES PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits Console WriteLine Wait on event Blocking mbSession EnableEvent MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest EventMechanism Queue Enable the event for service request Your command plase use here mbSession Write Your command Dim Status mbSession WaitOnEvent MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest SRQWaitTimeout If
352. clusive to storing results FORM EDEX Poti Eerst a a a EES 925 FORMAEDEXPOort TRAGC6S ceci eode ed rtu d cep ENEE 925 MMEMGRGSTORG ISK EE Em 926 MMEMBEISTORSIPEAK aderire t e dean cet gaat e RR EaD ERR aaa ARAA ENEE eaaa 926 MMEMO STORE SORAM EE 926 MMEM n STORE SPURIOUS oriei Had alee eden 927 MMEWMory STORexn7 TRACe isses eae asa aa aaa te en nets nsn se senis inne rere titi nnn n nnns 927 FORMat DEXPort HEADer State If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported See chapter 8 3 4 1 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 503 for details Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 424 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 927 For details on exporting data see chapter 7 3 2 3 Trace Export Settings on page 423 EEUU RA ET M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 925 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C A n Managing Settings and Results Parameters
353. confirmed _L_L_L_L LL_ ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 851 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EE SSS IIx amp amp xxx amp xxIax E EE SSS ss Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Trace Math Function on page 422 See Trace Math Off on page 423 11 8 2 4 Retrieving Trace Results This chapter describes how to retrieve data from standard traces For spectrograms see also chapter 11 8 3 6 Marker Search Spectrograms on page 871 For details on the format of the retrieved trace data see also chapter 11 8 2 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 855 Commands required to export traces and other result data are described in chap ter 11 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 925 FORE DATA E 852 TRACe lt sn gt DATA EE 853 TRAGGSRSEDATADMENMOEBIT EE 854 TRADE EE 854 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format For details on data formats see chapter 11 8 2 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 855 Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This fo
354. control ge rte ennt 87 see User Manual E GPIB Earguage 2e eite onii 587 Group Delay Application x rh ient i c e einer 92 GSM ADPIICAUOM RE 92 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 801 External Mixer B21 eene 319 328 Hardcopy see Screenshols eere teo tiere EEN 66 Hard drive Removable co n 47 Hardware oh EE 526 NIE le 534 Information SUppoFted rei no ertet eR gg 526 Harmonic Distortion eerie rr entire 227 About Sos Activating remote control eee reer eeeeee 729 eleng dE 228 Configuring M Measutement doeoeieerg rer rrr ea eee ror SOEN 105 Measurement remote control 729 Measuring SE eebe ege euer Results remote Control sssssssssss 729 SWeep Kul 232 Harmonics i 228 Conversion loss table B21 ss 335 External Mixer B21 remote control High sensitivity 2 eee cens 229 Hom I 318 Measurement example 473 Measurement rules 0 eee eee rsrsrsrsrs teari 229 Measurement time s esse 230 Number 231 Order External Mixer B21 329 eje MX 229 230 Second harmonic intercept ssuuuss 228 Type External Mixer B21 sss 329 Headphones CO
355. ctory Example MMEM CLE ALL Usage Event ERREUR RA T UE V e LLTLALLLLO User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 915 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EMG C Ua SS aMMa Managing Settings and Results MMEMory CLEar STATe 1 FileName This command deletes a instrument configuration file Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file to delete The string may or may not contain the file s extension Example MMEM CLE STAT 1 TEST Usage Event MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1 Factory lt FileName gt This command restores an instrument configuration and defines that configuration as the default state The default state is restored after a preset RST or after you turn on the R amp S FSW Parameters 1 Factory Factory lt FileName gt Restores the factory settings as the default state file name String containing the path and name of the configuration file Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function channel settings files cause an error Example MMEM LOAD AUTO 1 C R_S Instr user TEST Usage Event Manual operation See Startup Recall on page 498 MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores and activates an instrument configuration stored in a a 1 file Note that files with other formats cannot be
356. ctrum PSEarch PEAKsearch IMMediate cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneees 695 CAL Culate nzEGbechum P GtarchlptEAksearch MAhRCGin 695 CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PDGow 696 CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO lt State gt This command turns the list evaluation on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Manual operation See List Evaluation State on page 184 See List Evaluation State on page 204 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch IMMediate This command initiates a list evaluation Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin Threshold This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Parameters Margin Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB Manual operation See Margin on page 184 See Margin on page 205 EET RU TU a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 695 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DEE Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on
357. d Performing the Measurement isset 734 e Example Measuring the AM Modulation Denth 736 Configuring and Performing the Measurement The following commands control the measurement Useful commands for AM modulation depth described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 870 EEUU EA E SSS a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 734 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a Tm K m aaa aaa Ha Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATel nene 735 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 735 CAL Culate nzM Abkerzmz FUNGCHonMDEPURE Gul 735 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth STATe lt State gt This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off To work correctly the measurement requires an AM modulated signal Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See AM Mod Depth on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE This command initiates a search for the signals required for the AM depth measurement Note that the command does not perform a new measurement but looks for the signals on the current trace Parameters
358. d Properbes Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The defaut wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 7 Select the Properties button 8 Onthe General tab select Use the following DNS server addresses and enter your own DNS addresses For more information refer to the Windows operating system Help 10 5 1 3 How to Change the Instrument Name In a LAN that uses a DNS server Domain Name System server each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address The DNSG server translates the host name to the IP address This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the computer name 1 Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Computer Name is displayed in the Network tab 2 Enter the new computer name and close the dialog box The configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 3 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the instrument 10 5 1 4 How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Browser Interface The instrument s LXI browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 602
359. d of the IF signal path after the input mixer e Increase the reference level INPUT OVLD The signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device In order to re enable measurement decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the mixer input LOUNL Error in the instrument s frequency processing hardware was detected NO REF input Instrument was set to an external reference but no signal was detected on the reference OVEN OCXO reference frequency option R amp S FSW B4 has not yet reached its operating temperature The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has beeen switched on e D e User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1009 R amp S FSW Troubleshooting REENEN Error Messages in Remote Control Mode OVLD Overload of the input signal path after the input mixer only when RF INPUT path is NOT used e g for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 e Reduce the input level PLL UNLOCK For Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 only Error in digital UO input data For details on the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RF OVLD Overload of the
360. daa 949 SVS Tem EXELANIGSSL TEE 949 SYSTemd XEMDESCHIOD ain EERSTEN AEN 949 EE E o MC 949 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Address This command sets the GPIB address of the R amp S FSW Parameters Address Range 0 to 30 RST no influence on this parameter factory default 20 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See GPIB Address on page 593 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 947 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator Terminator This command selects the GPIB receive terminator According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is LF and or lt EOI gt For binary data transfers e g trace data from the control computer to the instrument the binary code OAH used for lt LF gt might be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by changing the receive terminator to EOI Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Parameters Terminator LFEOI EOI RST no influence on this parameter factory default LFEOI Example SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Manual operation See GPIB Terminator on page 593 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate State This command turns the display during remote operation on and off
361. dal cce Em 365 Mode 372 dE HH 364 372 File format Export FES TR 503 SEM exXpott TSS rer teret terea 194 SEM settings files rne 189 Spurious Emissions export files 206 Trace export rrt iea eek oa tais 503 File name Datafile ge 494 e PM 183 495 498 File type otorage settings E 496 Filters o c TTE Channel es E GorifigulatiOEr NEE 367 ec 372 Gaussian SdB EE 365 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index High pass remote ssssesssesses 796 High pass RF input sssse 280 Overview m Weighting remote sse YIG emote EE Filter type EMI 252 265 Filt r ypes sesiunii nana 263 365 371 SEM Ria co n neret i eset de 174 Spurious Emissions range 201 FinaliteSt cic 2A c 258 Firmware Updatitig i rir emere 526 547 Firmware updates see User Manual sssessesessssrneseeesrrrrrnrrrssssrrsrrrsen 18 Fixed reference CohfIguting iecore Ep mete err ree 471 Defining iie eti dee te eres 449 465 Delta markers Maneet C Remote Control 1 tesche gedd rena Focus CHANGING eoe 76 Focus area Switching between windows s ssessssesedeessrreesrrseree 40 Format RN WEE 855 Data remote D Date and Time s essent 537 see also File format ssss
362. dard files Usage Query only Manual operation See Standard on page 121 See User Defined Standards on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete Standard This command deletes a file containing an ACLR standard Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name of the standard Usage Event Manual operation See Standard on page 121 See User Defined Standards on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE lt Standard gt This command saves the current ACLR measurement configuration as a new ACLR standard The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter channel bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name The file format is xml Manual operation See Standard on page 121 See User Defined Standards on page 121 Configuring the Channels The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measure ments ISENSe POWer ACHahnnel ACPalts eoa rrt eere ee kk dee Reno haa dade nre ct 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel eene 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth AL Ternate ch esee 645 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDGWiDt CH ANnelcchzl nenene 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel eeeeeee eene nennen 646
363. described in chapter 10 1 5 SCPI Command Structure on page 560 A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter Remote Control Commands There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent Commands Instrument responses Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are sub divided according to two criteria e According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header e According to their definition in standards Common commands their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemented They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as SCPI confirmed in the c
364. detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 956 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 11 2 11 11 3 Using the Status Register This command is identical to the SyYSTem ERRor NEXT command Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part For more information on the condition part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 572 STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition lt ChannelName gt These commands read
365. e 342 OUTPut UPORt STATe State This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector This 9 pole SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW Parameters State ON User port is switched to OUTPut OFF User port is switched to INPut RST OFF OUTPut UPORt VALue Value This command sets the control lines of the user ports The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pin N A N A 5 3 4 7 6 2 Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0 The user port is written to with the given binary pattern If the user port is programmed to input instead of output see 1NPut UPORt STATe on page 798 the output value is temporarily stored Parameters Value bit values in hexadecimal format TTL type voltage levels max 5V Range B00000000 to B00111111 Example OUTP UPOR B00100100 Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V EEUU RU a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 837 R amp S9FSW Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements Basics 11 8 Analyzing Measurements Basics The commands for general analysis tasks are described here e Zooming into the DISDISy euadere iiid veda ice c re adder 838 e Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data 840 e Working wiih EE 855 e Configuring Display and Limit Lines iniecit iere nece eh EE 893 11
366. e 817 Parameters lt Type gt GPIB TTL GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwarz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde amp Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 304 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 294 Parameters lt Name gt lt Generator name as string value gt RST SMUO2 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 819 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN2 TYPE SMEO2 Selects SMEO2 as generator 2 Manual operation See Generator Type on page 303 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 304 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration
367. e MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE sess 733 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESUIt eese 733 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EMG CC MMMM aM Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TOI STATe State This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instrument Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Delta marker 3 and delta marker 4 are positioned to the intermodulation products The delta markers can be modified separately afterwards with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X command The third order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal markers and the delta markers Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches on the measurement of the third order intercept Manual operation See TOI on page 105 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third intercept point Parameters ONCE Example CALC MARK FUNC TOI SEAR ONCE Executes the search for 2 signals and their intermodulation prod uct at the currently available trace Usage Event Manual operation See Search Signals on page
368. e bandwidth sweep and filter settings in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chap ter 6 5 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration on page 361 e Configuring the Bandwidth and Eiter 767 e Gonfigurng THE SWOGD E 770 Configuring the Bandwidth and Filter SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution cnet tette 767 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO eccccc tette 768 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO eeccccnctn ntn 768 ISENSeBANDwOIBWIDONERESOluontTEE tette 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VlDeo ence irienn tenttettntnte errean 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO eecccetn ntt tentent 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio ccce tententntentntentnns 770 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE ecce ttetnt tente tntetttts 770 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution bandwidth from the span User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 767 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS SSE a eee ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth For measurements on UO data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Examp
369. e conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 333 See Edit Table on page 333 See File Name on page 334 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 EEUU E E ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 809 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 335 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note tha
370. e dac baee ede eda 800 IEN Ge Mixer OG HIGH 804 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH 0 0 ceceecceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseecaeeaeeaeeeaeseeseeseeesanecaeeeeesaeeeeeenteeeeneeeas 804 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW cinere ited cebat ce tere aeneo a te Pee tee ee aan 804 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW EE 805 SENSe MIXer PORTS eiecti te tee nee Verde Ye echado age dug ded pe ye Ded bag eee p eee 805 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe eerie eene nennen htt then ennt atthe attain in eaten aenea tna ta anas 805 SENSE MIXer SIGNA SENSe MIXer THReshold SENSe MIXerES TATe dried ptu dete tinh cene eere edendo e redde tat SENSe MPOWer FIY PE SENSe MPOWaer RESUIEMIN iiir ferret retire iir re etes ei tede des rental diese dee e Ep ede ab seed 753 SENSe MPOWer RESUII EIST 2 2 5 3 rre dte etit eene eaaet etre teen eod aed eet ce eee apad i bete dE 752 SENSe MPOWer SEQu ence rrr ront rit re ran rennen rns SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALuUue essen erem nrennet rre nren rennen trennen nre SENSe PMETer p DCYCIe STATe esessesseseseseee e renaire rA a NERA RENET enne tnnt n enne SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQUGNCY ciscccccscccesscceseteescerssecescscosavorsnesssczacseeeteovsorsesestnnssduncdesdecescesueceusenceessterteeees SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK
371. e data is retrieved in this case the command is identical to TRAC DATA TRACEI1 For details on the returned values see the TRAC DATA lt TRACE gt command Query parameters Trace TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt OffsSwPoint gt The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measurement at which data retrieval is to start lt NoOfSwPoints gt Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace Example TRAC DATA MEM TRACE1 25 100 Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1 starting at sweep point 25 Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values e g for SEM or Spurious Emissions measurements SSS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 854 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 2 5 d 11 8 3 Analyzing Measurements Basics Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 104 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA Or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned
372. e distance from the CF of the first Tx channel in the first subblock to the lower adjacent channel and the distance from the CF of the last Tx channel in the last subblock to the upper adjacent channel A change of the adjacent channel spacing causes a change in the spacing of all alternate channels below the adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt Range 100 Hz to 2000 MHz RST 14 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 127 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Adjacent Channel Spacings on page 140 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt ch gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels For MSR signals this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx channel in the first subblock to the lower alternate channel and the distance from the CF of the last Tx channel in the last subblock to the upper alternate channel If you set the channel spacing for the first alternate channel the R amp S FSW adjusts the spacing of alternate channels of a lower order but not the other way round The command works hierarchically to set a distance from the transmission channel to the 2nd and 3rd alternate channel you have to define a spacing for the 2nd alternate channel first Parameters lt Spacing gt Range 100 Hz to 2000 MHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Manual operation See Channel Spaci
373. e eens tent teeeeeeenneeeeeneeea 659 IGENGe IPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAl Pa GB ock ebz CHANnelkcchz 660 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 656 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Ech Configuring and Performing Measurements ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerziATeGAbegapz tr ttorosnrnrenerorornsr nene 660 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe SBLock lt sb gt CHANNel lt Ch gt errereen 660 SENS POWer ACHannel SBCOUN ncira a aiaia TE nae 661 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt nenen 661 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt CENTer CHANnel ch esses 661 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel GB ock abz FREOuencv CENTer 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb NAME CHANnel ch eese 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb RFBWidth sese eene 662 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb TECHnology CHANnel ch 663 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb TXCHannel COUNt esee 663 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP gap cessisset 664 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt ABSolute Limit Reserved This command defines the absolute limit of the specified gap CACLR channel If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix lt gap gt 112 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters lt Limit gt Defines the absolute limit o
374. e etrosorsrnnnnenerererernnnnn 775 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sse 775 Ee Eelere En E EE 776 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 774 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EMG UC PP ug Setting Basic Measurement Parameters If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level Marker Level on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Reference Level on page 356 See Unit on page 357 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST
375. e file names lt FileName gt parameter are given as string parameters enclosed in quo tation marks They also comply with Windows conventions Windows file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation Wildcards x The two characters and can be used as wildcards i e they are variables for a selection of several files The question mark replaces exactly one character the asterisk replaces any of the remaining characters in the file name thus means all files in a directory ERREUR RA RT E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 905 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 9 1 Managing Settings and Results Path names Storage locations can be specified either as absolute including the entire path or relative paths including only subfolders of the current folder Use the MMEM CDIR query to determine the current folder e General Data Storage and Loading Commande 906 Selecting the Items to Stores esent ee ee ed o Lu ead deve eo LEE eed 912 e Storing and Loading Instrument Settings aerei 915 e Storing or Printing Screenshots 22 cccaceeecececeesacneeecneeeeeanaeeeteceeendadaedecneeees 919 e Storing Measurement Results eein EEN 925 e Examples Managing Data sees 927 General Data Storage and Loading Commands See also FORMat DATA on page 852 FORMatDEXPortDSEPaltalor eiie eren nhe nt eet x een rte Eaa And 906 MMEMbo
376. e for 0 1 probability P1 P1 Level value for 1 probability P10 Level value for 10 probability CALC STAT CCDF X1 P10 Returns the level values that are over 10 above the mean value Query only See CCDF on page 105 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace Parameters lt ResultType gt Example Usage Manual operation MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Query only See APD on page 104 See CCDF on page 105 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to determine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment using the gated statistics example described in chapter 5 7 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering on page 212 e D
377. e gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC THR STAT ON Switches on the threshold line Manual operation See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 162 See Search Limits on page 452 See Search Limits on page 456 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal Markers ss ite iiorrr ied nrc ENEE 864 e Positioning Delta Markers essen nennen nnns 867 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CAL Culate nzM bkerzmz M AMimum AUTO 865 GALGulatesn MARKer lt m gt MAXIMUMILEPT vic 22222 inna in nha tana ENKER ENER EES NEEN SE NN 865 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimMUM NEXT ccccccceecsccseeeseeesseceeeseeeeseeeeeuseueeeueeueusauenas 865 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 864 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR aes Analyzing Measurements Basics CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum PDEAKT nennen 865 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimMUM RIGHL ccccccccsececeeeseecesceeseeseceesseecenseeseeseceenees 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM AUTO cccccccccceececeeseeceasccesseeseeeeeeeaceeeseseeeanees 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 20ccccsscccceececeseeeceaceecseseceeeseceeneeeceseceenees 866 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK 0 c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeea
378. e measurement is evaluated MEAN Calculates the RMS pulse power PEAK Calculates the peak pulse power Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement Range 1 to 32001 Pulse power level The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit is dBm SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse power measurement If there are no results the command returns an error SS A s User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 753 11 5 15 2 11 6 Configuring the Result Display Return values lt PulsePower gt Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement The unit is dBm Usage Query only Example Performing a Pulse Power Measurement The following example shows a pulse power measurement ESE 1 SRE 32 Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request MPOW FTYP NORM Selects a Gaussian filter for the measurement MPOW 935 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 OPC Configures and initiates a measurement on 20 pulses with synchronization to the end Analyzer produces a service request On service request MPOW RES Returns the results of the measurements 20 power levels MPOW REG MIN Returns the lowest of the 20 power level that have been measured MPOW 935
379. e only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e P User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 617 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 2 11 3 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Common Suffixes e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Common Suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description ch 1 18 TX channel Channe 1 11 ALT channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Line 1 2 Display line lt m gt 1 16 Marker lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These com mands have the same effect and are e
380. e result CALC MARK FUNC BPOW RES Response 20dBm Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position Parameters lt Span gt Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R amp S FSW model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation See Span on page 467 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates or turns marker 4 into a band power marker Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 466 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 467 Using Delta Markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHonBbOWerMODE 886 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHonBbOWerREGu 887 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHonBbOWer DAN 887 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe esee 887 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are displayed IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 886 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 12 Analy
381. e x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 239 See Marker 1 2 3 on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 The unit depends on the application of the command Table 11 7 Base unit Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit DBM DBPW DBUV DBMV DBUA dB lin log WATT VOLT AMPere dB lin 96 log statistics function APD or CCDF on dimensionless output User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 870 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 6 Analyzing Measurements Basics Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts
382. eaeeeaesad 813 SENSe PROBesp SETUp NAME nricere Erde cepe e ede a e He RE de RC o EA EE Red 813 EIST e EE NEE KEE 814 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE SENS6e ROSCillator O 100 trc aia e ee net e c D ree Be n De Dre ne d dd SENS6 ROSCillator iC EI Eeer SENSe ROSCillator SOURCeE EAUT0O 00 cece cen eceeeeceneeeseeeceaeeseaeeseaeeecaeeseaeeseaeesseesseeseseeessaeesseeesenaes 933 SENSe ROSGillator S d e 933 SENSe SWEep COUNt SENSe SWESp COUNEGURRORE cen edet EO e ed Scala erepta ees 636 SENSe SWEep EGA e NG 787 SENSe SWES8p EGATS6 HOLDOff 3 etcetera ete re tl eese epe ed D d RH 787 IEN Ge J SwWEenEGATel ENG 788 SS B 1 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1029 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLAmity EE 788 EISE ENER 788 IEN Ge I wWEenEGATe RACebtEbRiod nene emeret nennen nre 714 IEN Ge I wWEenEGATe RACechk COMMent nne nennen ennt nnne 714 IGENGe I wWEenEGAte RACeck GTAbtorange z nen eene ener nennen 714 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt IGENGe wWEenEGAte RACecklGtATecrangezl 715 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE ires ee eene den dte oe ed t ed ede Awan 789 Ris ETHEsaiebie PE SENSe SWEep OPTimize m EISE Ee Mel CG SET EE TIME E SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO EISEM EE e a d TEE SENSe SWEep TYPE USED D SENSe WINDow DETector lt tr
383. eaeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeaeees 867 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt a naaanooanan0aannannnnnnnanneonnnnnrnnnnrananrrrnnrnnnnnnnnne 867 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep Manual operation See Auto Max Min Peak Search on page 452 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 See Search Next Peak on page 457 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command
384. earance and D AER E Y d Advanced Personalization A z WW Allow remote access Clock Language and Region Remote Desktop caus OF Access amp Windows Update Tum automatic updating Click an option and then specify who can connect f needed 3 Power Options Dont alow connections to this computer Require a password when Change when the compu Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop fess secure M Backup and Restord Back up your computer Allow connections only from computers running Remote Cp yup Desktop with Network Level Authentication more secure x ini Administrative T90 WEE D Free up disk space D Hap mechones WW Create and format har L oe J emen In the Remote tab in the Remote Desktop area activate the Allow connections from computers running Remote Desktop option Define which users are to be given access to the R amp S FSW via Remote Desktop Note The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically enabled for Remote Desktop a Select the Select Users button b Select the users or create new user accounts as described in chapter 10 5 3 1 How to Create Users on page 606 C Select OK to confirm the settings The R amp S FSW is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop program of the controller 10 5 5 2 How to Add or Remove Users to the Remote Desktop Users Group Only users in the Remote Desktop Users Group are
385. easurement results If the results are not accurate change the position of the the temporary markers manually Changing the position of the temp markers CALC MARK X 100MHZ Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz CALC DELT2 X 5KHZ Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker CALC DELT3 X 1KHZ Corrects the position of delta marker 3 by 1 kHz CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES Queries the measurement results for the repositioned markers Remote Commands for EMI Measurements The following commands are required to perform EMI measurements in a remote envi ronment This measurement requires the R amp S FSW K54 option The following tasks specific to the EMI application are described here RETE RU ET UE a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 736 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Ech Configuring and Performing Measurements e Activating EMI Measurement nennen nnne nennen nennen 737 e Contgunng EMI MSEIKOeIS iere RR RM ERR REDI RR ERIS eM 737 e Conltiguring the EMI Final Test oie rre terrere reta oo ene nere 738 e Configuring EMI Limit Leg iecore eye ee xen eR ERR eeu S ege 739 e Controlling ESI uii nec cines en eed ere RED cree A PU ee Dee ten 739 UELUT 740 e Eyaluaung De TEE 743 e Programming Example EMI Measurement 743 11 5 13 1 Activating EMI Measurement EMI measurement must be activated explicitely CAL CulateMAbkerkUNGCHon FMEasurement ST
386. easurement results CAL CulateDElTamarker mzFUNGC Hon FMEasurement REGult 741 CAL CulateM Ab ker mz EUNGC on FMEasurement REGul 741 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion F MEasurement LIMit lt k gt CONDition 741 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k CONDition 742 CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion F MEasurement LIMit k DELTa 742 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k DELTa seus 742 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult Result This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the deltamarker position Return values Result Absolute power level measured during final EMI measurement Example CALC DELT3 FUNC PME RES Queries the result of delta marker 3 Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult Result This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the marker position Return values Result Power level The unit depends on the one you have currently set Example CALC MARK1 FUNC FME RES Queries the result of marker 1 Usage Query only CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit lt k gt CONDition Condition This command queries the condition of a deltamarker position in relation to a certain limit line User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 741 R
387. easurements Basics Parameters lt ColorScheme gt HOT Uses acolor range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low levels red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low levels blue colors indicate high ones RADar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray RST HOT Example DISP WIND SPEC COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 429 Using Trace Mathematics The following commands control trace mathematics CAL Culate nzMATHtENbressonlt DEFinel 850 GAECulatesmsMATHIMODB EE 851 GAEDUlatesns MATHER OSINOMN i iit ends sees aie E Medios reus EE eec eee eden 851 GAL Gulate lt n gt MATHISTA Tee as ced sia sincsedsstdsenenedasiseaccecdestaagcdeddcadtaaededdesetagadaddeceteaaneedesaad 851 CALCulate lt n gt MATH EXPression DEFine Expression This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics Before you can use the command you have to turn trace mathematics on Parameters lt Expression gt TRACE1 TRACE2 Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE4 Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE5 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE6 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 Example CALC MAT
388. eater than the span the sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will adjust the start fre quency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span For more information seechapter 5 6 Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 195 Suffix lt range gt Parameters lt Frequency gt Manual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range Numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz See Range Start Range Stop on page 201 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the input attenuation for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range Parameters lt Attenuation gt Manual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range Numeric value Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range RST 10 dB Default unit dB See RF Attenuator on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a spurious emission measurement range on and off Suffix lt range gt Parameters lt State gt Manual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 See RF Att Mode on page 202 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 704 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS is a ee Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GA
389. eband B71 remote control 935 Analog Baseband B71 532 External generator 296 External generator remote 820 Frequency osese 530 Frequency MW esee hen etre rrr nene 532 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Frequency RF eet tan 531 How to external generator ieseeieseeeereeeereeee 310 Normalization external generator E Performing with external generator 310 Reference trace external generator 296 Reflection open measurement external generator 308 Reflection short measurement external generator Signal Ss Signal as RE InpUt 2 rtr retener 52 Storing results external generator 296 Transmission measurement external generator Capture time see also Measurement time n eeereeerrreen 772 Carrier Noise Config Ge Carrier to Noise m ga Pede a a iuis Channel bandwidth eese 157 Channel bandwidth remote control e r ele ele Determining TE Measurement Measurement remote control 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeees Measurement process cecceeesceeceeeeeeeeneeeenneeeaes Results m Results remote control ssssssssss Mr scents Case sensitivity GE O H 561 Activating remote control
390. ection you can send remote commands to control and operate the instrument To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus the instrument and the controller must be linked by a GPIB bus cable A GPIB bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller The con troller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address see chapter 10 5 1 5 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address on page 605 You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R amp S FSW Notes and Conditions In connection with the GPIB interface note the following e Upto 15 instruments can be connected e The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices whichever is less the cable lenth between two instruments should not exceed 2 m e Awired OR connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel ERREUR E E MM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 557 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 1 3 10 1 2 10 1 3 Remote Control Basics e Any connected IEC bus cables should be terminated by an instrument or controller USB Interface For remote control via the USB connection the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed VISA detects and conf
391. ed 2034 CPU Temperature is too high This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 C Table 13 3 Power Sensor errors Status bar message Description Zeroing could not be performed Zeroing could not be performed because the RF power applied is too high Power sensor zero failed 13 3 Obtaining Technical Support If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error messages are described in chapter 13 Troubleshooting on page 1008 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any problems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below e System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provides information on Hardware Info hardware assemblies p P u User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1011 R amp S FSW Troubleshooting Obtaining Technical Support Versions and Options the status of all software and hardware options installed on your instrument System Messages messages on any errors that may have occurred An xml file with information on the system configuration dev
392. ed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 395 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON forexample See Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements on page 394 Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the highest signal level in the current fre quency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 395 SS M O VY G 9 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 794 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 6 11 7 6 1 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measuremen
393. ed reference puririna Fixed reference remote control 860 878 Function configuration LINKING eS MINIMUM E Minimum remote control ri dB GOWN TE n dB down remote control ssusuus Next minimum Next minimum remote control 861 864 Next peak nate tette tere retia Next peak remote control AES is NOISG Noise measurement seseereierrieirrerrrierrrerrrnerreee Noise measurement remote control ae xq 457 Peak remote control susssss Peak list remote control Phase noise measurement seisieee terrere 462 Phase noise measurement remote control 883 eio 260 447 mier iota roro eT Positioning remote control ssssss Querying position remote n Remote Control issiria Search remote control sessusssssss Setting center frequency ES Setting reference level sss lte CIR EE Signal count remote control Softkeys AM Modulation Depth 244 Softkeys TOI ciii ient cree dete Spectrogram remote control Spectrograms cierre tete State rnc nmi Rr Step size Step size remote control Ur c Table evaluation method eg Table remote Control sessssssssss He CR
394. eeeasabes 429 1033 R amp S FSW Index SONKCY M 427 Spectrograms sss 414 427 428 432 iU Ud lore p 415 Colors Assigning to object sesssssseeee 543 Configuring 2 PIE Editing qnt edes Editing remote Predefined 4 iiir er tet fuerat lg er Printing E ni ResStonNg EE 544 Scheme Spectrogram cc ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 429 Screen e ay Screenshots 4 ice ener 510 SOfKEY T 510 User defined ES UE Color scheme Spectrogram te eet Ree 414 COMM el m 566 ell EE 559 Colon Sr COMMA EE 566 Command line structure esses 566 Common n Neel Ee Le EE 566 Instrument control 2 ettet eene 559 Overlapping E QUESTION MarK cases cernit nets erri Eet Quotation mark cece cece esses SCPI confirmed i Sequential 2 5 Er eet iita ences Syntax elements A Tracking et VIE Command sequence Recommendation sse 586 POMOTE E 622 Comment Gate ranges statistics ssssssssss 216 Bug UE 483 Screerishiots cL aaiae 510 Softkey js Tiransducer lines r rere here 521 Common commands Kc qe 560 Compatibility FSQ FSP FSU FSV entente rere ee 595 GPIB La Bye MOdG 5a ctae ada A Transducer lines ech Compatible mode channel setting
395. een implemented in a way to ensure a sufficiently high degree of corre spondence with the original This includes the support of syntax rules for not only newer device families B and E models but for the previous A family as well In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R amp S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation After the introduction this section includes the following topics IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 963 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 12 2 1 d User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Set of Models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 12004 s 964 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models M MEE E 987 Special Behavior of Commande TEE 988 Model Dependent Default Settirigs iiec tenant di ertet a Rusa 989 Data Output Fols E 990 Trace Data Output Formialts eterne renean ena a aaa na 990 Trace Data Input FORMA cs tere reete te e e Las d ne FR aged ees n etd te dta atte 991 GPIB Status Reportihg eerie te e i ek e d 991 Command Set of Models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 71209A As with the original units the R amp S FSW includes the command set of the A models in the command set of the B m
396. eeteseteeeees 226 Measuring i Restricting range esssssseeesenee 224 Results nett err 223 224 Time frames Configuring si eii eoe rer oett erectae 374 Continulrig i rota ie ci ferc rr re einen 374 Navigating sh Per SWECD EE 374 Selecting atit 374 426 ed ee Il 413 Time lines Remote control enn rtt 893 Time stamps Softkey Spectrogram sssssssssss 427 SPOCirOGrains ssia aae adiere de EEN 427 Time trigger Repetition interval sss 387 SOfIKOy o onto Dentaire esie rere ese eee 387 About the measurement sese 233 BASICS Calculation method sd o COMMQUNING EE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index DDeterminitig coco tette e acer ie xe trier e gri 239 UE ll MG Measurement s Programming example sss 734 aC M Search signals TOI marker functions sessssssseeeee 72 Toolbar Hiding restoring AA 538 au M M 36 Total Harmonic Distortion Measurement siirroista 230 Touch screen Aligonment 513 522 523 546 547 Colors 541 542 Colors remote eee trece rtu ee 943 De Activating orent enn 536 Displayed items 2 537 OVOIVIOW 35 Power Save adani 537 Settings we 535 Settings rem
397. efined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 802 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 8 8 Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe lt State gt This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Range 1 2 on page 329 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band def inition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration on page 328 See Harmonic Order on page 329 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should
398. efore the command was sent since the instru ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 568 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Example Overlapping command with OPC The instrument implements INITiate IMMediate as an overlapped command Assuming that INITiate IMMediate takes longer to execute than OPC sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and after some time set ting the OPC bit in the ESR INIT OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep INIT OPC CLS However since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPCc is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another OPC command 10 1 6 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 10 2 Synchronization using OPC OPC and
399. elected et Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear EVENt parts of the regis yes yes ters Clear ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other reg isters with 1 Fill PTRansition parts with 1 yes yes Clear NTRansition parts Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing and yes yes yes input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer 10 1 8 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contrast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also chapter 10 1 6 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution on page 569
400. em KLOCK User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 994 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 13 Commands for Compatibility Supported 89600 commands SYSTem MESSage lt string gt SYSTem PRESet SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt SYSTem VERSion TRACe COPY lt src_trace gt lt dest_trace gt TRACe DATA TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACES TRACE6 definite length block comma separated ASCII data TRACe MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk TRIGger SEQuence DELay numeric TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe OFF ON O 1 TRIGger SEQuence EXTermal DELay numeric TRIGger SEQuence EXTermal LEVel numeric TRIGger SEQuence EXTermal SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff numeric TRIGger SEQuence IF DELay numeric TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel numeric TRIGger SEQuence IF SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediate VIDeo EXTernal lt 1 2 gt TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel numeric TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency freq Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CAL Culate LIMIt lt Ke TRACE m 995 DISPlayPWINDowsens S NN EE 996 DISPlay W
401. ement if CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum MODE is set to manual Note that e You can only use power classes for which limits are defined Suffix class 1 4 power class Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 180 See Adding or Removing a Power Class on page 180 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt LIMit STATe State This command selects the limit check mode for each power class LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 691 R amp S9 FSW Remote Commands PEHEMGNRGEN OMNCM PA nsm nn Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix class 1 4 power class Parameters lt State gt ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 180 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command define
402. en equated with the entire register ENABle The ENAB 1e part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENAB 1e bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENAB1e bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENAB Le bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENAB1e part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Contents of the Status Registers In the following sections the contents of the status registers are described in more detail IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 573 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation BEES Remote Control Basics Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrum
403. enisesccesebenstexsoceseecsseseadienesustienidoicesdebecsttonsezessecseabestasee 940 DISPlay ATAB DISPlay CMAP lt item gt DEFaubtzcolorsz AAA 944 DlSblav CMAb Memz HS 944 DISPlay CMAP item PDEFined 2 3 tre rer erm eet pee eer savers ERES PSY ee EE EX ede PERIERE DERE SIUE 945 RUE GE Ve el m 755 DISPlay FORMat ii civics E e me 940 DISPlay MTABle DISPlay PSAV6 HOL Do fi c cecc ccccsoscaeeasctcenssascetennsncennendcedensesteeeentocasansntseeentanannduchenteseasdenstetenensacseeaennernaesce RUE SEU ERR EE DISPlay SBAR STAT crinii aen a a aia a a ea aa ae a aaa araa aE eaS E PANERA DAREA DISPIay SKEYSSTATE onice nee eena ea e reet a ure eti e he T e ae ieee DlSblav TBARITSTATel DISPlay THEMe CATalog DISPlay THEMG SECC C P DISPlay TOUChs reen STAT iiic eb rear epe Gg sci enit ied ye caelata Pe eet aed ed d 942 DlSblav WINDow SGham CO or Draut 848 DlSblav WINDow SGham CO orlOWer rennene nenann nnr tnntnnrenerenrenarennnnacenn tnne nne rennene na 849 DlSblav WINDow SGham COLorGHAbe 849 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor UPPer DlSblav WiNDow SGham COLortSTvtel aaaeaii iaaa ep eha aiaiai saadanne 849 DiSblavfWiNDow nzlGLZE ee nnnenennnnn int rnns enn ress rn nrts set nnns idt nns sen rrt sien nnns sena 755 DISPISVEWINBOWSH T S TA EE 996 DiSblavlWiNDow cnzlTRACexvGbPACimng enne nennen nnn nnns eterna tin tnts shirts nnn
404. ensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man ual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or Sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt n lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 561 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation me J aaa Remote Control Basics Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified o Different numbering in remote control Some standards define a fixed numbering starting with 0 If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control it is indicated for the corresponding command Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the
405. ent Version 1 3 LXI Class C Computername FSW XXXXXX MAC Adress 00 E0 33 DA 01 14 IP Adress 10 114 11 88 Auto MDIX LXI Password LXI Manufacturer Description Curent beni EE 597 MEPS I EE 598 LX Manufacturer DescfiptiQll cce Eesbech n n ren tna qa tr RR Ege EE 598 LAN qe M 598 Current LXI Configuration Displays the current LXI information from the R amp S FSW read only Current ver Current LXI version sion LXI Class LXI device class Computer Name of the R amp S FSW as defined in the operating system see also name Computer Name on page 591 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 597 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation REESEN How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control MAC address Media Access Control address MAC address a unique identifier for the network card in the R amp S FSW IP address IP address of the R amp S FSW as defined in the operating system see also IP Address on page 591 Auto MDIX Enables the use of the built in Auto MDI X Ethernet functionality Remote command SYSTem LXI INFo on page 949 LXI Password Password for LAN configuration The default password is LxiWeblfc Remote command SYSTem LXI PASSword on page 949 LXI Manufacturer Description Instrument description of the R amp S FSW Remote command SYSTem LXI MDEScription on page 949 LAN Reset Resets the LAN configuration to its default
406. ent status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 10 3 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and speci fied in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control 3 QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENAB Le bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status w
407. eo CALOulate LIMit k LOWer SPACing esses eene nennen nen nnnr nennen sen rrns sen rrn sien rnt n nnn CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer TH eshold 899 CALCulate LIMitsk gt LOWer DATA ice tetro taroen rh ru cates sated ree eere rera ty ra ente ure rugs CAL Gulate EIMitSke EE E e LA CH RN VE GALECulate EIMIESKS TRACE iier riore ha erret m re Feet rer ya er E e EE ME re ERE Peter TERR UU CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECKk CAL Culate LIMItSk gt iUNIT ss teet repre porro t tr e n re e dE De eee rre eee ERR dd CAL Culatel IMt zk UbberMAhcGin nnne ener nennt nne t resi natns sen rrns inn nanena CALCUulate EIMit k UPPer MODBE i ies ene ore nee erae tnra tier aere era Pre Pa aea eee ao PE VE VERE EFE REN oS CAI Culate LIMit lt k gt UPPerOF FSet irai redeas aa ana eeben dE un E Ber Le UE CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing GALCulate EIMiteKk UPPeEF STATS ri rre tr rer ree Gini PEE E e AEE PESE ar Eaa aE east CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold CAL Culate LIMitsk gt UPPEr DATA 5 tee dnte ara reote e e Re e ree re reto dn i eere deg CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWEL I enne nennen nennen 739 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1014 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO eene 739 CAL CulateMAbkerEUNGCH
408. eps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 371 See Average Count on page 420 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 842 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EENEG Analyzing Measurements Basics SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters lt Mode gt viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to log arithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to aver aging After the averaging the data is converted back into its orig inal unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to li
409. equired to perform an ACLR measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 664 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mMAA as Configuring and Performing Measurements 11 5 3 9 Analyzing Measurement Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for ACLR measure ments Useful commands for channel power measurements described elsewhere CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 e TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 Remote commands exclusive to channel power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESuUlt PHZ eere 665 EE tee E Ee el 665 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ State This command selects the way the R amp S FSW returns results for power measurements You can query results with CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult Parameters State ON OFF ON Channel power density in dBm Hz OFF Channel power in dBm RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth Manual operation
410. er also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the figure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any com bination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 759 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this command the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 756 for a list of available window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When
411. er frequency e Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 394 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 792 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a ee Se Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 395 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automatically according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 792 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resettin
412. er lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRES6t cccsccceseeceeceseecceeeeececeeceeeeeees 643 CAL Culate nzM AbkermzFUNGCHonbOMer SGTANdardCATalog rere reee ne 644 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonPOWerSTANdard DEI ete 644 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE cesses 644 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet Standard This command loads a measurement configuration The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter channel bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected see Standard on page 121 different commands are required to configure ACLR measurements see chapter 11 5 3 7 Con figuring MSR ACLR Measurements on page 656 Parameters Standard For more information see chapter 5 2 8 Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 153 If you want to load a customized configuration the parameter is a string containing the file name User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 643 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 2 Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation See Standard on page 121 See Predefined Standards on page 121 See User Defined Standards on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog This command queries all files containing ACLR standards Return values lt Standards gt List of stan
413. er position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace GALCulatesms DELE Famarker lt m gt MAXIMUM LEFT tccc2 cecsctezcessssacdedersavaancueadeassindedecesa 867 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT 868 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese nennen 868 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt 868 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 868 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT 868 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumf DEA 869 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 869 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 ERREUR EA M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 867 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m E QO MM HXPH PHH A m Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value
414. eration See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative STATe State This command turns the relative limit check for the specified gap CACLR channel on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Suffix gap 112 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 REL STAT ON Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for a gap CACLR channels in an MSR ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT QUES ACPL status registry see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 578 ERREUR RA I E MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 658 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 8 i Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix lt gap gt 1 2 irrelevant Return values lt LowerGap1 gt The command returns the results for the four gap channels for lt UpperGap1 gt each gap max 4
415. erforming Measurements SENSe LIST RANGe LIMit STATe This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Check on page 203 SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop on page 203 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt POINts Points This command defines the number of sweep points in a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Points For more information on sweep points see chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 366 RST 691 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt RLEVel lt RefLevel gt This command defines the reference level for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 706 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEHEMGBRGENEOREEMCOM P n gpe
416. ers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal Manual Trigger This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem TRG corresponds to the INITiate IMMediate command see INI Tiate IMMediate on page 635 Usage Event TST self TeST query Triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument 0 indicates no errors occured Usage Query only WAI WA to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 622 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application 11 4 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application The following commands are required to select the operating mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 4 Applications and Operating Modes on page 88 e Selecting the Mode and Applications EE 623 e Performing a Sequence of Measurements rennan nnne ene 628 e Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements 630 11 4 1 Selecting the Mode and Applications pic yp 623 INSTromentGREateDUPLicale audies eege 6
417. es information about the hardware and software components Return values lt Information gt String containing the version of hardware and software compo nents including the types of licenses for installed firmware options LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 951 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Example DIAG SERV VERS Queries the version information Response Instrument Firmware 1 10 BIOS FSW Analyzer BIOS V1 03 1 32 4 3 IPC10 Image Version 1 2 0 PCI FPGA 9 01 SA FPGA 2 43 MB FPGA 2 0 8 0 SYNTH FPGA 3 9 0 0 REF FPGA 3 4 0 0 Data Sheet Version 01 00 Time Control Management active Analog Demod K7 permanent Usage Query only SCPI confirmed SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL This command deletes all contents of the System Messages table Example SYST ERR CLE ALL Usage Event SYSTem ERRor EXTended lt MessageType gt lt ChannelName gt This command queries all system messages or all messages of a defined type displayed in the status bar for a specific measurement channel application Note This command queries the strings displayed for manual operation For remote programs do not define processing steps depending on these results Instead query the results of the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO status register which indi cates whether messages of a certain type have occurred see STATus QUEStiona ble EXTended INFO Register on page 579
418. eshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 900 RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 483 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME Name This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Parameters Name String containing the limit line name RST REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation See Name on page 483 CALCulate LIMit k UNIT Unit This command defines the unit of a limit line Parameters Unit DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere DB DBUV M DBUA_M unitless If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing val ues or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 900 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 484 ERREUR RA N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 900 R amp S
419. essed in the service request routine The variables userN and userM must be pre assigned usefully Public SUB Srq ON ERROR GOTO noDevice No user existing CALL viReadSTB analyzer STB Serial poll read status byte F STB gt 0 THEN This instrument has bits set in the STB ROFOUNDS 1 F STB AND 16 gt 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue n F STBS AND 4 gt 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler F STB AND 8 gt 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus F STB AND 128 gt 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus F STB AND 32 gt 0 THEN CALL Esrread SS TQ M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1002 Programming Examples END IF noDevice END SUB End of SRQ routine REM X Xkkckckck ck kk Ck kk kk kk kk Ck kk kk kk kk kk Ck kc k ck ck ck ck ck kck ck k ck ck k ck ck ck kc kckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck KK Public Sub Srq Try Dim mySTB As Short mbSession ReadStatusByte Serial poll read status byte Console WriteLine Reading Service Request Routine mySTB ToString If mySTB 0 Then This instrument has bits set in the STB If mySTB And 16 gt 0 Then Call Outputqueue If mySTB And 4 gt 0 Then Call ErrorQueueHandler If mySTB And 8 gt 0 Then Call Questionablestatus If mySTB And 128 gt 0 Then Call Operationstatus If mySTB And 32 gt 0 Then Call Esrread End If Catch exp As Exception Console
420. esults are invalid Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 286 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 287 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements SS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 827 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level f
421. esults are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 286 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 832 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a a Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 287 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 287 Triggering with Power Sensors SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe esses nennen h nnn nnne 833 ISENS amp J PMETereps TRIGger HOLD conte tcn tte eo entes nan tuens 833 SENSe PMETersps TRIGger HYS Teresis ien eren htec noeh danh dna de Eaa 834 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel esses eene nnne rere hr ninh nnns 834 SENS amp e PMETereps TRIGger SLOPE inisinia hniena e ta enu ruth td n tad este 835
422. eters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 449 See Defining a Reference Point on page 463 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 449 See Defining a Reference Point on page 463 Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 879 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 8 Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described
423. example we will load the hardware settings from the configuration file Spectrum dfl to a new Spectrum2 channel Folgende zeile hat maximale l nge 01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 MEMM LOAD TYPE NEW Specifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing Spectrum channel MMEM SEL CHAN HWS ON Selects only hardware settings to be loaded MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum dfl to a new channel The new channel is named Spectrum2 to avoid a naming conflict with the existing Spectrum channel INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the loaded channel to Spectrum3 Printing toaFile HCOP DEST MMEM Prints the data to a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Selects bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER Screenshot bmp Selects the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Prints all screen elements HCOP ITEM WIND TEXT ACLRResults Adds a comment to the printout HCOP Configuring the R amp S FSW Stores the printout in a file called Screenshot bmp HCOP NEXT Stores the printout in a file called Screenshot_001 bmp 11 9 6 6 Printing on a Printer HCOP DEST2 SYST COMM PRIN Prints the data on a printer SYST COMM PRIN ENUM FIRS SYST COMM PRIN ENUM Returns the available printers e g LASER on LPTI1 mt
424. f Readings on page 288 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 287 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 831 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS Ea a ee ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 288 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 285 See Select on page 286 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the r
425. f the specified gap channel in dBm lt Reserved gt Ignored Example CALC LIM ACP GAP2 ABS 44 2dBm 0 Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified gap CACLR channel on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Suffix gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 657 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EMG CC R R M U U J mm Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative lt Limit gt Reserved This command defines the relative limit of the specified gap CACLR channel The ref erence value for the relative limit is the measured channel power If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix lt gap gt 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters lt Limit gt Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB lt Reserved gt Ignored Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 REL 3dB 0 Manual op
426. ful commands for general display settings described elsewhere DISPlay MTABle on page 860 Remote commands exclusive to general display settings DISPlay ANNotatton FEREOuency enne nennen nennen nensis nsn anaa sisi sisi nenii 940 DISP FORMA TU aei 940 BISPlay PSAVSHOLDOf cuce tees eatin Wine ee ea 941 DISP PSAVe STATE e 941 DISPlay SBAR STATe nat ciam tn t rta aa d 941 REES EEN VE 942 DISPlay CTT dh tanta tette tette tet tet tnde tata nd ta tea tata tate tat abad 942 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe irecceieeeecuc sed k eren noun eben ke a n RE eon Re ke R ER eu ca eR Ra RENE 942 DISPlayEVVIN Dow TIME ees ee NEESS dee 942 BISPlayEWINBOow ETIME FORMAL aaa aaa aa E eu once aad eee 943 SYSTembISPlay PPANeI STAT6L inert tee coe Ern t ane enn haee ceat 943 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency State This command turns the label of the x axis on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN FREQ OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Diagram Footer Annotation on page 539 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 940 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels See chapter 4 1 R amp S MultiV
427. functions Sek Calibration measurement settings 305 Channel bar information sssseesssss 301 Connections ET Coupling frequencies esee ug mH Generators supported ep IntetfaGe 12 iii tee ete ee nei ele ye Interface settings e cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeaee Normalizing oye OVGROAGIAG ci 2 n cates seii eite nca seen recente egets Recalling calibration settings 309 Reference level Reference line Reference line position esses 309 Reference line value Zeg Reference position sess Reference trace Reference value Sp Reflection measurement sss 293 Reflection open measurement s eeeseeseenrne 308 Reflection short measurement i i Remote Conttol iiid ire tea aaia ripe m Transducer factor Transmission measurement 293 308 TTL synchronization eerren reren 292 External mixer CORnectot c i dece DRE 46 External Mixer B21 sss 318 327 2 port vs 3 port Activating remote control sssessssss 799 Band 2 5 einen dde Basic settings Bias CUFtenL eh derer rre bites oer is Configuration Connector EN Conversion loss AA 329 Conversion loss tables ssusss 321 333 Frequency range Ge
428. g Basic Measurement Parameters e SENSe AVERage n STATe t on page 843 SENSe AVERage n TYPE on page 843 Remote commands exclusive to configuring sweeps SENSe SWEep COUNL cette tentent tenete teet teet t test dot 771 SENSeJSWEGp OP TINIZG caccia a nane taies eaae aE eue DeAR 771 Ee rrr eth eet aero a nee ees 772 SENSe SWEep TIME cscseseseeecscsssesecscecscessevacscecsessavanssesacavanssesesacavansvenseeesavaneveeseees 772 ISENSelSwWEep TIME AUTO 773 BENSe SWEep TYPE cette ttti t tt ttt t t ta ta ak 773 ISENSelSwWEep TepE USED ttt tette teet tette na 773 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT ccce 773 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI
429. g the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 395 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 395 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 795 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 396 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 793 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESS Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 795 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exce
430. g to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value e DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command e UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN e INF NINF SSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 564 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation me eae Remote Control Basics INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses e NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instrument response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 5E9 Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum
431. generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the frequency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 6 5 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 A Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RV
432. ges the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 900 Manual operation See Shift y on page 485 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 484 See Y Axis on page 484 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 900 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 481 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines ERREUR RA I E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 899 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C T U H up Ne Analyzing Measurements Basics The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Parameters Thr
433. gging ScpiLog txt OFF RST OFF Manual operation See O Logging on page 593 SYSTem SHUTdown This command shuts down the R amp S FSW Usage Event 11 10 2 Configuring the Reference Frequency I SENSe amp JIROSCEIllatorO TO eld AEEEEN ENEE a a eege REES daa 931 SENSE ee ee ES 931 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency eese 932 SEN E Ee cC OO n Em 932 SENSe ROSCIllator SOURCE EAUTO EE 933 ISENSet ROSCOE SY d TEE 933 SENSe ROSCillator O100 State If enabled a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHZ con nector Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ROSC 0100 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 517 SENSe ROSCillator O640 lt State gt If enabled a 640 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ con nector Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example ROSC 0640 ON User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 931 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEEMGNEGEN ONCE P mu Configuring the R amp S FSW Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 517 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator
434. gital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register The STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register contains information about the results of a limit check during ACLR measurements A separate ACPLimit register exists for each active channel You can read out the register withsTATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition or STATu Table 10 7 Bit No s QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register Meaning ADJ UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel ADJ LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel ALT1 UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel ALT1 LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel ALT2 UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel ALT2 LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel ALT3 11 LOWer UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 11 CACLR FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the gap CACLR channels 8to 14 Unused 15 Th
435. gnal Tracking on page 351 See Signal Tracking State on page 351 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack BANDwidth lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in the signal tracking process Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Range 10 Hz to Max span RST span 10 on activating the function Default unit Hz Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 351 See Tracking Bandwidth on page 351 LSS I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 766 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 2 11 7 2 1 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack THReshold Level This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command Parameters Level The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 120 dBm Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 351 See Tracking Threshold on page 351 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace on which the largest signal is searched for Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Range 1 to 6 RST 1 Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 351 See Signal Track Trace on page 351 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings The commands required to configure th
436. gt 1 3 gate range Parameters lt Time gt The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod The following rules apply the stop time may not be higher than the length of the gate the stop time may not be lower than the start time The reset values depend on the gate range for gate range 1 the stop time is 1 ms for gate range 3 the stop time is 3 ms for gate range 5 the stop time is 5 ms Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 216 Scaling the Diagram The following commands set up the diagram for statistical measurements I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 715 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a ee es Configuring and Performing Measurements CAL GulatesmssSTATISpS TE 716 GAL Culate lt n gt STATistics SCALE AUTO ONGE 2 rentre ENEE 716 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexbRaNGe 717 GALGulate n STATistics SCALeSCRLEWel 22 2 tiae rr aenean puedas na nae Sd sh ENEE 717 GAECulatesmsSTATIsties SCALeo C Be E 717 CAL Culate lt n STATisties SCALE E WEE 717 GALGulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer cec caaates eei at Ren nene na Renan aaa 718 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scale of the diagram x and y axis e Reference level x axis 0 0 dBm e Display ra
437. gy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers smsan S E ELE LEE ELEM 15 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 rede de dressed N we N ja a je o HM o we 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0 15 14 JE EVENt part 3 2 1 0 Logic OR of all bits Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits 15 14 13 12 ENABle part 3 2 1 0 Fig 10 2 The status register model Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 572 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 7 3 Remote Control Basics CONDition The CONDition partis written into directly by the hardw
438. hannel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 625 Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW MWCD 3G FDD UE K73 TD SCDMA BTS BTDS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW MTDS TD SCDMA UE K77 cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW BC2K CDMA2000 BTS K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW MC2K CDMA2000 MS K83 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exis
439. he TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost HiSLIP Protocol The HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol is the successor protocol for VXI 11 for TCP based instruments specified by the IVI foundation The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection one for fast data transfer the other for non sequential control commands e g Device Clear or SRQ HiSLIP has the following characteristics e High performance as with raw socket network connections e Compatible IEEE 488 2 support for Message Exchange Protocol Device Clear Serial Poll Remote Local Trigger and Service Request e Uses a single IANA registered port 4880 which simplifies the configuration of fire walls e Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking mech anisms e Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks EE RU TU N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 556 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics diate return as opposed to VXI 11 where each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command but is delivered to the
440. he instrument INIT CONT OFF D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 731 11 5 11 11 5 11 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Turns on the harmonic distortion measurement CALC MARK FUNC HARM NHAR 3 Defines three harmonics to be found CALC MARK FUNC HARM BAND AUTO OFF Turns off automatic bandwidth selection CALC MARK FUNC HARM PRES Determines the ideal configuration INIT WAI Initiates the measurement and finishes the sweep CALC MARK FUNC HARM LIST Queries the position of the harmonics CALC MARK FUNC HARM DIST TOT Queries the total harmonic distortion Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point Determining the EE 732 e Programming Example Measuring the TOL 734 Determining the TOI All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements are described here Useful commands for TOI measurements described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DE T Tamarker lt m gt X on page 858 Lr CALCulate lt n gt DI Tamarker m X RELative on page 870 CALCulate lt n gt DE T Tamarker lt m gt Y on page 870 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 871 Remote commands exclusive to TOI measurements CAL Culate nzM AbkercmzFUNGCHon TOtSTATel reren enorornrnne nene 733 CALCulat
441. he reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 336 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 335 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked
442. he time stamp of all frames sorted in a descending order Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 847 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SSS MS ILIEEEILIILIZEU ILECIIEGILILLINENLLLILNLLNLULLLIIILIILILD C OO emt Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 427 CALCulate SGRam TSTamp STATe State This command activates and deactivates the time stamp If the time stamp is active some commands do not address frames as numbers but as relative time values CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe on page 876 CALCulate MARKer m SGRam FRAMe on page 872 CALCulate SGRam FRAMe SELect on page 846 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 427 CALCulate SGRam STATe State This command turns the spectrogram on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR ON Activates the Spectrogram result display Manual operation See State on page 426 Configuring the Color Map DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor DEFault sessi ener nnns 848 DISPlay WINDew SGRam COLorLEOWBTE 21 21 iege eeu tud qae vence Ete bec daa ana aao duin s 849 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLOrSHAJPe ect tote en teo eeu ea ENEE NNN as 849 DISPlay WINDow SGRam COLor UPPer eese eene e enne ennemis 849 bI
443. he transition and enable registers are set In addition the service request event must be enabled in the VISA session Initiate Service Request REM Example of initialization of the SRO in the case Of errors s lt lt PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ CALL CALL STAT OPER nstrWrite GLS analyzer SRE 168 STAT QUES and ESR analyzer Reset status reporting system nstrWrite Enable service request for register CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and query error CALL analyzer STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for nstrWrite all events CALL nstrWrite analyzer STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits CALL analyzer STAT QUES ENAB 32767 nstrWrite Set questionable enable bits for all events CALL nstrWrite analyzer STAT QUES PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits CALL viEnableEvent analyzer VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI QUEUE 0 Enable the event for service request User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 998 Programming Examples Status viWaitOnEvent analyzer VI EVENT SERVICE REQ SROWaitTimeout VI NULL VI NULL IF status VI SUCCESS THEN CALL Srq If SRQ is recognized gt subroutine for evaluation END SUB REM kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk Ck kk kk kk Ck kk ck Ck ck ck kk
444. header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instru ment must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some com mands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP o Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow param eter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ONrefers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to chapter 10 1 5 3 SCPI Parameters on page 563 Example Definition HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 562 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the comma
445. hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities of the R amp S FSW It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out You can read out the register with STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERati on EVENt User Manual 1173 9411 02 Se 575 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation DREES Remote Control Basics Table 10 5 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus OPERation register Bit No
446. hich can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller 5 ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register 6 MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENAB Le bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE As with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll see Parallel Poll on page 584 or using the com mand IST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 574 R amp S
447. iating the measurement Thus measurement times are kept as low as possible If you synchronize the measurement with OPC the R amp S FSW produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual meas urements has been performed ES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 752 Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured For more information on querying the results see SENSe LIST POWer RESult Parameters lt Frequency gt lt RBW gt MeasTime lt TriggerSource gt lt TriggerLevel gt lt TriggerOffset gt lt Detector gt lt OfPulses gt Return values lt PowerLevel gt Defines the pulse frequency Range 0 to Fmax Default unit Hz Defines the resolution bandwidth Defines the measurement time Range 1us to 30s EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 VIDeo Selects a trigger source For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Meas urements Defines a trigger level The trigger level is available for the video trigger In that case the level is a percentage of the diagram height In case of an external trigger the R amp S FSW uses a fix TTL level Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Defines the trigger delay Range Os to 30s RST 0s Default unit s Selects the detector and therefore the way th
448. icate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess lt Number gt Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters lt Number gt Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 304 ERREUR RA ART M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 818 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS SSS a ee ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface lt Type gt Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Parameters lt Type gt GPIB TCPip RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 304 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK lt Type gt This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa rately a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on pag
449. ice footprint can be created automatically e Error Log The RSError 10g file in the log directory of the main installation direc tory contains a chronological record of errors e Support file a zip file with important support information can be created automat ically The zip file contains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display See also chapter 9 3 5 Service Functions on page 528 To collect the support information 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select Service R amp S Support and then Create R amp S Support Information The file is stored as C R_S instr user service zip Attach the support file to an e mail in which you describe the problem and send it to the customer support address for your region as listed at the beginning of the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual o Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped e g due to damage during delivery observe the notes described in chapter 3 1 1 1 Unpacking and Checking the Instru ment on page 19 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1012 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit List of remote commands base unit PCA m 619 CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz FUNGC ontMEasurement DE Techor 737 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEas
450. idth on page 157 See Channel Bandwidth on page 162 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel Name This command defines a name for the adjacent channel For MSR ACLR measurements the channel names cannot be defined manually In this case this command is for query only Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel RST ADJ Manual operation See Channel Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt ch gt lt Name gt This command defines a name for an alternate channel For MSR ACLR measurements the channel names cannot be defined manually In this case this command is for query only Parameters lt Name gt String containing the name of the channel RST ALT lt 1 11 gt Manual operation See Channel Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel lt ch gt lt Name gt This command defines a name for a transmission channel Parameters lt Name gt String containing the name of the channel RST TX lt 1 12 gt Manual operation See Channel Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the distance from transmission channel to adjacent channel LSS a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 646 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR CU RU RM RPMU m U N gr Configuring and Performing Measurements For MSR signals this command defines th
451. ientation The command selects the format of the print job The command is only available if the output device is a printer Suffix device 112 Printing device Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait RST PORTTait Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Device Setup on page 508 See Orientation on page 510 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe lt device gt State This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout Suffix device 112 Printing device Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 923 R amp S FSW Remote Commands aS SS A mH Managing Settings and Results SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt This command queries the name of the first available printer To query the name of other installed printers use SYysTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT Return values lt PrinterName gt String containing the name of the first printer as defined in Win dows If the command cannot find a printer it returns an empty string Usage Query only Manual operation See Device Setup on page 508 See Printer Name on page 510 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT This command queries the name of available printers You have to use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt for this command to work properly Ret
452. iererrrrerrrreseee e 99 Continuous Dween 245 373 Copy Trace CP ACLR Settings s sene 120 CP ACLR Standard liaere 121 131 Device Device Setup idinaan eais 508 Display CONTIG WE 397 Export a Export CONG iecore Leere emet eene 501 Exterrial eiiim nete bete ne rana Frame count e Fre amp RUM e Frequency Config sss 347 Full Span ni i Gated Trigger ice Harmonic RBW Auto ssssese Harmonic Sweep Time 2 History De pty inrer ctn rete Horizontal Line 1 2 2 enne IF Power o alen RE Input Source Config esses Install Printer T eaS4 um M East Spa xu eio etr vete sett le E trea dE Line Config x List evaluation sess sss Lower Level Hysteresis 396 Marker 1 2 3 a Marker 1 2 3 4 acetic iiiter ete tet cote t deg Marker Config oscinina eere teret Arai Marker Search Area Marker Search Type s sse 455 Marker to Trace ecrire ees 261 448 Meastime Auto Meastime Manual n EN MSR Configuration is Se eg Next MI errore ra ito e aasar ECER Next MOJE X i nent rrr rerit rea Next Mode Y Se zi Next PO AK eec ET INO OF Harmoriics 2 5 ere ie trie iter aa Noise cancellation 124 133 359 Norm Delt eene tie 260 447 461 Outputs Config creciente teinte 341 Peak p o Percent Marker EE 21
453. iew on page 89 SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff lt Minutes gt This command defines the time until the R amp S FSW turns the display power save mode on Parameters lt Minutes gt Minutes until power save mode starts Note that the number you enter may have no dimension Range 1 to 100 RST 15 Example DISP PSAV HOLD 30 Manual operation See Display Power Save Function on page 537 DISPlay PSAVe STATe lt State gt This command turns the power save mode of the display on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP PSAVe ON Switches on the power save mode Manual operation See Display Power Save Function on page 537 DISPlay SBAR STATe lt State gt This command turns the status bar on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SBAR OFF Manual operation See Status Bar on page 538 T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 941 R amp S FSW Remote Commands au OC nn Configuring the R amp S FSW DISPlay SKEYs STATe State This command turns the softkey bar on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SKEY OFF Manual operation See Softke
454. iggerOffset gt lt GateLength gt This command defines global List Evaluation parameters These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure The state of the first three parameters lt PeakPower gt lt RMSPower gt and lt AVGPower gt define the number of results for each frequency in the list Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command Parameters lt PeakPower gt ON OFF 0 1 Turns peak power evaluation on and off RST 1 lt RMSPower gt ON OFF 0 1 Turns RMS power evaluation on and off RST 0 lt AVGPower gt ON OFF 0 1 Turns average power evaluation on and off RST 0 lt TriggerSource gt EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IMMediate IFPower RFPower VIDeo Selects a trigger source For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Meas urements lt TriggerSlope gt NEGative POSitive Selects the trigger slop lt TriggerOffset gt Defines the trigger delay Range negative measurement time to 30 RST 0 Default unit s User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 748 R amp S FSW lt GateLength gt Remote Commands DESSERT Configuring and Performing Measurements Defines the gate length for gated measurements Setting 0 seconds turns gated measurements off To perform gated measurements the trigger source must be dif ferent from IMMediate Range RST SENSe LIST POWer STATe State 31 25 ns to 30s 0s This command turns the List Evalua
455. igures the R amp S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established You do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver USB address The used USB address string is USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR where e vendor ID is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz e product ID is the product ID for the R amp S instrument e cserial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument Example USB 0x0AAD 0x00C6 100001 INSTR OxOAAD is the vendor ID for Rohde amp Schwarz OxC6 is the product ID for the R amp S FSW13 100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI commands messages are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on con cepts and definitions of SCPI Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers VISA Libraries VISA is a
456. imit check Activating Deactivating CP ACLR MSR channels Results db ilh EH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1040 R amp S FSW Index Spurious Emissions sse 199 Spurious Emissions range sussssssss 203 Limit checks MSR activating EE 139 Ixemote control sipsirin iniiis 895 Limit lines Activating Deactivating sss 481 Band power marker ssssseeeseesessiririssieeseerrrrrnnnns 444 Comment Compatibility es 475 481 Ill rel 486 Copying Creating Data points EE 484 Deactivating s Prio E Deleting EE Deleting values DIC ge Editing uiii ath ere Inserting values Managing DEP E Margi a ran erii Eee eere pe cec bee ERU Margins och n ME PO Offsets Peak Search n ncc stereo tre de 162 452 456 Remote control nici reiten tetas 895 Saving Selectifig s ronem ere ce ER eee dat 481 Le EEN 169 486 Shifting SPUNOUS e M 486 Spurious Emissions sess 198 Threshold 2 Time Domain Power measurement 224 Traces T View filter EN KE TEE Viel X axis Limits Absolute SEM range sse Absolute Spurious Emissions range Sc o Relative SEM range ccccceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeseteeeeees
457. in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible formats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured values in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data Working with Markers The commands required to work with markers and marker functions in a remote envi ronment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 7 4 Marker Usage on page 435 In the Spectrum application markers are identical in all windows Thus the suffix lt n gt for the window is generally irrelevant e Setting Up Individual Markers AAA 856 e General Marker Seings eei enr acera er neo EEESE ENEE 860 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Search sese 861 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 855 11 8 3 1
458. in the time domain the current center frequency is used as the frequency of the first harmonic Thus the frequency search is bypassed The first harmonic frequency is set by a specific center frequency in zero span before the harmonic measurement is started Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Activates the harmonic distortion measurement Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 105 Configuring the Measurement The following commands control the harmonic distortion measurement Useful commands for harmonic distortion measurements described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 762 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 773 e P PQ User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 729 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 10 3 Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to harmonic distortion measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO eene 730 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmoniCs eee 730 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet eee 730 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO State This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect t
459. ing the channel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel Defining search limits CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 862 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 863 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 863 Performing the measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 Retrieving results CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Ich Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to occupied bandwidth measurements ISENSeJPOWer e nt E Ale EE 672 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth lt Percentage gt This command selects the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied band width Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 10 PCT to 99 9 PCT RST 99 PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT Manual operation See Power Bandwidth on page 161 11 5 5 2 Programming Example OBW Measurement This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in chap ter 5 4 5 Measurement Example on page 163 in a remote en
460. input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 778 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 776 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a es Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 357 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 357 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 357 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 357 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt
461. instrument e Anon dedicated network Ethernet connection from the instrument to an existing network made with an ordinary RJ 45 network cable The instrument is assigned an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same net work e Adedicated network connection Point to point connection between the instrument and a single computer made with a crossover RJ 45 network cable The computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the instrument The use of hubs switches or gateways is not required however data transfer is still User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 599 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 5 1 2 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control performed using the TCP IP protocol An IP address has to be assigned to the instru ment and the computer see chapter 10 5 1 2 How to Assign the IP Address on page 600 Note As the R amp S FSW uses a 1 GBit LAN a crossover cable is not necessary due to Auto MDI X functionality gt To establish a non dedicated network connection connect a commercial RJ 45 cable to one of the LAN ports To establish a dedicated connection connect a crossover RJ 45 cable between the instrument and a single PC If the instrument is connected to the LAN Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802 3u interface
462. io eeeeeeen eene 670 e Measuring the Occupied Bandwidt AAA 671 e Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eese tennis 673 e Measuring Spurious EImissiOrts uicti ek nr Ld en ee Lk dE uda 699 e Analyzing statistics APD GCDF icici cece ater eet NEESS 712 e Measuring the Time Domain Eemer iecore cette ree Rte I De ERR dud Ria 721 e Measuring the Harmonic DiSfortlon eode entered tbc dea 729 e Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point eese 732 e Measuring the AM Modulation Depth Aen 734 e Remote Commands for EMI Measurements esee eene 736 e NU MEE 745 e Measuring the Pulse POWGM 2 222 0cccdcesseeccnetassseeeeeeanaeeesaecenndenaedacetedenaesnanete 750 11 5 4 Performing Measurements LEE Poncho eT H 633 e Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep 636 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 8 a qe Configuring and Performing Measurements 11 5 1 1 Commands Useful commands for performing measurements described elsewhere e INITiate ESPectrum on page 674 e INITiate SPURious on page 700 Remote commands exclusive for performing measurements EN 633 NIESEN MESS icc 634 As LETT CON NIT 634 IMITiate IMMediate iiec deceret ececesnacadedeeesspandecedecdunpesdnassendededadeeeqe
463. is bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended register contains further status information not covered by the other status registers of the R amp S FSW A separate EXTended register exists for each active channel User Manual 1173 9411 02 Se 578 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt Table 10 8 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Reg ister 2 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO register contains information on the type of messages that occur during operation of the R amp S FSW A separate INFO register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO EVENt You can query all messages that occur for a specific channel using the command SySTem ERRor EXTended on page 952 Table 10 9 Meaning
464. is provided free of charge The functionality may change in a future version without notice IECWIN offers the following features Connection to instrument via several interfaces protocols GPIB VISA named pipe if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself RSIB Interactive command entry Browsing available commands on the instrument Error checking following every command Execution of command scripts Storing binary data to a file Reading binary data from a file Generation of a log file For command scripts IECWIN offers the following features Synchronization with the instrument on every command Checking expected result for query commands as string or numeric value Checking for expected errors codes Optional pause on error Nested command scripts Single step mode Conditional execution based on the IDN and OPT strings User Manuals You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the R amp S FSW User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 589 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation DREES Network and Remote Control Settings Starting IECWIN IECWIN is available from the Windows task bar on the R amp S FSW or by executing the following file C Program Files x86 Rohde Schwarz FSW lt 1 10 or higher gt iecwin32 exe You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop Simply copy the iecwin32 exe iecwin chm and rsib32 d11 files from the location above to the same folder on the ta
465. k power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 640 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation See Ch Power ACLR on page 103 See C N C No on page 103 See OBW on page 103 See Spectrum Emission Mask on
466. ker mz EUNGCnon DE Modulaton GE ec 892 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe sese 892 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe esee 880 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE sse 881 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion bake GOHT nennen nennen nnn nnn 881 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STAT sss eene nne nnner rennen 882 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion Fakel MMedatel 881 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 730 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DIS Tortton essen 731 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz FUNGCion HAhRMonice II 731 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion HAhRMonicehNHAbmonice 730 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion HAhMonice PE Get CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCion HAhRMonicelGSTATel nennen CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth RESult CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeees 735 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth S TATe essen 735 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmaary esses nennen ener nennen nint nn nena 751 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDoOwn sesseseseseeeeeene enne nnne nrnnri nn rnnr nennen nena 887 CAL
467. l 3 Select Submit How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the GPIB address The remote control address is factory set to 20 but it can be changed if it does not fit in the network environment For remote control addresses 0 through 30 are allowed The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings Setting the GPIB address 1 On the R amp S FSW press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey 3 In the Network Remote dialog box select the GPIB tab 4 Inthe GPIB Address field enter a value between 0 and 30 Remote command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma nently no special measures are necessary Windows automatically detects the interrup tion of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instrument is switched on If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password proceed as described in Reactivating the automatic login mechanism on page 607 How to Log on to the Network Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and password in a login window You can set up two types of user accounts either an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer domain or a standard user account with limited
468. l If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Emulating Other Instruments Commands The R amp S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of several HP and PSA instruments For details see chapter 10 2 GPIB Languages on page 587 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 959 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 12 1 Emulating Other Instruments Commands e Setting up Instrument Emulatton nm nnns 960 e Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models eee 963 e Reference Command Set of Emulated PSA Model 991 Setting up Instrument Emulation The following commands are required to set up the use of commands to emulate other instruments SY SNIP COU PMN EE 960 SYS TenmlPGainiMO Em 960 28 CSU ET E 961 Sy SIGPSAWIDGDOMG DL 961 SYSTemn REVISIDWIFADTODy cito ede eden deel adds eae 962 SY Srem EE EE 962 SON SIME RVG oe os PM 963 SYSTem HPCoupling lt CouplingType gt Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for e span and resolution bandwidth Span RBW and e resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth RBW VBW For FSP FSW the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used As a result in most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SyYSTem LANGuage on page 961 Parameters lt CouplingType gt HP FSP RST FSP Examp
469. l SBLock1 CENTer CHANnell 1 226GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 CENTer CHANnel2 1 230GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 CENTer CHANnel3 1 234GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnell WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnel2 WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnel3 GSM SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnell 2 5MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnel2 2 5MHZ Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnel3 2 5MHZ a Configuring SUBBLOCK B SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TXCHannel COUNt 1 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 FREQuency CENTer 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 RFBWidth 4MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 CENTer CHANnell 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TECHnology CHANnell LTE 1 40 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 BANDwidth CHANnell 3 25MHZ Ji Configuring SUBBLOCK C SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 TXCHannel COUNt 2 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 FREQuency CENTer 1 268GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 RFBWidth 8MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 CENTer CHANnell 1 266GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 CENTer CHANnel2 1 270GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 BANDwidth CHANnell 2 75MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock3 BANDwidth CHANnel2 2 75MHZ Configuring ADJ channels SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ACHannel 1 60MHZ
470. l Track HP 856xE available MKTRACK 1 0 HP 8566B MKTRACK HP 8568B HP 8594E MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP Marker type HP 856xE available MK TYPE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E ML Mixer level HP 856xE available MOV MOV TRA TRB TRC Move Trace Contents HP 856xE available TRA TRB T RC HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E MPY Multiply HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 978 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _e M i aM Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models MTO MTO Marker Track Off HP 8566A available HP 8568A MT1 MT1 Marker Track On HP 8566A available HP 8568A MXMH MXMH TRA TRB Maximum Hold HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E NORMALIZE NORMALIZE Normalize trace HP 856xE not available HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E NRL NRL lt numeric_value gt Normalized Reference HP 856xE available DB DM Level HP 8566B NRE HP 8568B HP 8594E NRPOS NRPOS Normalize position HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HP 8566B NEE HP 8568B HP 8594E O1 O1 Format ASCII Values O HP 8566A available to 4095 HP 8568A O2 O2 Format Binary HP 8566A available Values 0 to 4095 HP 8568A O3 O3 Format ASCII HP 8566A available HP 8568A OA OA Output All HP 8566A available HP 8568A OL OL 80 characters Output Learn String HP 8566A available OL HP 8568A OT OT
471. l commands for details on the commands refer to chapter 11 12 2 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models on page 963 If the repeated sweep is OFF the marker is set without sweep ing before Note In single sweep mode switch off this setting before you set the marker via the E1 and MKPK HI commands in order to avoid sweeping again ERREUR E I E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 595 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation EEN Network and Remote Control Settings This setting is only available if a HP language is selected see Language on page 595 Remote command SYSTem RSW on page 963 Coupling Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for e span and resolution bandwidth Span RBW e resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth RBW VBW For FSx the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used As a result in most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP This setting is only available if a HP language is selected see Language on page 595 Remote command SYSTem HPCoupling on page 960 Wideband This setting defines which option is returned when the oPT query is executed depend ing on the state of the wideband option It is only available for PSA89600 emulation Off No wideband is used The option is indicated as B7J 40 MHz The 40 MHz wideband is used The option is indicated as B7J 140 80 MHz The 80 MHz wideband is used The opti
472. l network settings are defined in the Network tab of the Network Remote dialog box User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 590 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 8 Network and Remote Control Settings Risk of network problems All parameters can be edited here however beware that changing the computer name has major effects in a network For details see chapter 10 5 1 How to Configure a Network on page 599 For step by step instructions see chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 598 For details on setting up the R amp S FSW for remote control see chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 598 Network GPIB Compatibility LXI ee ro eeiccm alice FSVW XXXXXX IP Adress 10 114 11 88 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Open Dialog Network Configuration Computer Name 2 5 0 crendede NEE sna Neh e ENERO ea REES 591 Seele 591 wit CN 592 DHCP U 592 Network Conflglallor oca po teer eher nre Dr ERE t Ed 592 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error message is displayed in the status line IP Address Defines the IP address The TCP IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address 10 0 0 10 If
473. l programs for instru ments of this series Therefore in response to a query the R amp S FSW returns data of the same structure as that used by the original instruments this applies in particular to the number of characters returned Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output Display Units command O1 and physical values command O2 O3 or TDF P As to the Display Units format the level data of the R amp S FSW is converted to match the value range and the resolution of the 8566 8568 series Upon transition to the REMOTE state the R amp S FSW is recon figured such that the number of test points trace points corresponds to that of the 85xx families 1001 for 8566A B and 8568A B 601 for 8560E to 8565E 401 for 8594E 11 12 2 6 Trace Data Output Formats All formats are supported for trace data output display units command O1 display units in two byte binary data command O2 or TDF B and MDS W display units in one byte binary data command O4 or TDF B and MDS B and physical values commands O3 or ERREUR RA NE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 990 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 12 2 7 11 12 2 8 11 12 3 Emulating Other Instruments Commands TDF P With format display units the level data is converted into value range and res olution of the 8566 8568 models On transition to REMOTE state the number of trace points are reconfigured in order to be conform to the selected instrument model 10
474. le BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 214 See RBW on page 264 See Res BW CISPR on page 265 See Res BW MIL on page 265 See Preview on page 384 See RBW on page 384 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 264 See Default Coupling on page 371 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 1 Manual operation See Span RBW on page 370 IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 768 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE FilterType This command selects the resolution filter type When you change the filter type the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter The EMI specific filter types are available ifthe EMI R
475. le SYSTem HPC HP Manual operation See Coupling on page 596 SYSTem IFGain MODE Mode Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth 300 kHz and is only available if a HP language is selected using SySTem LANGuage EEUU RU N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 960 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS A nu ten Emulating Other Instruments Commands Parameters Mode NORM PULS NORM Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to refer ence level PULS Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level RST NORM Example SYST IFG MODE PULS Manual operation See IF Gain on page 595 SYSTem LANGuage Language This command defines the system language For details see chapter 10 2 GPIB Languages on page 587 Note as of firmware version 1 60 this command is also used to emulate previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers making the SYST COMP command obsolete Note For PSA89600 emulation the option is indicated as B7J for the OPT query B7J 140 if Wideband is activated Parameters Language SCPI 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565
476. le SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW See the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual for details Parameters State ON 1 User port is switched to INPut OFF 0 User port is switched to OUTPut RST 1 INPut UPORt VALue This command queries the control lines of the user ports Example INP UPOR Usage Query only Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are descri bed here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see chapter 6 2 5 1 Basics on External Mixers on page 318 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 798 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TASH SUING m 799 e Mixer IEN 801 e Conversion Loss Table Setilgg 1 e uice er tec eie ee rentrer EEN 805 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer sss 810 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer Eie Ec EE YI a iaa 799 SENSE IK ele DEE 799 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW ect ttt ttt tet ttt ttt tentat ttes 799 SENSG MINGR LOR 7 C 800 BENSE OK e eret e rdc er test eee uet ee e
477. liin inaidai 617 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 804 805 Conversion loss tables esses 333 Available remote control ssssssssss 807 Band remote control Bias remote control Configuring B21 2 eterna Creating dis e Deleting remote control ssssssesss 807 External Mixer B21 remote control 804 External Mixer B21 Harmonic order remote control 808 Importing External Mixer B21 333 Managing S Mixer type remote control susssssse 809 Saving External Mixer B21 sssssssss 336 Selecting remote control Shifting values External Mixer B21 336 Values External Mixer B21 sussussse 336 Copying Measurement channel remote 623 TICE wires Traces Softkey i COpy MACS iiec op eile ta cere eri diea codd Coupling Automatic external generator 299 306 Frequencies external generator 299 GPIB p deeg GPIB remote control Em Input remote eene Dee entretiens Manual external generator sss 306 1034 R amp S FSW Index Spamn RBW sirsiran ener re terit 364 VBWIRBW 5 5 tecp tn ttn tr n ir
478. lock Note that subblock ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels CACLR LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 662 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR CC a ees Configuring and Performing Measurements This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix sb 11213 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz Manual operation See Subblock Definition on page 136 See RF Bandwidth on page 137 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt TECHnology CHANnel lt ch gt Standard This command defines the technology used for transmission by the specified MSR Tx channel This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix sb 11213 4 5 Subblock number Parameters Standard GSM WCDMa LTE 1 40 LTE 3 00 LTE_5 OO LTE 10 00 LTE 15 OO0 LTE 20 00 USER Technology used for transmission GSM Transmission according to GSM standard WCDMa Transmission according to W CDMA standard LTE 1 40 LTE 3 OO0 LTE 5 OO LTE 10 OO LTE 15 00 LTE 20 00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel bandwidths USER User defined transmission no automatic preconfiguration possi ble Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137 See Technology Used for Transmission on page 138 SENSe
479. lows e The Negotiation configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings In general the Auto Detect mode is sufficient e ICMP Ping must be enabled to use the ping utility e VXI 11 is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN According to the standard LXI devices must use VXI 11 to provide a detection mechanism other additional detection mechanisms are permitted e mDNS and DNS SD are two additional protocols Multicast DNS and DNS Service Discovery They are used for device communication in zero configuration networks working without DNS and DHCP Ping Client Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the LXI compliant instrument and another device The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine whether the LAN connection is functional Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or router failures The ping utility is not password protected To initiate a ping between the LXI compliant instrument and a second connected device 1 Enable ICMP Ping on the Advanced LAN Configuration page enabled after an LCI 2 Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and without any further parameters into the Destination Address field e g 10 113 10 203 IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 604 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 5 1 5 10 5 2 10 5 3 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Contro
480. lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 See Hysteresis on page 289 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel Level This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger _LL_L_L_LLLL_ EE S e e 1LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLAAAALLLLLULILSMMM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 834 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 See External Trigger Level on page 288 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe lt Edge gt This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a positive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a nega tive edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page
481. lt LowerGap2 gt PASSED lt UpperGap2 gt Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed NONE No results available e g because limit checking was deactivated Example INIT IMM WAT CALC LIM ACP GAP2 RES PASSED PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Limit Checking on page 143 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth GAP lt gap gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the bandwidth of the specified MSR gap CACLR channel This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Suffix lt gap gt 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters lt Bandwidth gt numeric value in Hz RST 3 84 MHz Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Gap CACLR Channel Bandwidths on page 142 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa GAP lt gap gt Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the specified gap CACLR channel s weight ing filter Suffix lt gap gt 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number ERREUR EA ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 659 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS ee ed Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt Alpha gt Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Weighting Filters on page 142 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock
482. lt sb gt CHANnel lt ch gt Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the specified transmission channel s weight ing filter Suffix lt sb gt 1 2 3 4 5 Subblock number Parameters lt Alpha gt Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137 See Weighting Filters on page 138 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP gap State This command turns the weighting filter for the specified gap CACLR channel on and off Suffix gap 112 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Gap CACLR Channel Definition on page 142 See Weighting Filters on page 142 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe SBLock lt sb gt CHANnel lt ch gt State This command turns the weighting filter for the specified transmission channel on and off Suffix sb 11213 4 5 Subblock number LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 660 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS ss Ee ee ee ed Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST W CDMA ON other technologies OFF Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 137 See Weighting Filters on page 138 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount lt Number gt This command defines the number of subblocks i e groups of transmission channels in an MSR signal For more information see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard
483. m COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine lt Placeholder gt lt Type gt Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Currently not evaluated Return values Placeholder Currently not used Type Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 286 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE tenentes nnne nh nnne 827 CAL Culate nz PME Te
484. m PCLass class MAXimum esses eene rnnt nnn 692 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt MINimum CAL CulatellMtGbechum PDClass casszftEsgcCusivel 691 CAl Culate LIMitESPectr m RESTOFe iiit rettet iiiter tpe b eset io rone space eege EHE ERE SEN ones CAL Culate LIMit ESPectr m VALUe 2 iiie eese erede ces terno e capa ea Ekel CALOulate LIMit k CONTrol DOMain eesssssssssesseeeeeeee enne nnennnn nenne sen h nnns est rinn seen rents inna CAL CulateL lMitcksCONTolMODE enean e nenea CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTIol SHIPt cccsscsecsccvessessessveveavesscassansevccuesseasstscsscaconesssavscsscceesonssasscedeadentebcaversaceus CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA ccsscccsecesesecseecesceeenecsececesecensseceaeeceacecsanesscecseaeeanaessaaeesaeeneaaeaaaees CAL Culate LIMItSkS COPY du CAL Culate LIMitsk gt DEL te EE CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGIN ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaeeseseaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeseaeeeeeieeeeeeaeeeeee CAL CulateLlMitcksLOMWerMODE tacent nanea nennen enmanue nne CALCu late LIMitsk gt LOWer OFF Sef iirrainn abadani akai eandis CAL Culate LIMitsk gt LOWErSHIFH ss cssccsctscisecertsaccsusdsastecagesstersiaveaviavesvectatedas eode n Ee re cre cec pec eg
485. marker to span HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSP KSP numeric value HPIB address HP 8566A available HP 8568A er C M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 972 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEEMCHSGNN OMM H A s Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models KSQ 2 KSQ Band lock off HP 8566A available HP 8568A KST KST Fast Preset HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSV KSV numeric value Frequency Offset HP 8566A available HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568A KSV KSW KSW Error Correction Routine HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSX KSX Correction Values On HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSY KSY Correction Values Off HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSZ KSZ numeric value Reference Value Offset HP 8566A available DB HP 8568A KSZ KSa KSa Normal Detection HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSb KSb Pos Peak Detection HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSg CRT beam off available KSh CRT beam on available KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSk KSk Blank Trace C HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSI KSI Transfer B to C HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSm KSm Graticule
486. mbination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 288 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 829 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a SS 2 ues ov M nasp g em Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 286 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK Coupling This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couple
487. me Also see e INSTrument CR e chapter 11 4 3 P Eate NEW on page 624 rogramming Example Performing a Sequence of Measure ments on page 630 Parameters lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt Example Usage Manual operation User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 String containing the name of the channel INST SAN Activates a measurement channel for the Spectrum application INST MySpectrum Selects the measurement channel named MySpectrum for example before executing further commands for that channel SCPI confirmed See Spectrum on page 90 See 1xEV DO BTS on page 90 See 1xEV DO MS on page 91 See 3G FDD BTS on page 91 See 3G FDD UE on page 91 See Analog Demodulation on page 91 See cdma2000 BTS on page 91 See cdma2000 MS on page 91 See Multi Carrier Group Delay on page 92 See GSM on page 92 See UO Analyzer on page 92 See LTE on page 92 See Noise Figure on page 92 See Phase Noise on page 92 See Pulse Measurements on page 93 See TD SCDMA BTS on page 93 See TD SCDMA UE on page 93 See Vector Signal Analysis VSA on page 93 See WLAN on page 93 See New Channel on page 96 627 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application 11 4 2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements The following commands control the sequencer
488. me Stamp ds Trace ET Trace Config cenae trente Transducer Trigger Gate Config esses 382 Trigger Offset nr teat 388 Upper Level Hysteresis si sits Vertical Line 1 2 cce rr rrr no Video BW Auto ss Video BW Manual sesiseseseeseeeeeeerrerresrrerrnerrnerenens Et Ee BEE Sort mode xr M 470 Source offset External generator sesssssseesseee 306 Source power External generator sees 306 Spacing MSR adjacent channels 140 MSR gap channels sss 142 Spacings joie dT ele Band power measurement m si Carrier to Noise 0 0 ccc eee cece eeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaees Manual Softkey Span RBW coupling Special characters sie T 563 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Spectrograms Activating Deactivating sees 426 Clearing COO CUNE erensia t oi ort x rau 415 428 433 Color Mapping o 414 427 428 432 Color mapping remote control 848 Color scheme retten Configuring EE Configuring remote control e GContin e Cu Display EE Displaying x Evaluation method sse Frame COUN oret ctn rre inrita Frames remote control eg History depth oe e eret teo eren uEbuocrm M Markers remote control REMOVING LS Selecting frames
489. me domain measurement Note that if you set a span greater than 0 the R amp S FSW aborts the list evaluation Noise cancellation in list evaluations Nnoise cancellation is also available in zero span and thus also for list evaluations See Noise cancellation on page 124 for details List evaluations allow for a different instrument setup for each frequency you want to measure You can define most of the settings with the commands described here Set tings not covered by the commands listed below can be controlled with the common commands see chapter 11 7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters on page 761 Note that these commands have to be sent prior to the commands that control the list evaluation In case of a triggered measurement a separate trigger event is required for each fre quency to initiate that measurement Note that you have to make changes to the trigger level in the time domain in order for it to take effect for the List Evaluation commands DUUM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 745 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements The list evaluation is incompatible to other measurement functions e g marker func tionality or statistics If you use a command that controls those functions the R amp S FSW aborts the list evaluation The R amp S FSW also aborts the list evaluation if you end the remote session The commands can be used in two different ways e Instrume
490. measurement range Usage Event SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt DETector Detector This command selects the detector for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Detector NEGative minimum peak detector POSitive peak detector SAMPIe sample detector RMS RMS detector AVERage average detector RST RMS Manual operation See Detector on page 202 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FiLTer TYPE lt FilterT ype gt This command selects the filter type for a spurious emission measurement range The EMI specific filter types are available ifthe EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range o 53 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 702 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEHEMGBRGENEOREEMCOM P n gpe Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The availa
491. mes gt String containing all available display themes Example DISP THEMe CAT Usage Query only DISPlay THEMe SELect Theme This command selects the display theme Parameters Theme String containing the name of the theme RST SPL Example DISP THEM SEL OceanBlue Manual operation See Theme on page 542 CMAP Suffix Assignment Several commands to change the color settings of individual items of the display or print out are available Which item is to be configured is defined using a CMAP suffix The following assignment applies Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 945 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Suffix Description CMAP1 Background CMAP2 Grid CMAP3 Common Text CMAP4 Check Status OK CMAP5 Check Status Error CMAP6 Text Special 1 CMAPT7 Text Special 2 CMAP8 Trace 1 CMAP9 Trace 2 CMAP10 Trace 3 CMAP11 Marker Info Text CMAP12 Limit Lines CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check Pass CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check Fail CMAP15 Softkey Text CMAP16 Softkey Background CMAP17 Selected Field Text CMAP18 Selected Field Background CMAP19 Softkey 3D Bright Part CMAP20 Softkey 3D Dark Part CMAP21 Softkey State On CMAP22 Softkey State Dialog open CMAP23 Softkey Text Disabled CMAP24 Logo CMAP25 Trace 4 CMAP26
492. mmands exclusive to configuring EMI final tests CALOCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO 739 CALOCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELI cesses nennen 739 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search on and off If enabled the search is per formed automatically after each sweep Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC FME PEAK AUTO ON Activates automatic marker peak search after each sweep Manual operation See Automatic Peak Search on page 264 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELI lt Time gt This command defines the dwell time during the final measurement Parameters lt Time gt Range min value to max value RST 1s Default unit seconds Manual operation See Dwell Time on page 264 Configuring EMI Limit Lines The commands required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in chapter 11 8 4 Configuring Display and Limit Lines on page 893 Controlling LISN The commands required to control a LISN are described here tel rue BE Re EE 739 INPut EISNIFIETer HPASSES FAT u erede seta cct Mecca shade qn i dee ye Sex Rue erac nma 740 tele Bai e cc 740 INPut LISN PHASe Phase This command selects the phase of the LISN you want to measure ERREUR EA ES N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 739 R a
493. mode sss 88 Modulation pr qe 105 Marker Demodulation eeseesssees 468 Monitor acu m 544 TE e EE 544 Motherboard Temperature E 535 MSR BASICS Configuration e Configuration softkey ccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 180 MSR ACLR Adjacent channel bandwidths 140 Adjacent channel definition sssssssse 140 Adjacent channel setup eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Adjacent channel spacing s Adjacent channel weighting filters 141 Gap channel CACLR setup sesessssss 138 Gap channel bandwidths ss Gap channel definition sssssssssss Gap channel spacing esses Gap channel weighting filters Limit Check i eter Limit checks activating sss Programming example eps Results remote cccccceeseeneceeeeeeeeenneeeeteeeeeees Tx channel bandwidth sess Weighting filters sssssssseeeeeee MSR signal Number of adj channels sss 139 MSR signals ACLR measurement sseeseeeereiesreerrrerrerrrerrrerreeres 116 Multicarrier ACLR measurement n se creeren 109 Multi Carrier Group Delay ADDIICAUOM EE 92 Multiple zoom sicune kiipide eai 400 402 Multi standard radio SOG RIS
494. moves a marker horizontally to the highest level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 865 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C un M Analyzing Measurements Basics If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 See Peak Search on page 457 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep Manual operation See Auto Max Min Peak Search on page 452 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINim
495. mp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 13 6 Parameters lt Phase gt Example Manual operation Configuring and Performing Measurements L1 L2 L3 N RST L1 INP LISN PHAS N Selects the N phase See Phase on page 266 INPut LISN FILTer HPASs STATe State This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter for the ENV216 network on and off Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF INP LISN HPAS ON Turns the filter on See 150 kHz Highpass Filter on page 266 INPut LISN TYPE lt LISNType gt This command selects the type of network Parameters lt LISNType gt Example Manual operation TWOPhase 2 Phase networks FOURphase 4 Phase networks ESH3z5 ESH2z5 ENV4200 ENV216 RST INP LISN TYPE ESH3z5 Selects the ESH3z5 network See LISN Type on page 266 Retrieving EMI Results The commands required to retrieve EMI measurement results are described here EES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 740 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Configuring and Performing Measurements Useful commands for retrieving EMI measurement results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 cCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 871 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 870 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving EMI m
496. mployed in the same way on different devices The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands UONE EEUU 619 Ke HX 619 dz E 619 ki cU 619 gor E Tia 620 a a OE 620 618 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m P A i p Common Commands PUMP 620 us Ecc HE 620 js E 621 n nf B M 621 ucl 621 ROSE sese neece iem ette etre eed teer iuste EEN 621 SOIR Bi 622 SN i fans See P 622 licct EET 622 M Ip Um 622 i TE 622 CAL Calibration Query Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status Responses gt 0 indicate errors Usage Query only Manual operation See Starting a Self alignment on page 523 CLS CLear Status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does
497. mz SGGbam v MiNimumNEST 874 CALCulate MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum PEAK eese 875 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See Frame Spectrogram only on page 447 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 872 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR G C 4 p nm H Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate MARKer SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all markers Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 455 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum
498. n Corresp HP Status Models SUM sum of trace amplitudes HP 8566B available HP 8568B HP 8594E SV1 6 SV1 6 Save State HP 8566A available HP 8568A SWPCPL 2 SWPCPL SA SR Sweep Couple HP 856xE available SWPCPL HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E SWPOUT 2 SWPOUT FAV FAVA Sweep Output HP 856xE available RAME HP 8566B SINUS HP 8568B HP 8594E TO TO Threshold off HP 8566A available HP 8568A T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A available HP 8568A T22 T2 Line Trigger HP 8566A available HP 8568A T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A available HP 8568A T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A available HP 8568A TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A available HP 8568A TACL TACL Returns instantaneous not available measurement results See TRACe trace gt IMMediate LEVel for full description TBCL TBCL TCCL TCCL TACR TACR Returns instantaneous not available measurement results See TRACe trace gt IMMediate LEVel for full description TBCR TBCR TCCR TCCR User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 985 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models TB TB Transfer B HP 8566A available HP 8568A TDF TDFP Trace Data Format HP 856xE available TDF M HP 8566B TDF B HP 8568B TDF A HP 8594E TDF TH TH lt numeric_value gt DB Threshold HP 856xE available DM HP 8566B TEDN HP 8568B E HP 8594E TH ON TH OFF TH AUTO
499. n auto mode for range 2 Manual operation See RF Att Mode on page 175 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN Gain This command selects the level of preamplification for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the level of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the state of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Preamp on page 176 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert Mode This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 680 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 88 Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the SEM range Parameters lt Mode gt AFTer Inserts a range after the selected range BEFore Inserts a range before the selected range
500. n colors setting for hardcopies Example DISP CMAP DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Screen colors on page 542 DISPlay CMAP lt item gt HSL lt Color gt This command selects the color for various screen elements in the display Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 Parameters lt Color gt hue tint sat saturation lum brightness The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters LE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 944 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 10 5 3 Configuring the R amp S FSW Example DISP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color DISPlay CMAP lt item gt PDEFined lt Color gt This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 5 3 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 945 Parameters lt Color gt BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example DISP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Manual operation See Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors on page 544 DISPlay THEMe CATalog This command queries all available display themes Parameters lt The
501. n the SCPI standard and not listed here e Device specific error messages use positive error codes These messages are described below N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1010 R amp S FSW Troubleshooting es Obtaining Technical Support Table 13 2 Device specific error messages Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF front end 1060 Trigger Block Gate Delay Error gate length lt Gate Delay This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull in delay with a predefined gate delay 1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the external generator module 2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot be interrupted Such sequences are for example e Recording the system error correction data alignment e Instrument self test In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior to starting the printout 2033 Printer Not Available This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly install
502. n to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 261 CALCulate n DELTamarker MODE Mode This command selects the delta marker mode Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 RETE RU TU M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 857 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C JQ np Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the
503. nd define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 904 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 482 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk State This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spectrum analyzers which are still supported however CALCulate LIMit k TRACe on page 995 e CALCulate LIMit k STATe on page 903 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Traces to be Checked on page 481 Checking the Results of a Limit Check CALCulate LIMit CLEar IMMediate cccccccceneececaseeceeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeecesesaaaaeaeaeaaaeenenens 904 CALCUlate LIMIS KA TE 905 CALCulate LIMit CLEar IMMediate This command deletes the result of the current limit check The command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check Usage SCPI confirmed _L_L_L__LELL ET A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13
504. nd differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 II Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ L SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 10 1 5 3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The param eters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are Numeric values
505. ndow types Setting Basic Measurement Parameters All commands that set measurement independant parameters are described here e Defining the Frequency and Spah uceeeisceueezeeeeesezeeeee etna tun tere un fonna 761 e Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Gettnmgs 767 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling esee 774 e Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements 781 e Adjusting Settings Automatically nce eteteeneene ndn eis 792 e Configuring the Data Input and Output 795 Defining the Frequency and Span The commands required to configure the frequency and span settings in a remote envi ronment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 3 Frequency and Span Configuration on page 344 e Defining the Frequency Range 761 Contiguring Signal Tracking EE 766 Defining the Frequency Range CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer esses nnne nene 762 CALC late lt n gt MARK r lt m gt FUNCOM COSTED nenne enne nnns 762 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing ssssesssesesesne ener nnne innen nnns 762 SENS amp FREQUSN OV CENT Em m Um 762 SENSE FREQU ncy CENT er STEP eege iaaa eue eo ene REIR RED e EESE Eaa 763 SENSe FREQuency GENTerSTEP IAUTO aieo ees ee oe iaai 763 IGENZGeJEbRtOuencv CENTer STERBUINK enne nennen nennen rehenes 764 SENSeJ FREQUuency CENT er STEP LINK FACTO ucit
506. nds required to work with traces are described here Commands required to export traces and other result data are described in chap ter 11 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 925 e Configuring Standard Wace eneccsesccrriiiieni seriinin nR 840 e Configuring SpecttoglalTis 2 prt ee Ree Eed 845 e Using Trace Mathemalics ieleseceekee rennen ek nen nnt Deu kann n nbn AAA anra ad 850 e Jelnevirig Trace Results cde terr der Rte rra de xa Re ce gn 852 e Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 855 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SPACing on page 780 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 779 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE eeeeeeeeeeee enne nennen nnn nnne 841 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuoOus eeeeeeenen nnne 841 DISPlayEWINDow en TRAGest ESTATe 2 cierre tenuere tke t rene tea 842 SENS STAY ER AGC COUNT sm 842 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STAT S lt t gt ccccce cee ce cee ee eee eeose eceeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesaeaeaaaaaeaeaaanenenenes 843 ISENSe JAVERagesms TYPE aec e ra e pide eod abe eae nari e Reader ad 843 SENSe WINDow DETector trace F UNCtion esee 843 SENSe WINDow DETector trace F UNCtion AUTO
507. near average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 420 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 406 For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only not for the final test The detector for the final test is configured using CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 738 If the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR is selected additional detectors are available even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 252 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 843 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak QPEak Quasipeak CISPR filter only SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average CAVerage CISPR Average CISPR filter only CRMS CISPR RMS CISPR filter only RST APEak Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 419 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the detector t
508. neral information sse Handover frequency sssssses Harmonic Order Harmonic Type Measurement example cceeeceeeeeeeeeeteseeeeees 339 NL ces 335 Programming example 810 pce DET 328 329 Restoring bands treten 328 RF overrange 328 805 RF Start RF Stop rte 327 Serial number erinnerte 335 Dc cette 328 336 805 External monitor Gorineclors eir erii qd tnn 48 External reference External generator sse 294 External generator Control 304 Frequency Se JE e pU Loopibandwidtth eire rerit rn hetero 517 Missing Output ne iria chen ee Settings remote control de Status message ont t teat TUNING FANGS ione tt re e co ere ee eite External trigger Configuring power Sensor sess 291 Level power sensor sse 288 Level remote Power sensor oic E ExtMix channel bar ssssssssseneenn 70 EXT REF Status message nette enter nene 73 F Factory defaults treten a 490 Falling Slope Power sensor eene 289 Gc eege eseu Sue 535 Fast ACLR Activating Deactivating essseeesssss 124 Measurement method sse 110 Fast SEM 171 GonsequeriC8S odrau eoe 171 Ile 172 Prerequisites 171 js gr 174
509. nerator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connection between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed e n User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 821 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Cee Ne rmu yJ Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 308 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 308 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 308 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 308 See Calibrate Reflection Open
510. ng display sseee Sweep EEN 427 Probability white noise P AC DC coupling EEN 280 Sealg emai cente d EE AC channel bar 70 SOHN rcs AL M Accoustic Analog Baseband Monitoring ENEE 472 WU CER 281 ACLR Analog Baseband connector General Settings for MSR EE 130 IIe 275 MSR signals SEENEN DE 116 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Programming example 666 Connector SEENEN 44 Results remote ETT 639 Analog Demodulation see CP ACLR ENEE 103 106 ApDDIICatiOR 1 tete ne tte ene 91 ACLR Mode Analysis bandwidth sse 214 Softkey ENEE 124 134 Statistics e aree ned ere ts 214 222 ACP Analysis BW see CP ACLR ENEE 103 Softkey APD CODE 214 Active AnBW channel setting sss 69 Transducer lines enirn 519 Annotations Active probe Hiding restoring sssses MICKODUtON EE 282 AP trace information m Adjacent channels E NEE 139 bet P MSR bandwidth 140 Activating remote control m MSR configuring 140 AppliCationi 2 1 erret Pete hac MSR spacing 140 Config rilig reete eden ere eet ret rad MSR weighting filters m wee 141 Gate remote control MSR ACER E aar AA 138 Gated trigger NET Adjust settings EIERE Softkey APD RENE E DC deeg See 215 219 Measurement S Softkey C N 157 Measurement remote control uss is eieiei 712 Softkey CP ACLR 125 135 Measurement example see 221 Softkey
511. nge x axis for APD measurements 100 dB e Display range x axis for CCDF measurements 20 dB e Upper limit of the y axis 1 0 e Lower limit of the y axis 1E 6 Example CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions Usage Event Manual operation See Default Settings on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram x and y axis To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spac ing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters ONCE Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 215 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 716 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mun P m H Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe Range This command defines the display range of the x axis for statistical measurements The
512. ngs on page 127 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Adjacent Channel Spacings on page 140 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt ch gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the distance between transmission channels If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel the R amp S FSW sets the spacing of the lower transmission channels to the same value but not the other way round The command works hierarchically to set a distance between the 2nd and 3rd and 3rd and 4th channel you have to set the spacing between the 2nd and 3rd channel first Parameters lt Spacing gt Range 14 kHz to 2000 MHz RST 20 kHz Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 127 L User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 647 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MG CU U RM ERE H m mM Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command defines the number of transmission channels The command works for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Channels Tx ADJ on page 123 11 5 3 3 Defining Weighting Filters The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel eeeeeee eee 648 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL eese 648 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer A
513. ning 0 OVEN COLD This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature OCXO is displayed 1 LO UNLocked This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks LOUNL is displayed 2to7 Not used 8 EXTernalREFerence This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable external reference source In that case the synthesizer can not lock The frequency in all probability is not accurate 9 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains information about the results of a limit check when you are working with limit lines A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition or STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt Table 10 11 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 UM 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated 4 LIMit 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated 5 UM 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 6 is vi
514. nit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Y Axis on page 218 See Y Unit on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Y Axis on page 218 See Y Max Y Min on page 218 Performing a Statistical Measurement The following commands are required to perform a statistical measurement INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 Remote commands exclusive to statistical results GAL Gulatesn STATIsIIeS CODE EE 718 GAL CUBIS STA TISHICS RESUS Z EEN 719 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF X t Probability This command queries the results of the CCDF LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 718 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 8 7 Query parameters lt Probability gt Example Usage Manual operation Configuring and Performing Measurements PO 01 Level value for 0 01 96 probability PO 1 Level valu
515. nne sn nnn 762 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SPACing sss neret nennen tnnt rennen enne 780 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe DlSblavf WiNDow nzTRACevtGCALetAUTOONCE enne enne nnn 779 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACevlGCALetMODE nnne 780 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel sss enne eene enne 775 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sse 775 SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1019 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit b_i a NET DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition ettet 780 DiSblautWINDowensTRACeytSCALel RbOgigeon 820 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue ettet ttt 821 DiSblautWINDowenslTRACestsMODE ttt ttt ttt ttt tt 841 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONIinuous ttt ttn 841 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t STATe cette ttt ttt ttt 842 DiSblaufWINDowenslTbE ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttes 2d 996 DISPlayWINDow n ZOOM AREA cett ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 838 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA ettet 839 DiSblautWINDowensZOOM MULTgleszooms ST ATe 839 DiSblautWINDowenstZOOM ST Te ata nasaan araa aae rran RI IERI Viper HE DISPlayEWINDow TIME FORMAIL tgo etn eet eren a net eere rere n ee n PRI RYE US XXE RE FETCh PMETer p E FORMat DEXPort DSEPAraltOF 3 ui
516. nnector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW The command is only available in the time domain For restrictions and more information see chapter 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Output on page 278 Parameters lt Source gt IF Sends the measured IF value at the frequency defined using OUTPut IF IFFRequency to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector viDeo Sends the displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal 200mV to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to send demodulated audio frequencies to the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector ERREUR EE SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 836 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS C H ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 342 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF For more information see chapter 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Output on page 278 Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on pag
517. nnes nnns inns sen n ns ens s naran Ennan 958 STATus OPERation NTRAnSIUON occorre e EE re de ee a Id aide e Eae Hoe ded cu beg 958 STATus OPERation PTRansitlon inertes ihe eth eere e dedil edel 959 STATUs OPERation EVENIE urne eto cr or E re E euge uet be oe er ies 957 STATUS TT LETT KK 956 STATusOUEG onable ACL mt CONDiton enne nnne nere nnn nnne 957 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle sess ethernet nnne nnns nnns 958 SGTATusOUEGtonable AC mn N Tanson 958 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit P TRansition sessi n nnne 959 STATusOUEG onable ACL Im EVEN 957 STATus QUEStionable ei el Ire TEE 957 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 5 2 c e rrt aiai aaiae a vite ea ERR a dE dee 958 SGTATusOUEGtonable EvTended CONDitton enne ener nennen 957 STATus QUEStionable EXTended ENABle 958 STATusOUEG onable Evtended INFO CGONDitton ener 957 STATusOUEGtonable EvTended INFO ENAbBle enne enne nennen entrent nsn nnns inna 958 SGTATusOUEGtonable EvTendedINFON Tanson 958 STATusOUEGtonable EvTended INFO P Ransttton eene 959 STATusOUEG onable Evtended INFOTEVENUN ennt tnnt nnne 957 STATus QUEStionable EXTended NTRansition 958 STATus QUEStionable EXTended PTRansition 959 STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVEN 957 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition eese eene 957 SGTATusOUEG onable FRtOuencv ENADie nnne nennn nne ee nennt senes 958
518. not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event Status Enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 ESR Event Status Read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values Contents Range 0 to 255 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 619 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m p Common Commands Usage Query only IDN IDeNtification returns the instrument identification Return values ID Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver Sion Example Rohde amp Schwarz FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 1 30 Usage Query only Manual operation See IDN Format on page 593 IST Individual STatus query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values lt ISTflag gt 0 1 Usage Query only OPC OPeration Complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon a
519. nrenrenretrr erret nne eren IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblDWwlDtb Vieo mener nennen rris SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO sess nennen reete nnne enne SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio IEN Ge IGANDwidtblGwlDtb ViDeo Tt IEN Ge IDGANDwicblDWIDODTRE Solution IEN Ge IDGANDwicblDWIDODTRE Solution AUTO 768 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT sess 773 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO essen eene 768 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE sese eere 769 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire essent enn neret rennes 821 SENSe CORRSction CVEIBAND tein ente Entrate anra ce cea ep dst danda deae ab six E aaa ia aaiae dre dna np dan dandi 806 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS IEN Ge ICObR echon CHL CATAlon nennen ener rennen trennen nennen eere 807 SENSe CORRection Ee BE 807 IENGeICObRbRechon CNL COMMent AAA 807 SENSe GORRS amp ction CVL DATA 2 iiec a tendon e Vend d sa eg pde da p ea and pta dag 808 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonicC esee nennen nnne nnne nre trne rre nrr erret nnne 808 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1025 R amp S FSW List of remote commands base unit REESEN IENGeICObRRechon CNL Mixer 808 SENSe CORRection CVC PORT Sionissa ical etes Here cedri e ede Re b netu 809 SENSe CORRE ction CVLISEL CC hisciccsccsecesstcaicceecsets sad ectacrsibeas sds repu eto ruo ota REN eege 809
520. nt You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see chapter 10 1 6 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 568 For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Example For Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 102 See Zero Span on page 102 See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 373 ERREUR EA I E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 635 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 1 2 Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end SWE COUN CURR Queries the number of started sweeps Usage Query only Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment
521. nt channels If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Parameters lt LowerLimit gt The first value defines the limit of the lower adjacent channel the lt UpperLimit gt second value the limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 PE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 651 R amp S9FSW Remote Commands m SS aps Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe State This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R amp S FSW uses the lower value for
522. nt setup measurement and querying of the results in a single command line This method causes the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument e Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer may be used for other activities while the mea surement is being performed However more time is needed for synchronization via service request 11 5 14 1 Performing List Evaluations All remote control commands specific to list evaluations which are available via remote control only are described here Useful commands for list evaluation described elsewhere SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 Remote commands exclusive to list evaluation SENSE ILIS Ree EE 746 SENSe LIST POWer SEQuence 222 cccccccccececceteeneenerererennereneneaeneneetereeecesenentenerens 747 ISENSSJLIS T POWT SE iniiae cm 748 SENS amp TEIST POWOES DA TR cna ae dee E AEE AE EEEE TET EEEa E 749 SENSe LIST POWer RESult This command queries the results of the list evaluation This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measurement If there are no results the command returns an error Return values lt PowerLevel gt Power level for each frequency included in the me
523. ntaining the transducer file name including the path infor mation Manual operation See Transducer on page 203 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere MMEMory STORe LIST on page 926 Remote commands exclusive to spurious emission measurements CALCulatesn gt PSEarch PEAKSearch AUTO 708 CALOCulate n PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin esses eene 708 CALOCulate n PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHOw esses eene hse e nnns nnns 708 CALOCulate n PSEarch PEAKsearch SUBRanges eese semen 709 CALCulate lt n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns the list evaluation on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate lt n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin lt Threshold gt This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Parameters lt Margin gt Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC PSE MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB CALCulate lt n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 708 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 7 4 11 5 7 5 11 5 7 6 Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters
524. nual 1173 9411 02 13 909 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PEEMGNMGNN GM COM U ee Managing Settings and Results Parameters Directory String containing the path and new directory name The path may be relative or absolute Usage Event MMEMory MOVE lt SourceFile gt lt NewFileName gt This command moves a file to another directory The command also renames the file if you define a new name in the target directory If you do not include a path for lt NewFileName gt the command just renames the file Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file lt NewFileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM MOVE C TESTO1 CFG SETUP CFG Renames TESTO1 CFG in SETUP CFG in directory CA Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MSIS lt Device gt This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands Parameters lt Device gt AD C pz String containing the device drive name RST IC Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory NAME lt FileName gt This command creates a new and empty file It also sets the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy IMMediate lt device gt on page 922 Note that you have to route the printer output to a file
525. o the band width of the first harmonic Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 identical ON 1 a multiple RST 1 Manual operation See Harmonic RBW Auto on page 232 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics lt NoHarmonics gt This command selects the number of harmonics that the R amp S FSW looks for Parameters lt NoHarmonics gt Range 1 to 26 RST 10 Manual operation See No of Harmonics on page 231 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the har monic distortion measurement The method depends on the span e Frequency domain span gt 0 Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the measure ment list e Time domain span 0 The level of the first harmonic is determined The frequency remains unchanged Usage Event Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 232 Performing the Measurement The following commands are required to perform a harmonic distortion measurement LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 730 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 10 4 11 5 10 5 Configuring and Performing Measurements INITiate IMMediate on page 635 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 632 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKe
526. o the trace mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 419 TRACe lt n gt COPY lt TraceNumber gt lt TraceNumber gt This command copies data from one trace to another Parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACES TRACE6 lt TraceNumber gt The first parameter is the destination trace the second parameter is the source Example TRAC COPY TRACel1 TRACe2 Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 844 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 2 2 Analyzing Measurements Basics Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Copy Trace on page 421 Configuring Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time spectrum traces the R amp S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the fre quency the y axis shows the time The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see chapter 7 3 1 6 Spectrograms on page 411 When configuring spectrograms the window suffix is irrelevant The settings are always applied to the spectrogram window or to all spectrogram windows if several are ac
527. ocumentation 10 5 5 1 How to Configure the R amp S FSW for Remote Operation via Remote Desktop 1 Create a fixed IP address for the TCP IP protocol as described in Assigning the IP address on the R amp S FSW on page 600 Note To avoid problems use a fixed IP address LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 608 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 3 4 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control When a DHCP server is used a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument is restarted This address must first be determined on the instrument itself Thus using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R amp S FSW via Remote Desktop e Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system In the Start menu select the Control Panel and then System and Security In the System area select Allow remote access o Je Control Panel System and Security 49 Sore Pane p o System Properties Computer Name Hardware Advanced System Protection Remote P H n Control Panel Home Action Centex Review your computer s 4 System and Security A Wl Change User Account a ludin etwork and Internet Troubleshoot common c Hardware and Sound x V Allow Remote Assistance connecbons to this computer a Windows Firewall Programs Chec s p eegene E What happens when enable Remote Assistance User Accounts Syst ET 2 t ystem App
528. ocused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL com mand see LAYout SPLitter on page 758 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measurement channel EE RU TUE M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 755 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 627 LAYOUT DD B UIl Blois 756 LAYout CATalog WINDOw 1eeeeeeeeesisiseseeeee enn nnn nnne snnt steht hana ana aia nass sa sa sins n na 757 Bd le ENEE 757 LAYout REMovVeEWINDOW
529. odels The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E the HP models 71100C 71200C and 71209A are compatible to HP models 8566A B Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models A1 A1 Clear Write A HP 8566A HP 8568A available A2 A2 Max Hold A HP 8566A HP 8568A available A3 A3 View A HP 8566A HP 8568A available A4 ABORT A4 Blank A HP 8566A HP 8568A available ABORT HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E Stop previous function available ADD Add HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJALL ADJALL Adjust all HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available 964 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models ADJCRT 2 ADJCRT Adjust CRT HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E ADJIF 2 ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E AMB AMB ON OFF Trace A B gt Trace A HP 856xE available AMB 1 0 HP 8594E AMB AMBPL AMBPL ONJ OFF HP 856xE available AMBPL 1 0 HP 8566B AMBPL HP 8568B HP 8594E AMPCORDATA AMPCORDATA Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available lt freq gt lt amp gt Data AMPCORDATA AMPCOR AMPCOR ON OFF Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available AMPCOR 1 0 AMPCOR AMPCORSIZE AMPCORSIZE Amplitude Correc
530. of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Diagram on page 398 See Marker Table on page 398 See Marker Peak List on page 398 See Result Summary on page 399 See Spectrogram on page 399 EEUU RA ET SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 756 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the Result Display Table 11 2 lt WindowType gt parameter values for the Spectrum application Parameter value Window type DIAGram Diagram MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary SGRam Spectrogram LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax WindowName 1 WindowIndex 1 WindowName n WindowIndex n Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result L E E Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of
531. of com mands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level reg isters e The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ IECH User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 584 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits the SCPI registers 16 bits The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number To make this possible each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 Bits 0 1 2 Weight 9 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem E
532. of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO register Bit No Meaning 0 MESSage This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation 1 INFO This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application 2 WARNing This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement e g the settings no longer match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily 3 ERRor This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement e g due to missing data or wrong settings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly 4 FATal This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possible 5 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register The STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register contains information about the condi tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency A separate frequency register exists for each active channel User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 579 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition OrSTATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt Table 10 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register Bit No Mea
533. of the frontend BROadband Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter Manual operation See Calibration Frequency RF on page 531 See Spectrum on page 531 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut AIQ TYPE lt SignalType gt This command defines the type of calibration signal to be used for Analog Baseband This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B71 option is installed ERREUR RA ET T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 935 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt SignalType gt Example Manual operation Configuring the R amp S FSW AC 1 5625 MHz square wave AC signal DC DC signal DCZ no signal RST AC DIAG SERV INP AIQ TYPE DCZ See Calibration Analog Baseband on page 532 See Calibration Signal Type on page 532 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect Signal This command activates or deactivates the use of an internal calibration signal as input for the R amp S FSW Parameters Signal Example Manual operation CALibration Uses the calibration signal as RF input MCALibration Uses the calibration signal for the microwave range as RF input RF Uses the signal from the RF input AIQ Uses the Analog Baseband calibration signal as input to the optional Analog Baseband interface This signal is only available if the R amp S FSW B71 option is installed RST RF DIAG SERV INP CAL Uses the calibration signal as RF input See None on page 531 See
534. off HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSn KSn Grid on HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSo KSn Character display off HP 8566A available HP 8568A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 973 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models KSp KSp Character display on HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSr KSr Create service request HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSt KSt Band lock on HP 8566A available HP 8568A KSv 2 KSv Signal ident on HP 8566A available HP 8568A LO LO Display line off HP 8566A available HP 8568A LB LB lt numeric_value gt Label HP 8566A available lt char data gt HP 8568A LF LF Low frequency band pre HP 8566A available set HP 8568A LIMD limit line delta HP 856xE available LIMF limit line frequency HP 856xE available LIMIFAIL limit fail query HP 856xE available LIMIPURGE purge limit line HP 856xE available LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available LIMTFL flat limit line segment HP 856xE available LIMTSL slope limit line segment HP 856xE available LIMU upper limit line value HP 856xE available LG LG numeric value
535. olated 6 LIMit 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 580 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated Bit No Meaning 7 LIMit 8 FAIL 8 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register This register contains information about the observance of limit margins A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable LMARgin CON STATus QUEStionable LMARgin EV Dition and ENt Table 10 12 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register Bit No Meaning 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated LMARgin 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated LMARgin 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated LMARgin 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated LMARgin 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated LMARgin 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated 8to 14 15 Not used This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register The STA
536. ommand reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 559 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status 10 1 5 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics key words Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax 10 1 5 1 Syntax for Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument iden
537. ompatible to other measurement functions e g marker functionality or statistics If you use a command that controls those functions the R amp S FSW aborts the Pulse Power measurement The R amp S FSW also aborts the Pulse Power measurement if you end the remote session The commands can be used in two different ways e Instrument setup measurement and querying of the results in a single command line With this method there is the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument e Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer may be used for other activities while the mea IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 750 R amp S FSW Remote Commands aS SS SS i a ee p Configuring and Performing Measurements surement is being performed However more time is needed for synchronization via service request 11 5 15 1 Performing Pulse Power Measurements The following commands control pulse power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary cesses nennen enne 751 SENSeTMPOWherf eege geed eere icin ak He Ha RE Terre a acre Aa iUe RD ean 752 ISENSe MPOWermESUltE ECK VE 752 SENSe MPOWerT SEQU nCe eec rrr cree rn nnn nn RR Rr rene Re DEENEN orna ee aa Eewa 752 E Ee e OK 753 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MSUMmary
538. on RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Activates adjacent channel power measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES GSM Selects the user standard GSM POW ACH TXCH COUN 1 Creates one transmission channel POW ACH NAME CHAN1 TX Channel Names the first transmission channel TX Channel POW ACH ACP 2 Creates two adjacent channels one adjacent channel and one alternate channel POW ACH NAME ACH ABC Names the adjacent channel ABC POW ACH NAME ALT1 XYZ Names the first alternate channel XYZ POW ACH BWID CHAN1 30kHz Defines a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the transmission channel POW ACH BWID ACH 30kHz Defines a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the adjacent channel POW ACH BWID ALT1 30kHz Defines a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the first alternate channel POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Defines a distance of 33 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the center of the adjacent channel Also adjusts the distance to the alternate channels 66 kHz POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100kHz Defines a distance of 100 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the center of the first alternate channel LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 666 Configuring and Performing Measurements EE Selecting a Reference Channel POW ACH MODE REL Selects relative display of the channel power POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 1 Defines transmissi
539. on NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker ERREUR EA M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 887 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mA H O HR P Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters Distance Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB RST 6dB Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the frequency domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt Frequency gt lt frequency 1 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz lt frequency 2 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100000000 200000000 meaning that the fi
540. on channel 1 as the reference channel CALC MARK FUNC POW STAN SAVE my aclr standard Saves the user standard with the name my aclr standard Weighting filters can only be defined for user defined standards POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 Defines a roll off factor of 0 35 for the weighting filter of the first transmission channel POW ACH FILT CHAN1 ON Turns the weighting filter for the first transmission channel on POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 Defines a roll off factor of 0 35 for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel POW ACH FILT ACH ON Turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 Defines a roll off factor of 0 35 for the weighting filter of the first alternate channel POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON Turns the weighting filter for the first alternate channel on CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Defines a relative limit of 30 dB below the power of the reference channel for both adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ALT1 25DB 25DB Defines a relative limit of 25 dB below the power of the reference channel for the first alternate channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Defines an absolute limit of 35 dBm for both adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ON Turns the ACLR limit check on CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Turns the relative limit check for adjacent channels on CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Turns the absolute limit check for adjacent
541. on is indicated as B7J 122 Remote command SYST PSA WIDeband on page 961 Revision String Defines the response to the REV query for the revision number HP emulation only see GPIB Address on page 593 Max 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem REVision STRing on page 962 Resetting the Factory Revision Resets the response to the REV query for the revision number to the factory default HP emulation only see Language on page 595 Remote command SYSTem REVision FACTory on page 962 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 596 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Network and Remote Control Settings 10 4 4 LXI Settings On the R amp S FSW the LXI Class C functionality is already installed and enabled thus the instrument can be accessed via any web browser e g the Microsoft Internet Explorer to perform the following tasks e modifying network configurations e modifying device configurations e monitoring connections from the device to other devices The LXI tab of the Network Remote dialog box provides basic LXI functions and information for the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can change the LAN settings using the LXI Web browser interface see chapter 10 5 1 4 How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Browser Interface on page 602 Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality Network GPIB Compatibility LXI Current LXI Configuration Curr
542. on page 308 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Example CORR REC Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Recall on page 309 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 821 This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF SS Y H M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 822 R amp S FSW Remote Commands REESEN Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Calibration Normalize on page 308 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c Nx sNinstrNtrd The frequency points are allo
543. on to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt FUNCtion on page 683 Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt ABSolute 10 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt FUNCtion lt Function gt This command enables the use of a function when defining the relative limit for a SEM range Suffix lt range gt 1 30 Selects the SEM range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters lt Function gt Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line start value MAX The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt and SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed rel ative start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt com mand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit REL
544. onFMEasurementGTATe nennen enne nnne nne nenne 737 CAL CulateMAbkerEUNGConFPEake COUND at 880 CAL CulateM AbkertUNCHonFbteake vi 882 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPE KS Y 0 eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceaeeeeeeaaeeseseaaeeesecaeeeesenaeeeseeieeeeeseeeeeee 882 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor esses enne ener nnn nent enne 888 CAL CulateMAbkerEUNGCon POWerREGut A 639 CAL CulateMAbkertUNGCHon GTbRack BANDwidi nena 766 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack THReshold sss entente 767 CAL CulateMAbkertUNGCuon GTbRackTRACe eene ener ennt e nnns sn nene rnnt nnn 767 CAL CulateM AbkertUNCHon GTbRacklGrATel enne ennemis 766 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE sssesesseesesirissisesinssrntesirnsrrnntsrnntenrnnstnnsnnnnnt 733 CAL Culate MARKerLOEXclude 2 oer ertt eode erp ee idee t ec e p oe Dra o EY cee CALCulate MARKer SGRam SARea CALCulate MARKer2CSLIMits LEF T 2 rentrer reote ee axe ye PvE edP FEE npa E REY OE dese ee ee reg Ee d CAL CulateMAbker XG IMmtebRIGHT enne nnne nenne sn nnnnns sen nn tense serene sene thnn nena CAL CulateMAbkerx GL lMits Z0OOMISTATel nennen eene nnne nnns inns CAL CulateMAb ker XG IMmelGTATel eene nennen nne n entr rint rrnnd teer rt nnn GAECUulate MARKer2CSSIZSe EE CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k CONDition 3 742 CALCulate MARKer m
545. ontrol 671 iere nile p 161 Deactivating limits ssssse 162 453 457 Determining 161 163 tege eege 162 452 456 Measurement er Er perte enhn 103 158 Measurement remote control 671 Measurement example sse 163 Multicarrier signal esses 163 Prerequisities 159 EE 160 Search limits 163 Occupied Bandwidth SOS OB d er 158 OCXO CONNECTOR dee 50 Offset its dae ER 350 Limit lines S R ference level eicit retener a 356 X axis statistiCs o ecrire rr e deett 218 Offset channel setting sene 69 Online help Working with esses 84 On screen keyboard sseeseeeesseiterrrrerserrrrnserrrrrsese 38 77 Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 308 Operating mode ss echo Sie lte E Operating system x LOGI ea eea E SENICE PACKS recrean eea a aoee Operation complete Ile 620 Optimizing Calibration signal display eeessssse 53 Option identification lip 620 Options Electronic attenuation B25 358 EMI measurement K54 ssss 249 265 External generator control B10 291 External mixer B21
546. or frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Holdoff on page 388 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trigger Sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 782 R amp S FSW Remote Commands es SS C I AJ uEB r g r Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Hysteresis on page 388 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt 11213 Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT
547. ote control ssssssssssss 940 Uu 542 Touch sensitivity De activating see User Manual 83 Trag COPY aT Trace information E ds s Detector type iod t eie te a berti Trace number eerte ron erre Window title bar Uc nnum FUNCIONS e 422 SGUINOS qe 422 Traces Average mode esses tenen 420 Averaging 2 410 Averaging algorithm sssesessssss 409 Averaging remote control sessssssss 843 Combining results we 411 Configuration softkey sssssssssssss 417 Configuration Softkey sss 422 Configuring ais 429 Configuring remote control sssssussss 840 eoo 434 Copying remote control 844 Detector irria iar rr P iren 419 Detector remote control sesssssss 843 Export format sisisi iuas aidai aiis 424 EXPOMING cete 423 424 425 501 502 Hold 419 Mode ET 418 Mode CP ACLR nnno tnit ntn 116 Mode remote AA 841 Saving Ae 493 Settings Alcan sda 405 Settings predefined AAA 420 Settings remote control m 840 MIU MT E 421 Traces to be Checked Limit lines cr rrr 481 Tracking See External generator sss 305 Tracking bandwidth ssssssssssseeeee
548. p file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available This data is stored to the C R_S Instr user directory on the instrument As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM COPY command to store the file on the controller PC see MMEMory COPY on page 908 If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Return values lt FileName gt C R_S Instr user lt R amp S Device ID gt _ lt CurrentDate gt _ lt Current Time gt String containing the drive path and file name of the created sup port file where the file name consists of the following elements lt R amp S Device ID The unique R amp S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information see chapter 9 3 4 2 Informa tion on Versions and Options on page 524 CurrentDate The date on which the file is created lt YYYYMMDD gt CurrentTime The time at which the file is created lt HHMMSS gt Example DIAG SERV SINF Result Te R amp S instr user FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165 Copy to controller PC MMEM COPY c R amp S instr user FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165 NDebugNFSW 26 1312 8000K
549. page 104 See C N on page 157 See C No on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasType gt This command selects a power measurement and turns the measurement on Parameters lt MeasType gt ACPower MCACpower Adjacent channel leakage ratio ACLR aka adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on CN Carrier to noise ratio measurement CNO Carrier to noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz bandwidth Manual operation See Ch Power ACLR on page 103 See C N C No on page 103 See OBW on page 103 See C N on page 157 See C No on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe State This command turns a power measurement on and off You can select a particular power measurement with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See C N on page 157 See C No on page 157 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 641 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m o
550. port existing control applications as in legacy sys tems e Conventions used in SCPI Command Descrtpotions 617 EE Connie CONES A 618 e COMMON EES eege 618 e Selecting the Operating Mode and Appltcaton 623 e Configuring and Performing Measurements sese 632 e Configuring the Result Display iioc init tree retener htec 754 e Setting Basic Measurement Parameters sess 761 e Analyzing Measurements Basics esse reecte ee ennezec ei epe ehe 838 e Managing Settings and Results eee einen 905 e QContguring the RSS FOW 2 eire t retenir tete ecce rend 930 e Using the Status Fees Eegeregie ee 956 e Emulating Other Instruments Commande 959 e Commands for Compatibilty a inodo e tend ree ad et AS 995 eJ Programming Examples iu niente ERR EPI e eren ina Hidden 998 11 1 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that ar
551. r ss 292 External generator II WEE TEE Tuning range External reference cincai 517 Tx bandwidth Elide w 179 Tx channel MSR Center frequency sss 137 MSR technology A 138 Tx channels in MSR subblocks seeeeennne 137 MSR configuring ssseseesseeeees 137 MSR weighting filters esses 138 U UNCAL i ijo RR RTT 74 1009 UNCAL status display sssessssss 75 1010 UNDO I Gy euet LL Lu EE M M 44 S o ED RR PR 564 Power sensor Reference level ssssssssssseeeeeee 356 357 Transducer factors s sse 521 Y axis statistics i rU RR 564 Update rate BI rv 536 Updating Firmware ssssssssss eese 526 547 Upper Level Hysteresis fel A 395 USB Connector re 48 CONNMOCIONS suae terere pne EENS ee 40 Interfaces ch SEENEN e decree hn eiae nen SSC 558 User manuals ssssesessssess essent 14 User ports Remote control cccceeesssee ceeeeeessssnsetsaeeeeeeeeees 837 Users NetWOTK e M 606 PaSSWOIG C M 606 User standards CP AGCLR ient petrus 121 131 Loading CP ACLR 146 OI 010 Res 121 131 Storing CP ACLR sese 146 V VBW GPIAC UR T 115 RMS e rm 408 see Video bandwidth seseessssessss 363 SEM
552. r m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion eene 731 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST eee 731 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion TOTal This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt Result gt lt Distortion_ gt lt Distortion_dB gt Pair of values one showing the THD in 96 one in dB Usage Query only Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics LIST This command queries the position of the harmonics To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt Harmonics gt Returns one value for every harmonic The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic The unit is variable The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic The unit for these is dB Usage Query only Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 105 Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion RST Resets t
553. r Source on page 384 Parameters Source EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower IQPower VIDeo RFPower PSEN RST IFPower LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 788 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 4 3 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Source on page 384 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 385 See Video on page 385 See IF Power on page 386 See RF Power on page 386 See Power Sensor on page 387 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the way gated measurements are triggered Parameters lt Type gt LEVel The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the signal disappears Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for fre quency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO mode measure ments EDGE The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal edge After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate delay is over RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Manual operation See Gate Settings on page 390 See Gate Mode on page 390 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required
554. r factors Useful commands for transducer managament described elsewhere MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL on page 915 Remote commands exclusive to transducer management SENSe CORRection F TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel STATe eese 937 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer COMMent eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen em nennen enne 938 ISENS amp OORRestbn TRANSducet DATA eet EERSTEN 938 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DELete eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn nennen nennen 938 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing eese nennen 938 SENSe CORRection T RANSducer SELebl irit n e rore rtt tr red enne a E Reina 938 ISENGeICObRechon TRAhNSsducert SGTATel nenen erene eetetoeorororsrsrnrnrnsn nunn nennnnne 939 SENSe CORRection TRANSGUGERUNIT csisestecccatiiaritaccetisayiel deseaspael anaana 939 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel STATe lt State gt This command turns an automatic adjustment of the reference level to the transducer on and off Before you can use the command you have to select and turn on a transducer Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF E EES M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 937 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Manual operation See Adjusting the Reference Level on page 520 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Comment This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor
555. r manual operation are described in chap ter 6 6 Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 377 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Configuring the Triggering GConditioris 22 eiie ene cete ntc tente 781 e Configuring Gated Measurements iiiad 787 e Configuring the Trigger OBQUL reete enne he ten he pate EEGEN 789 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGSer SEQuence ANE 781 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME cececeeeeeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeee nennen ener ener nnns 782 TRiGger SEQuence I FPowerHOLDOlt 2 icn ia nere caet dnte de 782 TRIGGer SEQu ence FPowerHYS T resis 2 cete ti cerne ave nde dene EE 782 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port eese nens 783 TRIGgEen SEQuence EEVel lF EE 783 TRIGSer SEQuence EEVellG POoWst teer eee te tenere hk eren eh eee En 784 TRIGSer SEQuence EE EVel REPOWSLE innen een NEEN eege ed eas 784 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel VIDEO eee cana ea ea eae ceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaadeeeeeeeeeeeeees 784 TRiGgerESEQuence SLOPE Ims 784 TRIGGer SEQuence S OD ROS 2 ecac se orti intere NEE ERR uo diced ited 785 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval esses nennen ennemis nen enses 786 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay belo
556. r rere 33 Frequency span jeu ol 114 Frequency sweep Meas rement irrisistu neben Font 102 Programming example sse 636 Frontend Ternat iore eret een 513 Temperature status Dit 582 Temperature remote esses 937 Front Panel Displaying see User Manual n ereenn 83 Hiding restoring oer nnns 539 FRQ External generator sss 301 Frq channel Dar 1 etre tree tret teret eene 70 Full span Ee E 349 Function keys Details see User Manual n neeesser 41 BU M 41 FXD marker functions ssssseee 72 G Gap CACLR MSR SPACING srastao enee n e etn e need eben 142 Gap CACLR channels MSR bandwidth MSR configuring MSR weighting filters esses 142 Gap channels CACLR MSRACUR 138 GAT Channel bar 2 rrt rre iret 70 Gate Drum 390 ED 391 Meas rementS n 379 Mode Fe Ranges statistics 00 eee ee eeneeeeeneeees 212 ifii 2b He 390 Gated trigger pXon cu e 390 Configuring statistics sss 215 219 ucl G 215 cuti 212 215 222 Gate ranges Activating statistics sess 216 Comment statistics sess 216 Period Statistics teret perrito inire aed 216
557. r snnt nnns nnt en tni nnne 865 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimum LEET 865 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAvimum NENT 865 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mzMAximum HIGH 866 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAximumf PDEART eene n nnns nerenn nennen enn 865 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimum AUTO 866 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumNENT ener enne en nnnn tetra ten rnnn nennt nsn nnns nena 866 CALCulate n2 MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses nennen eren nnne t nennt nere nn nena 867 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MiNimum PEAKRT nennt 867 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE ccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeseaeesescaeeeescaeeeesaaeesescaeeseecaeeesseeeeeees 859 CALC latesn gt MARKETS MAX EE 860 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent 113 CALCulate sn MARKersm 2Y EE 871 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe esee enne nene rennen enenrreneren teret andsa iarras CALC latesn gt RE Nd ee e Ee EE ul Me TE ie Be e le KHN KE CALCulate lt n gt MATH EXPression DEFine CAlCulate cnz PME Tercp RE ative zi len CAL Culate nz PME Tercps REL ativet MACGhNItudel nennen 827 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 827 CAL Culate cnz PDGEarchlPEAksearch AUTO 708 CALCulate n PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin esent neren nene neren tenetis 708 CALCulate l
558. r the program events during this time must be returned to the operating system In Visual Basic this is done by calling the DoEvents function This function causes keyboard or mouse triggered events to be executed by the associated elements For example it allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument setting to be completed The following programming example describes the Hold function which returns con trol to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in milliseconds Rem KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKAKKK Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired Rem waiting time in milliseconds The keyboard and the mouse remain Rem operative during the waiting period thus allowing desired elements Rem to be controlled Rem KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Public Sub Hold delayTime As Single Start Timer Save timer count on calling the function Do While Timer lt Start delayTime 1000 Check timer count DoEvents Return control to operating system to enable control of desired elements as long as timer has not elapsed Loop End Sub Rem KKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK The waiting procedure is activated simply by calling Hold Waiting time in milliseconds gt Service Request Routine A service request is proc
559. range s i Spurious Emissions range ssseesss 201 VBW RBW coupling eeeeeeeennn VBW channel setting i dli men Em Version informatiori rer etre Vertical Line 1 2 DOMKCYS ics cc 479 Video 9g inc P teas eee eee Video bandwidth etr enr er SE renes Auto Softkey is lee Manual SoftkK y rrr een teneas 369 RMS detector ll e View filter Limit NOS CR 481 Mransd cer lies rrt e ein 520 ViIMUS PrOLE CON P 25 VISA s s rcm T e 558 Ell STING WEE 558 Resource SUING isses coeno porche rote rea 555 Visible Limit NOS eigenen Ee 481 e dC mc 266 V network EMi arenito eaen eege eeneg SE 256 Volume elef A0 VSA Vector Signal Analysis ADDI CAON vos cans m 93 VXI PROLOCOl 556 Ww Wait cag cM 622 Waiting for trigger Status register uiro rrr rer eR n iet ence 575 W CDMA signals pis qc ete 150 Weighting filters GP ACL Ro M 129 MSR adjacent channels 141 MSR gap channels 142 MSR ACLR 138 Ee DES 648 White noise Measurement example statistics 221 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1055 R amp S FSW Index VUE 566 Wideband PSAB960D0 rnnt t rrr er prs 596 Windows AGING m Adding remote E Fro
560. rcps REL ativel MAChNitudel nn 827 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE sees 827 CAL Culate nzPMETerps RELathvezfAafe erener eren trerererororereesrernnnnnn 828 FETCEPME TO DA ee ene ea Aaaa eee ere eee 828 READ PMET TEE 828 SENS amp JPMETersps DOYOle S TATe 2 iii ccce EEE Ln nuda eat 829 SENSe PMETer p DCYClIe VALue sesssseseseseeseene enne nennen nh nn en nsns nsn nh nennen 829 SENSe J PMETersp FREGQUenG 5 21 2 x fep teer deae iaddv ede ln pue dd esa EA aaa RA 829 EREEEUEUIUTUR RA ART UE E e 1 1 1 1 1 LLLMA ALLLLULLX i User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 826 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS a ee Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters SENSe JPMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK 2 2 c c cccccetecceensedeaesceescesedetesenenseteceeenanavdaeeees 830 SEET eescht HM gebudd 830 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNtL esses eher tnn nnns 830 IGENZGe JpME Ter pzMilMeAVERaoel SGTATel eene 831 ET e e E STAT CT 831 SENS amp J PMETersp S TAT6 1 ruere a E EE E AEE N AE aa 832 SENSe PMETersps UPDeleL STAT e iiaa aaa EE 832 UNI cnz PMETercps POMer rennen aana aaa ATENa akna kaana sns estne nai 832 UNITA PME Ters p gt POWER E 833 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise r
561. re Ert pre rra 364 Coupling ratios Default itn er rro Eee eerie es 371 RBWIVBW osiris 370 Span RBW ENS Span RBW remote seen 768 CP ACLR 106 About Absolute relative values 124 134 Adjust Settings sess Channel bandwidths Channel bandwidths remote control 644 Channel NAMES o ceterae Channel names remote control Channel power density sssssusse Channel Setup sii seis rase eee Channel setup remote control Channel spacing esses Channel spacing remote control 644 Channel spacings Clear Wiile ener ertet tra Comparing channel powers seeesssss 147 Configuring ae dna Configuring MSR signals 129 pcr PN Fast ACLR Fixed reference for CP i ccicccissececsscesesescssnesssccstosoeseas 125 Frequency Spall eisni iaiia eve inven ete General Settings n IBW method ET Limit CHECK 1 eorr aa Limit check remote control Max Hold EE Meas rement erroe irren rrini Measurement remote control Measurement examples sssssses Measurement methodS sese 109 Mode e Mu ltiGarriet rtr ette Noise cancellation Number of channels Number of channels remote control 644
562. red the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values lt Standard gt The query returns the name of the currently loaded standard SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined SEM standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Usage Event Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 183 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for SEM standards is C r_s instr sem_ std Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory mentioned above In that case you have to include the relative path to the file Controlling the Measurement The following commands control the measurement itself LTS S PECIFUYE EE 674 SENSG ISWEBBAMOBE E 674 INITiate ESPectrum This command initiates a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Usage Event SENSe SWEep MODE Mode This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measure ments You can select other measurements with cCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe L User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 674 11 5 6 3 Configuring
563. requency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span For more information see chapter 5 5 4 1 Ranges and Range Settings on page 167 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 174 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the input attenuation for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 20 Selects the measurement range Parameters lt Attenuation gt Numeric value Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range RST 10 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See RF Attenuator on page 176 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range LEES User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 679 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 88 v c Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example ESP RANG2 INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuatio
564. ress port SOCKET where e TCPIP designates the network protocol used e host address is the IP address or host name of the device e LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub instrument instO selects the VXI 11 protocol default hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional e port determines the used port number e SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 555 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation DREES Remote Control Basics Example e Instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string using VXI 11 pro tocol is TCPIP 192 1 2 9 2 INSTR e The DNS host name name is FSW 123456 the valid resource string using HiSLIP is TCPIP FSW 123456 hislipO e Araw socket connection can be established using TCPIP 2192 1 2 3 5025 SOCKET Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource string For details on configuring the LAN connection see chapter 10 5 1 How to Configure a Network on page 599 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer T
565. rget computer When the tool is started a Connection settings dialog box is displayed Define the con nection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the R amp S FSW you want to control If you are using the tool directly on the R amp S FSW you can use an NT Pipe COM Parser connection which requires no further configuration For help on setting up other connection types check the tool s online help by clicking the Help button in the dialog box The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the tool 10 4 Network and Remote Control Settings The network and remote control settings are defined in the Network Remote dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select Network Remote The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 10 6 Configuring the Network and Remote Control on page 947 Step by step instructions are provided in chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 598 e General Network SemingS 2 cccee ccccccateecseeecaeseeeceeebeaaeteencevesanenesaeeesssanenenaeeed 590 GPIB s it 592 e CompaHbilby ENEE atate tenter eae ee ox o e teat rater eae 594 EE S ET oco E 597 10 4 1 General Network Settings The R amp S FSW can be operated in a local area network LAN for example to control the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer The genera
566. ri e er Ee rie Rer Ee INTA Ras ap a e eMe Eee cis ae FORMat DEXPort HEAD els ier err ne eee a Vende oues rero eec Edea aaa EE Ad eg FORMatDEXPott TRA GGS iuvet edi teer ere Ree nere e de o E Ea Ver ei e Durs dep geet ea pru und FORMatli DATA E elei el ee d HCOPy CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt e HCOPY CMAP lt item gt HSL gege geste dd rre deed HCObv CMAb Jemz PDtEFEined eene nnne tnnt ense t nnne trn n ers innen nnns in HCOPy DESTination device crt xiii tee rib rez ca ceu e caer eta a Es ana Y Le NE EM EELE E NENAS Ei HCOPY DEVICE COLOT s HCOPy DEVice LANGuagedevice ioni rri rar eno n ouk ok panda d aou iod tau denas EENS HCOPy ITEM ALL ws HCOPy ITEM WINDOW TEST HCObv PDAGE OhRlentaton device z A HCOPy TDST amp STAT C lt G VICO gt cccctesceicsseicctessicascsncsscedsecesacevtendteccacenetesshdcodtedaneebacdassndvadandbedsaceasvendendandt HCOPy IMMediatesdevices 3 e see ence nt eot erepta aie Bel aa HC Ob IMMedate devicezENEST ttnn EnrE natnn ren atenen neen INITiate CONMeas IN Tite CONTINUOUS c E IN Tiate ES P CChUM TT IN Tiate SE Quencer ABORE m ll ele E EE ll elle le EE INITiate SPURious e INI Tiate IMMediate ce tne react c ter eret dE n erede aere deel I ANB o EEEEEEEEEEEEEMEEMMEMM Jl Te W REID UCIIBAD LO E
567. rinting device MMEM Sends the hardcopy to a file You can select the file name with MMEMory NAME You can select the file format with HCOPy DEVice LANGuage lt device gt SYST COMM PRIN Sends the hardcopy to a printer You can select the printer withSySTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect lt device gt SYST COMM CLIP Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard The format should be WEMF RST SYST COMM CLIP SCPI confirmed See Device on page 510 HCOPy DEVice COLor State This command turns color printing on and off Parameters State Example Usage ON Color printing OFF Black and white printing RST OFF HCOP DEV COL ON SCPI confirmed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 921 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Managing Settings and Results HCOPy DEVice LANGuage lt device gt lt Format gt This command selects the file format for a print job Suffix lt device gt Parameters lt Format gt Usage Manual operation 1 2 Printing device GDI Graphics Device Interface Default format for the output to a printer configured under Win dows Must be selected for the output to the printer interface Can be used for the output to a file The printer driver configured under Windows is used in this case and a printer specific file for mat is thus generated BMP JPG PNG Data format for output to files only SCPI confirmed See Device Setup on page
568. rmat is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other formats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For HO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed LSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 852 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements Basics TRACe lt n gt DATA lt Trace gt lt Data gt lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results If you use it as a setting command it transfers trace data from an external source to the R amp S FSW The data format depends on FORMat DATA Parameters lt Trace gt Selects the trace to write the data to TRACE1 TRACE6 lt Data gt Contains the data to transfer Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For details see table 11 4 LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Sourious Emis sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For details see table 11 5 SPURious Returns the peak list of Spurious Emission measurements SPECtrogram SGRam Returns the results of the spectrogram result display For
569. rnyCATal g eee EENS e du A Ere ede Ra ooo ee dus EM EIN EXER LA REDE N 907 TEE ENEE Ge e 907 MMEMO C DIREC M 908 MMEMOPA COMMEN EE 908 vti COPY dS 908 MME MOM DATA DE 909 MMEMON DELO EH 909 lee le EE 909 NA ERR drei R 910 MMEMON EEN 910 TEE ee EE 910 MMEMbry NETWorkDISGODHMSCL iode ire iil ie AEA Taa 911 MMEMaoRINETWOFESMAD 22 rici e ente oe Rope crt tagen cb ais reae eheu une Ce 911 MMEMonv NE Work UNUSeddrives nennen nean enne nennen 911 MMEMbry NETWorklSEDdrives erre actin ea ue ERE deo PRAET Ra ERR ER ERRERUTeREe sal 911 IMMEMORORDIRGGIOEM TEE 912 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 906 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Manual operation MMEMory CATalog Managing Settings and Results See Saving the Evaluation List on page 184 See Saving the Evaluation List on page 205 See Decimal Separator on page 424 See Exporting the Peak List on page 470 This command returns the contents of a particular directory Query parameters lt Path gt Return value
570. ro enn SEENEN Rade cce a Ada cR SSES 955 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction lt ServiceFunction gt This command starts a service function The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system password Parameters lt ServiceFunction gt String containing the ID of the service function The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers separated by a point function group number board number e function number parameter 1 see the Service Manual parameter 2 see the Service Manual Usage Event Manual operation See Service Function on page 533 See Send on page 533 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction LASTresult This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used Usage Query only LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 954 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete This command deletes the results of the most recent service function you have used Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Results on page 534 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE lt FileName gt This command saves the results of the most recent service function you have used Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the file name Manual operation See Save Results on page 534 DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo lt FileName gt This command creates a zip file with important support information The zi
571. rogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 868 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 5 Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Next Minimum on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a delta marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 See Search Minimum on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 Retrieving Marker Results The following commands are used to retrieve the results of markers You can use the marker values to position the center frequency or reference level directly using the following commands CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 762 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence on page 7
572. rolling the instrument s via SCPI A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands see chapter 11 11 Using the Status Register on page 956 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 570 R amp S FSW 10 1 7 1 amp logic AND logic OR of all bits one register for each channel Si Hierarchy of Status Registers Network and Remote Operation REESEN Remote Control Basics As shown in the following figure the status information is of hierarchical structure not used Range completed MSRA Capture Finish HCOPy in progress Waiting for TRIGger MEASuring SWEeping not used CACLR FAIL ALT3 11 LOWer UPPer FAIL ALT2 LOWer FAIL ALT2 UPPer FAIL ALT1 LOWer FAIL ALT1 UPPer FAIL ADJ LOWer FAIL ADJ UPPer FAIL STAT QUES ACPLimit 15 not used 9 8 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL STAT QUES LMARgin lt n gt 15 not used 1
573. rom the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 287 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Return values lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 828 R amp S FSW Remote Commands SS a ee ef Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe State This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 288 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in co
574. rrently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part For more information on the positive transition part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 572 STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt E MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 958 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 11 6 11 12 Emulating Other Instruments Commands STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the
575. rst marker position is at 100 MHz the second marker position is at 200 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 465 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements Return values lt QFactor gt Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 888 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MG ees Analyzing Measurements Basics To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values Distance The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 464 CALCulate lt n gt MAR
576. ry SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL State MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL State This command includes or excludes all limit lines active and inactive when storing or loading a configuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL LIN ALL ON Manual operation See Items on page 496 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE MMEMory SELect I TEM NONE This command does not include any of the following items when storing or loading a configuration file e Hardware configuration MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings e Limitlines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL e Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive e Transducers MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL Example MMEM SEL NONE Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 496 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam boolean MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam boolean This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a config uration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL SGR ON Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive State MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive State This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file SS H
577. ry of instrument ID The instrument ID defined in SETUP gt Network Remote gt GPIB gt Identification String is returned M2 Default value range step size M3 Default value range step size MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker MKBW Default value MKPT Step size MKPX Step size OL Storage of instrument settings 80 characters are returned as information on the instrument settings The contents of the 80 characters returned does not correspond to the original data contents of the 8566A 8568A family OL Readout of instrument settings The 80 characters read by means of OL are accepted as information on the corresponding instrument settings The contents of the 80 characters read does not correspond to the original data contents of the 8566A 8568A family RB Default value range step size RL Default value step size RLPOS Adapts the position of the reference level even if the tracking generator normalization is not active RQS Supported bits 1 Units key pressed 2 End of Sweep 3 Device error 4 Command complete 5 Illegal command 11 12 2 4 Model Dependent Default Settings If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model the GPIB address is automati cally switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R amp S FSW 20 is still set If a different value is set this value is maintained Upon return to SCPI this address remains unchanged
578. s HCOP ITEM ALL IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 e Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The response 3 5E9 in the pre vious example stands for 3 5 GHz e Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON ERREUR RA a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 567 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 1 6 ER Remote Control Basics Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 e Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines
579. s RST right diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 162 See Left Limit Right Limit on page 225 See Search Limits on page 452 See Search Limits on page 456 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits ZOOM STATe lt State gt This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 863 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 4 Analyzing Measurements Basics Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits on page 452 See Using Zoom Limits on page 453 See Search Limits on page 456 CALCulate THReshold lt Level gt This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search Parameters lt Level gt Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Limits on page 452 See Search Threshold on page 453 See Search Limits on page 456 CALCulate THReshold STATe lt State gt This command turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off Parameters lt Stat
580. s Setting Basic Measurement Par Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising NEGative ameters edge Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Slope on page 389 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 384 Using a trigger or gated measurements turns the squelch off see SENSe Di SQUelch STATe on page 893 Note on external triggers EMod If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can con tinue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs For troubleshooting tips see Uncompleted sequential commands blocked re channels on page 1008 mote User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 785 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt Source gt Example Manual operation Setting Basic Measurement Parameters IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 I
581. s lt FileNames gt Example Usage Manual operation String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is pos sible to query a certain type of files only List of file and directory names separated by commas MMEM CAT C R_S Instr user SPOOL PNG Returns all files in C R_S Instr user whose names start with SPOOL have 6 letters and the extension PNG e g SPOOL1 PNG SPOOL2 PNG SPOOL3 PNG Query only SCPI confirmed See Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files on page 182 MMEMory CATalog LONG lt Path gt This command returns the contents of a particular directory with additional information about the files Query parameters lt Path gt Return values lt UsedDiskSpace gt lt FreeDiskSpace gt String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is pos sible to query a certain type of files only Byte size of all files in the directory Remaining disk space in bytes User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 907 R amp S FSW Remote Commands DESSERT Managing Settings and Results lt Filelnfo gt lt NameFileN gt lt SuffixFileN gt lt SizeFile
582. s Basics Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 449 CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel Manual operation See Marker Stepsize on page 449 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CAL CulateM Ab kerlOENvcude inneni innnan nnkan aaan nnana 861 GALE GulatesnssMARKer PEXCURSIONS ncnian Eaa E a EE EEEE EEEE RENEA 862 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STAT cececeeeeeeeeeceeaaeaeaeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaneaeaneeenens 862 CAL CulateM Ab ker XZ GL IMutelEFT 863 CALCulates MARKenrxX SLIMUSIRIGAT WEE 863 CAL CulateMAhker XG Mits Z0OOMISTATel iiia i aai 863 ee HIEN el DEE 864 GAL Culate THRESHOIAS TAN 6 situada cesse nd det xa eap a aa aaa E Ea 864 CALCulate MARKer LOEXclude lt State gt This command
583. s It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 11 8 3 7 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 878 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EE EE Analyzing Measurements Basics CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 879 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X cccscccescecsseceseeseeeseneeenes 879 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontlxedRbOinty 879 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontxedRbOntv OFtzet 880 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 449 See Defining a Reference Point on page 463 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint X lt RefPoint gt This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Param
584. s 527 SYSTEM do m M r 39 T Tabs yer ERREUR Channels AITNE WEE IEW EE VV ILC MING Rt Task bar ACCESSING WE 26 TCP IP Address External generator eeeseeeeeeeeeereeneee 304 External generator sssssssssseeeees 304 Taf channel Dar i rere eerte reete 70 TD SCDMA BTS Application se edente ei Pert rete teens 93 TD SCDMA UE Application eor te aA ue ete tonnes 93 Technology MSR Tx chantiel erissa niani 138 Temperature je Check remote uu So zie E Frontend status bit 513 582 Frontend remote Self alignmoent ect drnerene Self alignment remote ssssssessss 937 Status register ci cidit e deett nea 582 Temperatures Hardware etr re ere erii 535 Theme prar 541 542 Display remote sisisi 943 Third order intercept point SOO TOI nre itte rna 233 Threshold Binit Il 477 483 Peak searcli eene 453 457 Signal tracking itte eerie era 351 Time zn p M 537 Hiding restoring seeeeee 539 Instrument setting Rupe 33 Time Domain Power ssis ikinin seridiadideissiaarnierdi 222 ele ul NEE Limit TEE Measurement Measurement remote control c eseeeeeeeeeees 721 Measurement example cccceeeeeeeeeee
585. s all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT OPTion identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the CD ROM Return values Options The query returns a list of all installed and activated options sep arated by commas where B lt number gt describes hardware options K lt number gt describes software options For PSA89600 emulation the option is indicated as B7J for the OPT query B7J 140 if SYST PSA WIDeband is activated Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 620 R amp S FSW Remote Commands PRAG C nnn Common Commands PCB Address Pass Control Back Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of the triggered action Setting parameters Address Range 0 to 30 Usage Setting only PRE Value Parallel poll Register Enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 PSC Action Power on Status Clear Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service reques
586. s compared to the previously stored peak the maximum of the two is stored as the current peak The peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary STATe State This command turns time domain power measurements on and off This measurement in only available in zero span User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 722 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m E U P Ge Configuring and Performing Measurements When you turn the measurement on the R amp S FSW activates a marker and positions it on the peak power level in the marker search range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Time Domain Power on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the mean time domain power on and off The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Results on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off The R amp S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Parameters State ON OFF RST
587. s for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part For more information on the enable part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 572 STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the cu
588. s the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 287 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe lt Duration gt This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 287 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 830 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a CC ee ee Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number o
589. s the upper limit of a particular power class Note The last power class always has an upper limit of 200 dBm e The upper limit of a power class must always be the same as the lower limit of the subsequent power class e The power class must already exist see CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass COUNt on page 691 Suffix class 1 4 power class Parameters lt Level gt Range 199 9 dBm to 200 dBm Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 180 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command defines the lower limit of a particular power class Note e The first power class always has a lower limit of 200 dBm Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 692 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 6 6 Configuring and Performing Measurements e The lower limit of a power class must always be the same as the upper limit of the previous power class e The power class must already exist see CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass COUNt on page 691 Suffix class 1 4 power class Parameters lt Level gt Range 200 dBm to 199 9 dBm Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 180 Configuring MSR SEM Measurements The following commands configure MS
590. s value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 350 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 764 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu E H Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 350 SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span If you set a span of 0 Hz in the Spectrum application the R amp S FSW starts a measurement in the time domain Parameters lt Span gt The minimum span for measurements in the frequency domain is 10 Hz For SEM and spurious emission measurements the mini mum span is 20 Hz Range 0 Hz to fmax RST Full span Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Zero Span on page 102 See Span on page 348 See Last Span on page 350 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command restores the full span Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Full Span on page 349 See Zero Span on page 349 SENSe FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines a start frequency for measuremen
591. seeeenees 898 CAL Culate LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE cccceccccescccseeeceesecscceseceseeseceaeeesesecseeseeeeseeeesnees 898 GAL Culate LIMItSK LOWS OFF EE 898 GAL Gulate LIMIt lt k gt LOWer SHIFte ccccc cascaceeccuhs SEENEN ENEE 899 CAL CulatelIMitcks LOWerGb AChng nennen enne nnns nh nnns 899 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 895 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Eee Analyzing Measurements Basics CAL CulateLlMitck LOWerGtate nik daaadn nikinin innari na ninnan na 899 CALCulate LIMitsk LOWer THReshold issnin aaa aana NES aaan 899 CALC ulate LIMIS EE 900 e Mecum dcus 900 CAECulate LIMitekss UPPE DATAL 222212 ecd Fa Rotae etn aaa rete eg 900 CAL GulateLIMIESK UPPerM ARGIMD EE 901 GALOGulate LIMitek UP Per e RE 901 CAL CulatellMitck UbberOktzet 901 GALCOulateLIMiESKSSUPPerSHBIEL EE 901 CAL Culate LIMit k gt UP Per SPACAJ os terrere tetuer eva cete IR Lh cure eb tastes 902 GALGulate LIMiEEK UPPer S RN NEE 902 GALCulate LIMiteks UPPer THReshold 2c eadein t cds aues aru an enean Rare nuits 902 CALCulate LIMit COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for a limit line Parameters Comment String containing the description of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 483 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Parameters
592. sen 559 Instrument name Changing E 602 Instrument Settings see User Manuel isisisi niaii 33 Interface messages ssesssssseeeeneeeene 559 Interfaces el lie EE elek Assigning CHANGING SPD avo e IP Address DNS Senei ii rie eae ence t E P E 601 IP configuration LX 4 tee ces 604 yp M 571 ISU FAG T 574 Iac 620 Items EC E 493 Se ltlirigS ure eicit Ea Ande as 496 K Key Keyboard On screen sssssssssssssseeeee eene nennen nnne nnne 38 KG PAG sod inr terere rone bear deve Ee e 77 Key layOUL Ae 78 Overview ssssssssssssesseeeee enne nenne nnne 42 Keys lt MKR gt Ss Se lte E e WEE 458 Peak Search cccccsccccccccccecesseeeeeeeecesesssesssseaeeeeees 457 PRESET RUN CONT Ainin E 245 373 RUN SINGLE E 245 373 427 Keywords see Mnemonics eeess sese 560 L LAN COMMQUIATION Em 29 Configuration see user Manual 18 Gornfigurihg eren 602 Connector sssssssssssesessssrnssesrese senene we 48 Interface 554 IP address 555 Remote control interface 554 Reset seseeseesssss 598 VISA S 555 K Mee 556 Last span SOK GY enero bae es kdo reete ker deo yox Re 350 Legacy format us aee 593 LFEOI GPIB terminator sss 593 L
593. ssions range ssseess 202 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Predefined standards CP ACGUR iih ter bed eoe et 121 131 153 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 802 Channel settings s esses 489 External Mixer B21 ssesssessss 328 MC p 489 Recalling settings esses 500 Presetting ere ER 274 Pre trigder soos cre cte Pr rh fe te tee 388 Preview Trigger Gate settings esses 384 Print colors Changing see User Manual n eeens 83 Printer GT 510 Printer configuration see user Manual sse 18 Printers InStallinG WE 511 Printer setup see User Manual sseessesesseesreeseessrresrrnrrrssssrrerrren 33 Printing ev me c Colors remote Medii ioo Ene he o ro rhe da adie fd ens Screerishots EE due EE Print Screen Ici 508 Probability range Statisti T M Ht 218 PROBE le E A0 Probes Connectors deter herede ea 44 Microbutton s Ip m D M Programming examples piel a M 666 AM Modulatation Depth sssseseessssss 736 Carrier to Noise ratio esssssseeeeee 670 EMI measurement External Mixer B21 sssessssessss 810 Frequency sweep
594. sssssssssssss 503 Frame count Reici ani 374 SpOCtrograms onini eie ertet tai ntt 413 Frames Spectrogram Marker sese 447 Free Run Trigger softKey EE 385 Frequency Configuration Softkey sss 347 Coupling power sensor i External generator ssssssssseeseeee External reference AAA Range E ERE Range defining is aede Frequency axis SCAG 25 a cete erre ied Frequency converting measurements External generator ssssssssseeseeee 299 Frequency counter see also Signal count ssessssssssssss 440 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator ssssss 299 External generator ssssssssssssss 299 306 Reverse sweep external generator 301 TTL synchronization external generator 300 Frequency denominator External generator sss 306 Frequency lines Remote control nentes 893 Frequency numerator External generator sss 306 Frequency e er edet eere tate duro 350 External generator suse 299 306 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 300 307 Extending reote er rer ette ba 318 External Mixer B21 sss 318 Frequency Reference Signal see User Manual rir o
595. stem during the time the expected event has not yet occurred In this way the system can respond to user inputs mouse clicks key entries during the waiting time It is advisable to employ the Hold auxiliary function which returns control to the oper ating system for a selectable waiting time see section Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse so enabling user inputs during the waiting time result 0 For i 1 To 10 Abort after max 10 loop iterations Status viWaitOnEvent analyzer VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI TMO IMMEDIATE VI NULL VI NULL Check event queue If status VI SUCCESS Then result 1 CALL Srq If SRQ is recognized gt subroutine for evaluation Else CALL Hold 20 Call hold function with 20 ms waiting time User inputs are possible Endif Next i If result 0 Then Debug Print Timeout Error Program aborted Output error message STOP Stop software Endif Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse e 2 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1001 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 14 1 4 Programming Examples If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time control ove
596. sults on page 523 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut MC DISTance lt Bandwidth gt This command selects the distance of the peaks of the microwave calibration signal for calibration of the YIG filter LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 934 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _ ONCE upPPPm P Configuring the R amp S FSW Parameters Bandwidth SMALI Small offset of combline frequencies WIDE Wide offset of combline frequencies Manual operation See Calibration Frequency MW on page 532 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal Before you can use the command you have to feed in a calibration signal with DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect Parameters Frequency Possible frequencies of the calibration signal are fix If you define a frequency that is not available the R amp S FSW uses the next available frequency Example a frequency of 20 MHz is rounded up to the next available frequency 21 33 MHz RST 64 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Calibration Frequency RF on page 531 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut RF SPECtrum Bandwidth This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal Parameters Bandwidth NARRowband Narrowband signal for power calibration
597. supports various protocols TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR un For a description of the protocols refer Raw socket to VISA address string VXI 11 Protocol TCPIP host address port SOCKET HiSLIP Protocol Socket Communication GPIB IEC VISA address string A GPIB bus interface option IEEE Bus GPIB primary sddress rrINBSTH R amp S FSW B10 according to the IEC Interface 625 1 IEEE 488 1 standard is located no secondary address on the rear panel of the instrument For a description of the interface refer to 10 1 1 2 GPIB Interface IEC 625 IEEE 418 Bus Interface USB VISA address string USB connectors are located on the rear USB vendor ID product ID serial number INSTR panel of the instrument For a description of the interface refer to 10 1 1 3 USB Interface VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces see also chapter 10 1 3 VISA Libra ries on page 558 Within this interface description the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC IEEE bus interface 10 1 1 1 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols The network card can be operated with
598. surement are configured differently For more information see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 116 In this case use the following commands Useful commands for configuring MSR ACLR measurements described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 665 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 639 CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe on page 655 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 650 SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 SENSe POWer TRACe on page 642 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 665 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 Remote commands exclusive to configuring MSR ACLR measurements CAL Culatel IM ACbowerGAb oapzAbBGolute enne 657 CALOCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute STATe essen 657 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative eese 658 CALOCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative S TATe sees 658 CALOCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RESUIt essen nennen nennen 658 ISGENGe IPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDth GAb 0oapz 659 SENSe POWer ACHannel FiLTer ALPHa GAP lt Qa p gt eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
599. sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI n Retrieving Results Query the results for the EMI measurement First marker frequency then final test level CALC MARK1 X CALC MARK1 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK2 X CALC MARK2 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK3 X CALC MARK3 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK4 X R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 14 Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC MARK4 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK5 X CALC MARK5 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK6 X CALC MARK6 FUNC FME RES Query the result of the limit check for trace 1 CALC LIM1 FAIL Query the result of the limit check and the distance from the limit line for each marker CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK2 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK2 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK5 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK5 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK6 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK6 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT List Evaluations A list evaluation is a mutliple power measurement that measures the power at up to 200 frequencies The measurement itself is a ti
600. t lt PowerAbs gt lt PowerRel gt lt PowerDelta gt lt Limit Check gt lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt lt No gt range number lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt start and stop frequency of the range RBW resolution bandwidth lt PeakFreq gt frequency of the peak in a range lt PowerAbs gt absolute power of the peak in dBm lt PowerRel gt power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc lt PowerDelta gt distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check lt LimitCheck gt state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt reserved 0 0 Table 11 6 Return values for SPECtrogram parameter For every frame in the spectrogram the command returns the power levels that have been measured one for each sweep point The number of frames depends on the size of the history depth The power level depends on the unit you have currently set TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory lt Trace gt lt OffsSwPoint gt lt NoOfSwPoints gt This command queries the previously captured trace data for the specified trace from the memory As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions making the command faster than the TRAC DATA command This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of inter est If no parameters are specified with the command the entire trac
601. t AM AM demodulation FM FM demodulation RST AM Example CALC MARK FUNC DEM SEL FM Manual operation See Modulation on page 468 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation STATe lt State gt This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement reaches a marker position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3 Manual operation See Marker Demodulation State on page 468 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 892 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 4 11 8 4 1 Analyzing Measurements Basics SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel lt Threshold gt This command defines the threshold for selective demodulation All signals below the threshold are not demodulated Parameters lt Threshold gt Percentage of the display height Range 0 to 100 RST 50 Example DEM SQU LEV 80 Sets the squelch level to 80 of the displayed signal Manual operation See Squelch level on page 469 SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe State This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off For selective demodulation the R amp S FSW turns on a video trigger whose level corre ponds to the squelch level Therefore it turns other triggers or gates off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are not sent to the audio
602. t without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results 2 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL RETE RU TUE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 810 Setting Basic Measurement P
603. t adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a Parallel Poll Enable register PPE which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit con sidering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll using the command IST The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPc This com mand allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types
604. t can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 011 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RST ReSeT Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SySTem PRESet Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user defined settings see MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 916 For more details on default values see chap ter 8 1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration Preset on page 489 Usage Setting only P PQ User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 621 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Common Commands SRE lt Contents gt Service Request Enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters lt Contents gt Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB STatus Byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG TRiGger Trigg
605. t n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow CAlCulate cnzPGEarchlpEAksearch GUlDhanges nennen ereen rennen 709 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics APD STATE cccccecssceseeceeesseceeesecseeesecseceaecaesaecaesanesaeseesaeeaeesaeseeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeess 712 CALCulat lt n iS TATISUCS CODE XSP snyer anni eanan ee ced rena kenn epe pte i teu eb a et rne TANE SEa ENRE 718 CAL Culte nz GT ATlsttceCCDETSTATel A 712 CAlLCulatecnzGTATlsticehNGAMoles A 713 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet CAL Culate nzGTATlsttce GCALeAlTOONCE sessesieeeeiesieeiseisiisiisittintisttsttstitintittiattattstnstntintrnrntnnttnt 716 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE X RANGE ce ee cece eee ceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesaeseeeseeeseeessaeeseaees 717 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel esses enne nennen enne 717 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE Y LOWED eee cece ccee cere eeeeeceeeeseeseaeeseaeeseaeesaeessaeseseesensessneeseeessaees 717 CALOCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT esses nennen nennen nre nne ntes innen inneren enne 717 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 118 Ver HE LN ERE 895 CALCulate n TLINe Line STATe eee eee entente nnn n ntn nhat aita k in ia arna aaia 895 CALC latesn e TEE 775 CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE eee cece eeene cece crease seaeeeseeeeeaeeesaneeseaeessaeeseasesseesseeenaees 827 ree User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1018 R amp S FSW List of remote
606. t settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level on page 356 See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 357 Configuring the Data Input and Output XML Lom 795 Ss Using Extential MESS iiic eere aad eat amas vue a tazac aea tuo eR apa DaD eh ka 798 Setting Up Probes T 812 e External Generator Control 814 e Working with Power Gensors enne nennen nnns 825 e Configuring tlie E 836 RF Input INPuUEATTenuation P RO Testen RESBL 22 hi terream ra rau n reo va DR dur deele AER 795 INPURCONINGCION M PC m 796 lzwsesiti nS 796 INPuEFIL le IS RE E EE 796 INPUUFILTeRYIGESTAM KC e c 797 INPULCIMPOdaLIee 2 c roe ro haue neenon ae eu Bet ce send ave cue edo vena ena abet space erre enden cedo sa deve aa 797 NPU Gh ER 797 liz Eins iscap UI X M 798 INPut Be Er 798 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the ST
607. te Desktop control The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R amp S FSW 1 On the controller close the Remote Desktop window at any time The connection to the R amp S FSW is terminated 2 On the R amp S FSW a user logs on The connection to the controller is terminated as a result A message is displayed on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the instru ment User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 614 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation 10 5 5 5 10 5 6 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Restoring the connection to the R amp S FSW Follow the instructions above for setting up a connection to the R amp S FSW If the con nection is terminated and then restored the R amp S FSW remains in the same state How to Shut Down the R amp S FSW via Remote Operation Select the R amp S FSW softfrontpanel and close the application with the key combina tion ALT F4 Select the desktop and press the key combination ALT F4 A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown process Respond to the safety query with Yes The connection with the controller is terminated and the R amp S FSW is shut down How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC When you switch on the instrument it is always in manual operation state local state and
608. te gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 358 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 358 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 778 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 778 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 3 4 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 358 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 358 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlayPWINDowens E TRAGCe Y SCALe eire eoe renun te eder ihe nu Ba npn AEN 779 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRAC
609. teer pec eroe RA ERR IHR RR Q2 aera 801 SENSE Mixer FREQ uenby S el 802 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet essere nennen nnne nnns 802 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue 2 e eenienieeie enint nth tuna haha Re pna na inris in 802 SENSE Mixer HAhMonte HIGH STAT e vid ENNEN 803 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue eene nennen 803 SENSe MIXern HARMONIG TYPE sirrinin Seege tatu rie en nhi en redde hee e an ioiii 803 BENSE MIX HARMonic er AEN 804 SENSE OI Ree WE 804 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe BIGHEL ccc ccececee ce cce acude tree a cene KEEN a cancessquasscuceeenanecsneeees 804 SENSe MIXerEOSS TABES EOW cose ceed cerit titu e retener teet acne teen Nee 804 SENSE MIX r ee Ee A Ems 805 POSEN See MMe PORTS M EE 805 SENS amp Mi Xer RFOV rrange STATE iniii ria aa aa a a eiaa 805 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 799 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 328 SENSe
610. teg reo IGENGe IFbREOuencv CENT er STER AUTO SENS FbREOuencv CEN Ter STEP UNK SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor SENSe FREQUENCY OF FSet 2 orent rr t metra a e CAESA NEVENA NEEESE NEEE I SENSe FREQuency SPAN 5 on enr rre oie dieta dE Fe beue Desa De eee pee SENSe FREQuency SPAN FLILIL 3 1rd suture dee epu sae e Ue ndi ea ge cede SENSe FREQuency STARt sss nnen reiten rre neret e treten etre nennen nre nnn nne SENSe FREQUENCY STOPs nii EEG ere tee trea ee dh vr ces Evae aed SENSe LIST POWer RESult SENSe LIST POWer SEW ices cane ef rg ue eid dee ean Da Y da p E nee IGENGe II POMWer STATe nennen nete tnrtr etre eter e ritenere nnne nennen nns SENSe LIST POWer SEQuUence nter tnn erre rre reet erri rana nugs EISE le ET EISE ER Eh ee E EE 701 SENSe LIST RANGe LIMit STATe IEN Ge IUISTbRANGe zange BANDwidib Vleo 701 SENSe LIST RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution eene 700 SENSe LIST RANGe xrange DELete eiecit enenatis tajaan iveda ei piinia aiaia iana IGENGeIUlGTRANGe rangez DE Techor A IGENZGe IUlGTRANGe crange Fil Ter SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation IGENZGe IUlSTbRANGe zangezJNPutATTenuatton AUTO 704 IEN Ge IUISTbRANGe zangezINPutGAIN GTATe IEN Ge IUISTbRANGe zangez INPutGAINTVAL ue IEN Ge IUISTbRANGe zangez LUIMIC START IENGe lU ISThRANGe zangez LIMIGTOP AA SENSe LIST R
611. terms related to the LXI standard LAN Configuration The LAN configuration consists of three parts IP configuration provides all mandatory LAN parameters LE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 603 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation DREES How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control e Advanced LAN Configuration provides LAN settings that are not declared manda tory by the LXI standard e Ping Client provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instrument and other devices IP Configuration The LAN Configuration gt IP configuration web page displays all mandatory LAN param eters and allows their modification The TCP IP Mode configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned see also chapter 10 5 1 2 How to Assign the IP Address on page 600 For the manual configuration mode the static IP address subnet mask and default gateway are used to configure the LAN The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing Automatic IP to obtain the instru ment IP address Changing the LAN configuration is password protected The default password is LxiWe blfc notice upper and lower case characters You can change the LXI password in the Network Remote dialog box see chap ter 10 4 4 LXI Settings on page 597 Advanced LAN Configuration The LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration parameters are used as fol
612. tet ee Eesti eee eds 800 ISENSeTMIXerE THIResheld onere une etna re xg cune pin eege 800 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the measure ment This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 327 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 799 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 331 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 799 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A ERREUR RA LL SS TM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 799 R amp S FSW Remote Commands a a Ss Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 331 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RS
613. th synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Before you can use the command you have to turn on the frequency counter Return values lt Frequency gt Frequency at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK COUN ON Activates the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK COUN FREQ Outputs the measured value of marker 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Signal Count Marker State on page 460 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt COUNt RESolution lt Resolution gt This command defines the resolution of the frequency counter Parameters lt Resolution gt 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Hz RST 0 1 Hz Example CALC MARK COUN RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz Manual operation See Resolution on page 460 Marker Demodulation The following commands control the demodulation of AM and FM signals at the marker position CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonDEModulation GON Tinuous 891 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDOff ccccessccceeseeeeeeseeeenees 892 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DEModulation SELect ccccssscceesseeceseeeceseeeenees 892 CALCulate
614. the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 280 See Reference Level on page 356 See Unit on page 357 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which connec tor is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported e 9 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 797 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 6 2 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Man ual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Ana lyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 280 INPut UPORt STATe State This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector This 9 po
615. the displayed results or the connection to an external device was inter rupted temporarily gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps gray Message An event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further oper ation green No errors No messages displayed next to the channel name This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is displayed D If any error information is available for a measurement channel the Bl icon is displayed as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the currently selected measurement only Furthermore a status bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO reg ister for the application concerned see STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Reg ister on page 579 Messages of a specific type can be queried using the SYST ERR EXT command see SYSTem ERRor EXTended on page 952 The following keywords are used DATA ERR For Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 only Error in digital UO input data For details on the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual FIFO OVLD For Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 only Input sample rate from connected instrument is too high For details on the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual IF OVLD Overloa
616. the end test OPC Ue a a oce Less ee RST Activate new IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 1 Set sweep count for new IQ channel SENS SWEEP COUNT 6 Change trace modes for IQ channel DISP TRAC1 MODE BLANK DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF switch back to first default analyzer channel INST SEL Spectrum WAI Switch into SEM SENSe SWEep MODE ESPectrum Load Sem standard file for W CDMA SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard WCDMAN3GPPNDLN3GPP DL xml User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 630 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Set sweep count in Spectrum channel SENS SWEEP COUNT 5 Create second IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 2 Set sweep count SENS SWEEP COUNT 2 Change trace modes DISP TRAC1 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC2 MODE MINH Create new analyzer channel INSTrument CREate NEW SANalyzer Spectrum 2 Activate ACLR measurement in channel Spectrum 2 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer SELect ACPower Load W CDMA Standard CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer PRESet FW3Gppcdma Change trace modes DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC1 MODE MINH Change sweep count SENS SWEep COUNt 7 Single Sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Switch back to first IQ channel INST SEL IQ 1 WAI Perform a measurement INIT IMM OPC Retrieve results CALC MARK Y Activate Multiview DISPlay ATAB ON Activate Sequencer SYSTem SEQ
617. the limit check Parameters lt LowerLimit gt The first value defines the limit of the lower adjacent channel the lt UpperLimit gt second value the limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent channels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt LowerACH gt text value lt UpperACH gt The command returns two results The first is the result for the lower the second for the upper adjacent channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 652 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _ Ne MMM aMMa Configuring and Performing Measurements Example INIT IMM WAI CALC LIM ACP ACH RES PASSED PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 128 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Limit Checking on page 141 CALCulate LIMit ACPower
618. the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP FUNCtion on page 685 Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP ABSolute 15 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 696 ERREUR RA E M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 684 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EE EE EE Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop on page 176 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP FUNCtion lt Function gt This command enables the use of a function when defining the relative limit for a SEM range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the SEM range lt PClass gt 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters lt Function gt Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line stop value MAX The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit stop value Use the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP and SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP ABSolute commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed rel ative stop
619. ths on page 127 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Adjacent Channel Bandwidths on page 140 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt ch gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel the R amp S FSW sets the bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value but not the other way round The command works hierarchically to set a bandwidth of the 3rd and 4th channel you have to set the bandwidth of the 3rd channel first Steep edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidths on page 127 See Adjacent Channel Definition on page 140 See Adjacent Channel Bandwidths on page 140 ERREUR E I SSS ea User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 645 R amp S FSW Remote Commands MGR OCC M m a Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels Steep edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidths on page 127 See Channel Bandw
620. tification string User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 560 R amp S FSW 10 1 5 2 Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean e FORMat READings DATA lt type gt lt length gt e HCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean e HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB red green blue e HCOPy IMMediate Py ITEM ALL e I Q O e HCOPy ITEM LABel lt string gt e HCOPy PAG e HCOPy PAG Li DIMensions QUADrant N ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Li e HCOPy PAG Gl SCALe numeric value MEMory COPY file source file destination ENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value d S e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value S Ej NSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ONis equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case ins
621. tion HP 856xE available Data Array Size AMPCORRCL AMPCORRCL numeric Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available value Recall AMPCORSAVE AMPCORSAVE Amplitude Correction HP 856xE available numeric value Save ANNOT ANNOT ON OFF Annotation HP 856xE available ANNOT 1 0 HP 8566B ANNOT HP 8568B HP 8594E APB APB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E AT AT numeric value DB Attenuation HP 8566A available DM HP 8568A ATON HP 856xE ANUP HP 8566B AT ABTO HP 8568B Be HP 8594E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 965 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i a Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models AUNITS AUNITS DBM DBMV Amplitude Units HP 856xE available DBUV HP 8566B AUNITS HP 8568B HP 8594E AUTOCPL AUTOCPL Coupling default HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E AXB AXB Exchange trace A and B HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E B1 B1 Clear Write B HP 8566A available HP 8568A B2 B2 Max Hold B HP 8566A available HP 8568A B3 B3 View B HP 8566A available HP 8568A B4 B4 Blank B HP 8566A available HP 8568A BL BL Trace B Display Line gt HP 8566A available Trace B HP 8568A BML BML Trace B Display Line gt HP 856xE available Mace n HP8594E BTC BTC Transfer Trace B C HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E
622. tion off Parameters State OFF RST OFF 11 5 14 2 Example Performing List Evaluation The following example shows a list evaluation with the following configuration No Freq Ref RF EI Filter RBW VBW Meas Trigger MHz Level Attenu Attenu Time Level dBm ation ation dB dB 1 935 2 0 10 Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 us 0 2 935 4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440us_ 0 3 935 6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440us 0 sessa Measurement with synchronization via service request ESE 1 SRE 32 Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request LIST POW STAT ON Turns on the list evaluation LIST POW SET ON ON O FF EXT POS 10us 434us Configures the global list evaluation settings and evaluates the peak and RMS power LIST POW 935 2MHZ 0 10 OFF NO 935 4MHZ 0 10 10 CFI 935 6MHZ 0 10 20 CFI OPG Defines a list wit Analyzer produces a service request On service request SENS LIST POW RES Returns the results of the measurements RM 1MHZ 3MHZ 440us 0 L 30KHZ 100KHZ 440us 0 L 30KHZ 100KHZ 440us 0 two for each frequency h 3 entries and initiates the measurement with synchronization to the end peak and RMS power User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 749 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 15 Configuring and Performing Measurements LIST POW 935 2MHZ 0 10 OFF NORM
623. tive for the same measurement channel For commands to set markers in spectrograms see chapter 11 8 3 6 Marker Search Spectrograms on page 871 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement een 845 Configuring the Color Map 848 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement CAL Gulate SGRam CLEar IMMediate 12 2 2 ctore tetro ene tha keen EEN pore nre ad 845 E e Ee Re MEER 845 CAECulate SoRam FRAMe COLDN L unauat ac det ne adero sk ek budre dora SEND exe ARR RDde dada R Cb R EE 846 CAL Gulate SGRamFRAMe SEL amp ct acne etetet ree aed aa beets Re ee EROR DACH eg 846 CALGulate SGRami HBE PU TT 847 CALCulate SGRam TSTamp DATAQ esses nnne nter h nr nennt en nnns 847 CALCulate SGRam TS TampES ER 848 E E EEN BEE 848 CALCulate SGRam CLEar IMMediate This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer Example CALC SGR CLE Resets the result display and clears the memory Usage Event Manual operation See Spectrogram Frames on page 374 See Clear Spectrogram on page 374 CALCulate SGRam CONT State This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 845 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Measurements Basics ON OFF RST OFF INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode IN
624. to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Note When DHCP is changed from On to Off the previously set IP address and subnet mask are retrieved If DHCP is On the IP address of the DHCP server is obtained automatically The configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument You can skip the remaining steps Note When a DHCP server is used a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted This address must first be determined on the instrument itself Thus when using a DHCP server it is recommended that you use the perma nent computer name which determines the address via the DNS server 5 Enter the IP Address for example 10 0 0 10 The IP address consists of four num ber blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum 6 Enter the Subnet Mask for example 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum 7 Close the dialog box If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask the message out of range is displayed in the status line If the settings are correct the configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 8 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the instrument Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R amp S FSW the server can determine the current IP address for the connection
625. to be found because of the peak excursion ERREUR EA I ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 880 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Analyzing Measurements Basics Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FSW looks for during a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 470 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selec
626. to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is e smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid e greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span For more information see chapter 5 5 4 1 Ranges and Range Settings on page 167 Suffix range Parameters Frequency Manual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range Numeric value Note that the minimum frequency range of a SEM range is 20 Hz RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz See Range Start Range Stop on page 174 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 678 R amp S FSW Remote Commands _ OMNCM LJ um Configuring and Performing Measurements e smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid e greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R amp S FSW will adjust the start f
627. tory is displayed EE RU a T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 607 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control GIS Ww 28 File Sharing Choose people on your network to share with Type a name and then click Add or click the arrow to find someone D Add Name Permission Level 2 Siegert Birgit 00052903 Birgit Siegert rohde schwarz com Owner I m having trouble sharing fj Share Cancel 4 Select a user from the list or add a new name and select the Add button 5 Select the Share button 6 Select Done to close the dialog box The drive is shared and can be accessed by the selected users 10 5 5 How to Set Up Remote Desktop Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection While the instrument is in operation the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote computer and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and network resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the R amp S FSW is possible With Windows7 Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system For other ver sions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on This section provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R amp S FSW For details refer to the Windows operating system d
628. tput Type on page 343 See Level on page 344 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputType gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear IESSE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 790 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt OutputType gt Manual operation Setting Basic Measurement Parameters DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered internally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice See Trigger 2 3 on page 343 See Output Type on page 343 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Usage Manual operation 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Event See Trigger 2 3 on page 343 See Output Type on page 343 See Send Trigger on page 344 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port Parameters Length Manual operation 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which
629. ts the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument MODE lt OpMode gt The operating mode of the R amp S FSW determines which applications are available and active Whenever you change the operating mode the currently active measurement channels are stored The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode however the presetting can be changed For details on operating modes and applications see chapter 4 Applications and Oper ating Modes on page 88 Parameters lt OpMode gt SANalyzer MSRanalyzer Example INST MODE MSR Switches to MSRA mode Usage SCPI confirmed INSTrument REName ChannelName1 lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 626 R amp S FSW Remote Commands lt ChannelName2 gt Example Selecting the Operating Mode and Application String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified na
630. ts in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 102 See Start Stop on page 349 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines a stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Ee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 765 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 7 1 2 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters lt Frequency gt min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 102 See Start Stop on page 349 Configuring Signal Tracking When signal tracking is activated the maximum signal is determined after each frequency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal Thus with drifting signals the center frequency follows the signal For more details see chapter 6 3 1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings on page 344 CALOCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack STATe esses eene nnne 766 CAL CulateM Ab kertUNCHon GTRack BANDwidt 766 CAL CulateM Ab kertUNCHon GTRackTH esbod 767 CAL CulateM Ab kertUNCHion GTRack R ACe ninian nnn i ani e a ni 767 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack STATe lt State gt This command turns signal tracking on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Si
631. ts the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 881 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 9 Analyzing Measurements Basics Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 470 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT lt State gt This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 469 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the mea surement Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the mea surement
632. turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker posi tioning on and off __L_L__L LELL ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 861 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Exclude LO on page 451 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion lt Excursion gt This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB Parameters lt Excursion gt The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST 6 dB in the Spectrum application and RF displays Example CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 452 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 162 See Deactivating
633. u have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1NTTiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt RMSPower gt RMS power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt RMSPower gt RMS power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult This command queries the RMS of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt RMSPower gt RMS power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on page 224 SS M User Manual 117
634. ual 1173 9411 02 13 650 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 3 5 Configuring and Performing Measurements You need at least one channel for the command to work Note that this command is not available for MSR ACLR measurements see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 Parameters lt ChannelNumber gt Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Reference Channel on page 123 Checking Limits The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and ACLR measurements The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT QUES ACPL status registry see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 578 CAL CulateLlMit ACbowerACHannel AbBGolute 651 CAL CulateLlMitACbowerACHannel ABGolutez afe 652 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel REI ativel eene nennen 652 CAL CulateLlMit ACbowerACHannel REGu 652 CAL Culate IM ACbower ACHannelt REI ativel STATe nenen eeerererororerersrsrnrnee nn 653 CAL CulateLlMitACbower Al Temate chzAbBGolute 653 CAL CulateLlMitACbower Al Temate chsAB oluteGiaTe 653 CAL CulatelIMitACbower Al Termate chzlREL ativel nene 654 CAL CulateLlMitACbower Al Temate chsRESuI 654 CAL CulatelIMitAChbower Al Temate chzlREL atvelz Aate rere rersrsre nenene 654 CALC late LIMIEACPOwen KN KREE 655 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit of the adjace
635. ual 1173 9411 02 13 859 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 2 Analyzing Measurements Basics Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 239 See Marker 1 2 3 on page 244 See Marker Position X value on page 260 See Marker Table on page 398 See Marker Peak List on page 398 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality Remote commands exclusive to general marker functionality BIEN 860 CALCulate MARKer e KE 861 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off ERREUR RE T S N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 860 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 8 3 3 Analyzing Measurement
636. ual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range RST 0 dBm See Ref Level on page 175 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges Suffix lt range gt Parameters lt SweepTime gt Manual operation 1 30 Selects the measurement range Sweep time The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW Refer to the data sheet for more information See Sweep Time on page 175 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 686 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 5 6 4 Configuring and Performing Measurements SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 175 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt Transducer gt This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range Note that e the transducer must cover at
637. udes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 874 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Eh Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 454 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 867 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 868 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 868 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 868 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 868 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 868 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 869
638. ue The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 481 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Manual operation See Shift x on page 485 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing lt InterpolMode gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolMode gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 897 R amp S FSW Remote Commands EES Analyzing Measurements Basics CALCulate LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing val ues or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate LIMit k UNIT on page 900 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points
639. uencer ON Start sweep in Sequencer INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate OPC Switch into first IQ channel to get results INST SEL IQ 1 WAI CALCulate MARKer MAXimum CALC MARK Y Change sweep time in IQ SENS SWE TIME 300us Switch to single Sequencer mode INITiate SEQuencer MODE SINGle Configuring and Performing Measurements Sweep all channels once taking the sweep count in each channel into account INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate OPC Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate MARKer MAXimum CALC MARK Y Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results INST SEL IQ 2 WAI CALCulate MARKer MIN CALC MARK Y Switch to first Spectrum channel INST SEL Spectrum WAI Query one of the SEM results CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult CPOWer Switch to second Spectrum channel INST SEL Spectrum 2 WAI Query channel power result CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult ACPower 11 5 Configuring and Performing Measurements The following commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environ ment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 Measurements on page 101 e Performing Maeasuretmeltts eoi i Ie ret pen e Renaud ine BESSE 632 e Configuring Power Measurements ise nsie ceste keen inh a dae nta 639 e Measuring the Channel Power and AGLR eese tensa dann nina saa 643 e Measuring the Carrier to Noise Rat
640. uency lo vnl a 278 342 Output remote onirin niini ad iii 836 IF Gain E DT 595 GPIB remote Control sss 960 IF Out Frequency ninth titt 342 IF output es FROM OLE 5c cscs cease eege deed tO ine 836 IF OVLD ENOT M m 74 1009 External generator sesssseeses 296 301 IF OVLD status display eee 75 1009 IF Power Trigger softlKey hir teet 386 Trigger level remote eseseesses 783 Impedance agr 797 TE e 280 Importing FUNCIONS M 494 501 cl P 502 j E 564 Information gie 524 Options Bi KA EE 524 Inherent noise Cancellation sees 124 133 359 Initial configuration 490 Input Connector remote s eese 796 Co plitidg EE 280 Coupling remote esee 796 Overload se Overload remote ssssssssssseeeeee 795 EE Settings D Signal parameters s essen 275 Source Radio frequency RE 279 Source Configuration softkey 279 INPUT OVLD Eu EON TTL OD T IT T 74 1009 INPUT OVLD status display 75 1009 Inserting Limit line VAIUCS tnnt 485 Transducer factors eene 522 Installing e EES 525 547 Instrument messages ssss es
641. uential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 99 SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in chapter 11 4 3 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements on page 630 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual ERREUR RA SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 629 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 98 11 4 3 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a remote environment 2xSpectrumanalyzer 2xIQ start Sequencer at
642. uery STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read QSR Console WriteLine Questionable Status myQSR Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub REM Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register Public Sub Operationstatus Dim myOSR As String Nothing Try myOSR mbSession Query STATus OPERation EVENt Read OSR Console WriteLine Operation Status myOSR Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 11 14 1 8 Evaluation of Event Status Register REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public SUB Esrread Esr SPACES 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESR Read ESR CALL InstrRead analyzer Esr F VAL Esr AND 1 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 2 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Request Control IF VAL Esr AND 4 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Query Error IF VAL Esr AND 8 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Device dependent error F VAL Esr AND 16 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Execution Error Program aborted Output error message STOP Stop software END IF IF VAL Esr AND 32 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Command Error Program aborted Output error message STOP Stop software END IF IF VAL Esr AND 64 gt 0 THEN Debug Print User request IF VAL Esr AND 128 gt 0 THEN Debug Print Power on END SUB REM kk kk kk kk kk kk RE
643. uery only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESult This command queries the standard deviation of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 634 Return values lt StandardDeviation gt Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only 11 5 9 4 Programming Example Time Domain Power This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in chap ter 5 8 6 Measurement Example on page 226 in a remote environment RST Resets the instrument ERREUR E E LS MM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 727 Configuring and Performing Measurements INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode FREQ CENT 1 8GHz Sets the center frequency to 1 8 GHz BAND RES 100kHz Sets the bandwidth to 100 kHz SWE TIME 10ms Sets the sweep time to 640 us FREQ SPAN 0 Sets the instrument to zero span CALC MARK FUNC SUMM STAT ON Turns on time domain power measurements CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS ON Turns the evalution of the mean peak and RMS time domain power CALC MARK X SLIM ON Activates limit lines for evaluation CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1ms Sets the left limit
644. ulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel ch 6 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Programming example This programming example demonstrates how to perform a Carrier to noise measure ment in a remote environment RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 800MHz Sets the center frequency to the carrier frequency of 800 MHz CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CN Activates carrier to noise ratio measurement POW ACH PRES CN Optimizes the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth POW ACH PRES RLEV Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement INIT CONT OFF 11 5 5 11 5 5 1 Configuring and Performing Measurements Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Now turn off the carrier signal and repeat the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN Returns the carrier to noise ratio Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth All remote control commands specific to occupied bandwidth measurements are descri bed here e Configuring the Measurement nannan 671 e Programming Example OBW Meaeurement sese 672 Configuring the Measurement The following commands configure measurements of the occupied bandwidth Useful commands for occupied bandwidth measurements described elsewhere Configur
645. um LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event ERREUR RA ET N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 866 R amp S FSW Remote Commands E E gt aa Analyzing Measurements Basics Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 451 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 454 See Search Next Minimum on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 455 See Search Minimum on page 458 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current mark
646. urement LIMit lt k gt CONDItiON eessssssssss 741 CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz FUNGC on ME asurement LU IMntcks DEL Ta 742 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz GCGham ERAMe nennen CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz GCGham GAhesa sse eene enn rents nenen entren CALOCulate DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK eese CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam XY MlNimum PEAK essere CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe sss eese nnne nnn CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT sss eene enne rnt en nnt nenne CALCulate DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK sess CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz GCGham v MiNimum AbBOye nnne enne CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINiIMUM DEL ow ener nnne CAL Culate D I Tamarker mz GCGhRam v MiNimum NENT CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALOulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute esses eene nennen nnne nennen CAL Culate IM ACbower ACHannel AbBGoluteG Aaie nee CALCulate LIMit AC Power ACHannel RE Gut 652 CALOulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative eese eren 652 CAL Culate Mt ACower ACHannelf REI atvelG ATe enne 653 CALCulate LIMit AC Power ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch
647. urn values lt PrinterName gt String containing the name of one printer as defined in Windows To get a complete list of printers you have to send this query sev eral times until no more printers could be found In that case the return value is an empty string Further queries after the empty string result in an error Usage Query only Manual operation See Device Setup on page 508 See Printer Name on page 510 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device lt PrinterName gt This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R amp S FSW Use HCOPy DESTination lt device gt to select another output destination Suffix device 112 Printing device p P User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 924 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 9 5 Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt PrinterName gt String containing the printer name Use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt and SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT to query all available printers RST NONE Manual operation See Device Setup on page 508 See Printer Name on page 510 Storing Measurement Results The following commands can be used to store the results of a measurement Useful commands for storing results described elsewhere FORMat DATA on page 852 Remote commands ex
648. us Emissions All remote control commands specific to spurious emissions measurements are descri bed here e Initializing the Measurement e Configuring a Sweep List nennen e Configuring the List Evaluation tisian ee tle te RE enne d aaae 708 e Performing a Spurious Measurement A 709 e Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results 709 e Programming Example Spurious Emissions Measurement 709 11 5 7 1 11 5 7 2 Configuring and Performing Measurements Initializing the Measurement Note that with the R amp S FSW the spurious measurement must be initialized before you can start configuring the sweep list or list evaluation eg 700 INITiate SPURious This command initiates a Spurious Emission measurement Usage Event Configuring a Sweep List The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measurements Useful commands for configuring the sweep described elsewhere SENSe SWEep MODE on page 674 Remote commands exclusive to spurious measurements IGENZGe JUST RANGe range DANDwidfRE Soluton nenen en erereroeerorersrsrnnnnnennn 700 SENSe LIST RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo eese 701 SENS amp JEIS T RANGO BREGOK 2 ertt ene EES Eege ER Der eve ENEE E 701 SENSE ILIS T RANGS e f V V M 701 IGENZGe JUST RANGe range DEL ee 702 SENSeJ E
649. using the permanent computer name 1 Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network see chapter 10 5 1 3 How to Change the Instrument Name on page 602 Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey In the Network tab select the Open Dialog Network Connections button Double tap the Local Area Network icon a Boo N In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box select the Properties button The items used by the LAN connection are displayed 6 Tap the entry named Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 to highlight it LEE User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 601 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation mam O M um OI a NN ERES NEU NUT How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control VBW 3 MHz Mode Auto W Local Area Connection Status Networking Networl Connecton Connect using g ZER Broadcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabt Controller Organize D _ Cortigure _ This connection uses the folowing items Network GPIB Computer Name a Local Art G VI E Client for Microsoft Networks a Brosdcol v Bos Packet Scheduler v Bre and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Vi intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IP v6 rotocol Version 4 PAP v4 w A Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Dever Vi Unk Layer Topology Discovery Responder IP Address Subnet Mask Install
650. ve sse 47 Repeatability CP ACLR measurements esses 111 Repetition interval sesssssesseeeeeenenee 387 ic e 387 Resetting RF input protection ssesessssssss 275 795 Reset values Inc 621 Resolution bandwidth Auto Softkey sese 264 369 CP ACLR 114 Hamon tret hit terere rne raii 232 al Lee 362 Manual Softkey m 369 SEM ane iiit i oH e bene ee 175 Spurious Emissions range susssssss 201 Statistics 221 Resolution bandwidth EMI ssssss 252 265 Restoring Channel settings reete detta 274 Standard files seirinin iaaa ini 183 Result displays RI Tel EE 398 Marker table oett et rtr een tnn 398 Dico 398 Result Summary 399 Spectrogralh ia n i rerit Pene eerte 399 Result frequency External generator sss 307 Results ANALYZING ERE CP ACLR measurements Data format remote sssssssss Displaying WEE Exporting e Managing BEE OBW SEM 2 Storing remote ssiri diiss Result Summary Evaluation method sse 399 Result display i tete ern tein 399 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 R amp S FSW Index Reverse sweep External generator esses 301 306 Revision string GPIB
651. ve channels The STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register provides more information on the error type Unused CALibration This bit is set if the R amp S FSW is unaligned UNCAL display LIMit device specific This bit is set if a limit value is violated in any of the active channels in any window The STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register provides more information on the error type 10 LMARgin device specific This bit is set if a margin is violated in any of the active channels in any window The STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register provides more information on the error type 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if the R amp S FSW is not synchronized to the signal that is applied The R amp S FSW is not synchronized if e it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement e it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement e theresults deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements 12 ACPLimit device specific This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels The STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type User Manual 1173 9411 02 115 577 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning 13 Unused 14 Digital UO device specific This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the Di
652. vents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth The storage temperature range for the R amp S FSW is specified in thr data sheet The instrument must be protected against dust if it is to be stored for a long period When transporting or shipping the instrument it is advisable to use the original packing material especially the two protective covers for the front and rear panel User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1007 R amp S FSW Troubleshooting Error Information 13 Troubleshooting 13 1 If problems arise during measurement try the following methods to solve them Uncompleted sequential commands blocked remote channels If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel in order to abort the measurement To regain control over a blocked remote channel 1 Senda Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr The remote channel currentl
653. vior cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeenneeees Sweep points E Sweep time g e Sweep time mode sssssssssss Symmetrical 2 tr rete tree get aaan Transducer Sweep points EI 255 Logarithmic x axis scaling ssussss 346 Sweep Repeat E TEE 595 GPIB remote Control sese 963 Sweeps Reverse external generator s iseer 301 Sweep status Stat s register deed cnet ic ette 575 Sweep time ES Auto Softkey retener tne nn 370 GP AGLR eh rir e ni torres 113 126 Harmonics Manual Softkey sesseeee 370 SEM range dech ct crede eb e ie decet 175 Softkey gs Spurious Emissions range ssusssssss 201 Niue c 214 KEE 370 Sweep time mode SSES sf oit een ence beet 175 Spurious Emissions range susessssss 201 Switching FOCUS ANCA nori ien eere E PR Keyboard display ks Maximized split display sees 40 SWT channel setting sssssssssseeseeee 69 Symmetric setup SEM 177 SEM rages ci oet ett ederet PY 168 SYNC TRIGGER Conneblot iiio cece cts isukan iernare 49 Syntax elements SGP M P M 566 System Configuratio EE Configuration remote sd ep MICSEIPI IM R Preset operating mode ss
654. vironment RST Resets the instrument FREQ CENT 800MHz Sets the center frequency to 800 MHz DISP TRAC Y RLEV 10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dBm CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Activates occupied bandwidth measurement POW BWID 99PCT Sets the percentage of power to 99 POW ACH BAND 21kHz Sets the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz POW ACH PRES OBW Optimizes the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth POW ACH PRES RLEV Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement DET APE Sets the trace detector to positive peak INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returns the occupied bandwidth User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 672 R amp S FSW Remote Commands Configuring and Performing Measurements 11 5 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask All remote control commands specific to spectrum emission mask measurements are described here D See also chapter 11 5 2 Configuring Power Measurements on page 639 11 5 6 1 e Managing Measurement Configurations eese einen 673 e Controlling the Measurement oec eerie ie Peeters 674 e Configuring a Sweep LISL ieieuu eccesso rene teen ette eeu Enna aa 675 e Configuring the Reference Range e s necne ence revoca 687 e Configuring the Power Classes iere rient bere Rueda
655. w the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Drop Out Time on page 388 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 781 R amp S FSW Remote Commands m OE Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements For the trigger sources External or IF Power a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger offset as well Parameters Offset For measurements in the frequency domain the range is 0 s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative sweep time to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 384 See Trigger Offset on page 388 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just IF Power Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time f
656. work administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network A new user can be created on the instrument using the User Account dialog box Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 Inthe Start menu select Control Panel and then select User Accounts 3 Select Give other users access to this computer and then Add The Add New User dialog box is displayed 4 Enter the name of the new user in the text field and select Next 5 Define the level of access you want to allow the new user e Select Standard to create an account with limited rights e Select Administrator to create an account with administrator rights Note Full firmware functionality requires administrator rights 6 Select the Finish button The new user is created How to Change the User Password After the new user has been created on the instrument the password must be adapted to the network password This is also done using the User Accounts dialog box Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system Press CTRL ALT DELETE then select Change a password Enter the user account name Enter the old password Enter the new password in the upper text line and repeat it in the following line oa F YN Press ENTER The new password is now active ERREUR RA E ET SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 606 R amp S FSW Network and Remote Operation How to Set
657. xE FB DN HP 8566B FS HP 8568B HP 8594E FDSP Frequency display off 8560E available 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E FOFFSET FOFFSET Frequency Offset HP 856xE available lt numeric_value gt HZ HP 8566B KHZ MHZ GHZ HP 8568B FOFFSET HP 8594E FREF FREF INT EXT Reference Frequency HP 856xE available HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E FS FS Full Span HP 8566A available HP 8568A FUNCDEF Define Function Function HP 8594E available must be in one line HP 856xE between delimiters HP 8566B GATE GATE ON OFF HP 856xE available GATE 1 0 HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E GATECTL GATECTL EDGE LEVEL HP 856xE available GATECTL HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 970 R amp S FSW Remote Commands i Ee Emulating Other Instruments Commands Command Supported subset Function Corresp HP Status Models GD GD numeric value HP 856xE available USIMSISC HP 8566B GDIDN HP 8568B SR HP 8594E GD GL GL lt numeric_value gt US HP 856xE available Msi HP 8566B SERN HP 8568B GRUE HP 8594E GL GP GP POS NEG HP 856xE available GP HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E GRAT GRAT Graticule HP 856xE available ON OFF HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E 11 11 HP 8566A available HP 8568A I2 12 HP 8566A available HP 8568A ID ID Identify HP 8566A available ID HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E INZ INZ 75 Input Impedance HP 856xE available
658. y Bar on page 539 DISPlay TBAR STATe State This command turns the toolbar on or off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP TOOL ON Manual operation See Toolbar on page 538 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe lt State gt This command controls the touch screen functionality Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Touch screen is active for entire screen OFF 0 Touch screen is inactivate for entire screen FRAMe Touch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen but active for softkeys toolbars and menus RST 1 Example DISP TOUC STAT ON Manual operation See Deactivating and Activating the Touch Screen on page 536 DISPlay WINDow TIME State This command adds or removes the date and time from the display Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP TIME ON SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 942 R amp S FSW Remote Commands 11 10 5 2 Configuring the R amp S FSW Manual operation See Date and Time on page 539 DISPlay WINDow TIME FORMat Format This command selects the time and date format Parameters lt Format gt DE dd mm yyyy hh mm ss 24 hour format US mm dd yyyy hh mm ss 12 hour format RST DE Example DISP TIME ON Switches the screen display of date and time on DISP TIME FORM US Switches the date and time format to US Manual operation See Date and Time Format on page 537 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe
659. y corresponds to one list entry Range 0 to Fmax Default unit Hz Defines the reference level for a list entry Range 130 to 30 Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm Defines the RF attenuation for a list entry Range 0 to 70 Increment 1 Default unit dB Defines the electronic attenuation for a list entry Range 0 to 30 Increment 1 Default unit dB Selects the filter type for a list entry For more information see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE Defines the resolution bandwidth for a list entry Defines the video bandwidth for a list entry Defines the measurement time for a list entry Range 1 us to 16000 s The trigger level must be 0 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 747 R amp S FSW Remote Commands mu S O H M Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values lt PowerLevel gt Power level for each frequency included in the measurement The command returns up to 3 power levels for each frequency depending on the number of evaluation modes you have turned on with SENSe LIST POWer SET The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer SENSe LIST POWer SET lt PeakPower gt lt RMSPower gt lt AVGPower gt lt TriggerSource gt lt TriggerSlope gt lt Tr
660. y processing the uncompleted command is then ready to receive further commands again 2 Onthe remote channel performing the measurement send the SCPI command ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system Ignored commands When a remote command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not auto matically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings rege Le E 1008 e Error Messages in Remote Control Mode 1010 Obtaining Technical SUP GEET 1011 Error Information If errors or irregularities are detected a keyword and an error message if available are displayed in the status bar Depending on the type of message the status message is indicated in varying colors User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 1008 R amp S FSW Troubleshooting Error Information Table 13 1 Status bar information color coding Color Type Description red Fatal A serious error occurred in the application regular operation is no longer pos sible red Error An error occurred during a measurement e g due to missing data or wrong settings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no longer match
661. zing Measurements Basics Parameters lt Mode gt POWer Result is displayed as a power in dBm DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Return values lt Power gt Signal power over the delta marker bandwidth Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position Parameters lt Span gt Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R amp S FSW model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off If neccessary the command also turns on a reference marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonNDBDown 887 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuenoy esses 888 CAL CulateMAb kerFUNCHonNDBDowpn OEAChor 888 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonNDBDown REGut 888 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzFUNGCHonNDBDown STATe 889 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME cccccesceeceesecessseeceeseeeceeeeeaes 889 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCti

R&S FSW User Manual - rohde

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW User Manual - rohde

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW User Manual - rohde